WO2012070575A1 - Light emitting device and method for producing light emitting device - Google Patents

Light emitting device and method for producing light emitting device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012070575A1
WO2012070575A1 PCT/JP2011/076913 JP2011076913W WO2012070575A1 WO 2012070575 A1 WO2012070575 A1 WO 2012070575A1 JP 2011076913 W JP2011076913 W JP 2011076913W WO 2012070575 A1 WO2012070575 A1 WO 2012070575A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
substituent
light emitting
electrode
formula
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/076913
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
祥司 美馬
Original Assignee
住友化学株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 住友化学株式会社 filed Critical 住友化学株式会社
Publication of WO2012070575A1 publication Critical patent/WO2012070575A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/10Apparatus or processes specially adapted to the manufacture of electroluminescent light sources
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B33/00Electroluminescent light sources
    • H05B33/12Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
    • H05B33/26Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces characterised by the composition or arrangement of the conductive material used as an electrode
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/80Constructional details
    • H10K59/86Series electrical configurations of multiple OLEDs

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a light emitting device and a manufacturing method thereof.
  • An organic electroluminescence element (hereinafter, “electroluminescence” may be referred to as “EL”) is a type of light-emitting element that emits light when a voltage is applied. And a light emitting layer disposed between the electrodes. When a voltage is applied to the organic EL element, holes are injected from the anode and electrons are injected from the cathode. Light emission occurs when these holes and electrons are combined in the light emitting layer.
  • an organic EL element having a configuration in which only a light emitting layer is provided between an anode and a cathode it is difficult to obtain the desired light emitting characteristics. Therefore, a predetermined layer other than the light emitting layer is usually provided between the anode and the cathode. Is further provided. As such a layer, for example, an electron injection layer that facilitates electron injection from the cathode may be provided.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 2 in which a plurality (three in FIG. 9) of organic EL elements 1 are connected in series.
  • FIG. 9A is a plan view of the light-emitting device 2
  • FIG. 9B is a cross-sectional view of the light-emitting device 2.
  • the light emitting device 2 shown in FIG. 9 includes three organic EL elements 1. These three organic EL elements 1 are arranged along a predetermined arrangement direction X on the support substrate 3 and are connected in series.
  • Each organic EL element 1 shown in FIG. 9 includes a pair of electrodes 4 and 5, and a light emitting layer 6 and an electron injection layer 7 provided between the electrodes.
  • a first electrode 4 an electrode disposed near the support substrate 3
  • an electrode disposed farther from the support substrate 2 than the first electrode 4 is a second electrode.
  • an electrode 5 One of the first and second electrodes 4 and 5 functions as an anode, and the other functions as a cathode.
  • FIG. 9 shows the organic EL element 1 having a configuration in which the first electrode 4 functions as an anode and the second electrode 5 functions as a cathode.
  • the organic EL element 1 is configured by laminating the first electrode 4, the light emitting layer 6, the electron injection layer 7, and the second electrode 5 on the support substrate 2 in this order.
  • the light emitting layer 6 and the electron injection layer 7 not only the light emitting layer 6 and the electron injection layer 7 but also a predetermined layer different from these layers is provided between the first and second electrodes 4 and 5.
  • a predetermined layer different from these layers is provided between the first and second electrodes 4 and 5.
  • the first electrodes 4 of the organic EL elements 1 are discretely arranged at a predetermined interval in the arrangement direction X and are not electrically connected to each other.
  • the second electrodes 5 of the respective organic EL elements 1 are not electrically connected to each other because they are arranged at a predetermined interval in the arrangement direction X.
  • the first electrodes 4 and the second electrodes 5 of the plurality of organic EL elements are not electrically connected to each other.
  • the first electrode 4 and the second electrode 5 of the organic EL element 1 adjacent in the arrangement direction X are physically connected and electrically connected to each other.
  • the plurality of organic EL elements 1 constitutes a series connection.
  • the first electrode 4 is one of the arrangement directions X (hereinafter, “one of the arrangement directions X” may be referred to as “left”, and “the other of the arrangement directions X” may be referred to as right). Up to a position where the end (hereinafter also referred to as the left end) overlaps the right end (hereinafter also referred to as the right end) of the second electrode 5 of the organic EL element 1 adjacent to the left.
  • the some organic EL element 1 comprises a serial connection.
  • the first electrode 4 is formed on the support substrate 3. Specifically, three first electrodes 4 are discretely formed on the support substrate 3 at predetermined intervals in the arrangement direction X (see FIG. 10A).
  • an ink containing a material that becomes the light emitting layer 6 is applied onto the support substrate 3 by a predetermined application method.
  • the coating method it is difficult for the coating method to selectively apply ink (ink) in a pattern only to an intended portion, and ink is also applied to unnecessary portions such as between the first electrodes 4 (see FIG. 10 (2)). . Therefore, after applying the ink, a step of removing the ink applied to unnecessary portions is required (see FIG. 10 (3)).
  • This ink can be removed by, for example, a method of wiping the ink using a cloth or cotton swab containing a solvent in which the ink is soluble, a laser ablation method, or the like.
  • the electron injection layer 7 is generally made of an electron injection material that is unstable in the atmosphere.
  • the electron injection layer is made of Ba, BaO, LiF, NaF, or the like, and is usually formed in a vacuum atmosphere.
  • the second electrode 5 is patterned (see FIG. 10 (5)).
  • a light emitting device 2 including three organic EL elements 1 connected in series can be manufactured.
  • the above-described conventional technique has a problem that the number of steps increases because a step of removing ink applied to unnecessary portions is required. Further, when removing the ink applied to unnecessary portions, there is a possibility that foreign matters may be mixed into the light emitting layer.
  • the electron injection layer is formed in a vacuum atmosphere as described above. Therefore, there has been a demand for an electron injection material that can be formed by a simple process that does not require a vacuum atmosphere and that also functions as an electron injection layer.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide an electron injection layer that has a structure that does not require a step of removing ink applied to unnecessary portions when forming a light emitting layer by a coating method, and can be easily formed.
  • a light emitting device including a plurality of organic EL elements and a method for manufacturing the same.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting device including a support substrate and a plurality of organic electroluminescence elements that are provided on the support substrate along a predetermined arrangement direction and connected in series.
  • Each organic electroluminescence element includes a pair of electrodes, a light emitting layer and an electron injection layer provided between the electrodes, The light emitting layer extends along the predetermined arrangement direction across the plurality of organic electroluminescence elements,
  • Each of the pair of electrodes extends so as to protrude from the light emitting layer in a width direction perpendicular to both the thickness direction of the support substrate and the arrangement direction when viewed from one thickness direction of the support substrate.
  • Part One electrode of the pair of electrodes extends from the extension portion to the other electrode of the organic electroluminescence element adjacent in the arrangement direction, and is connected to the other electrode. Further comprising
  • the electron injection layer relates to a light emitting device including an ionic polymer.
  • One embodiment of the present invention further includes an auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the electrode,
  • the auxiliary electrode relates to a light emitting device having a sheet resistance lower than that of an electrode in contact with the auxiliary electrode.
  • one embodiment of the present invention relates to a light emitting device in which the auxiliary electrode is provided in contact with an electrode having a higher sheet resistance among the pair of electrodes.
  • one embodiment of the present invention relates to a light-emitting device in which only the electrode having the lower sheet resistance among the pair of electrodes has the connection portion.
  • the extending portion includes a first extending portion that extends so as to protrude from the light emitting layer in one of the width directions when viewed from one of the thickness directions, and the other in the width direction. And a second extending portion extending so as to protrude from the light emitting layer.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting device including a support substrate and a plurality of organic electroluminescence elements that are provided on the support substrate along a predetermined arrangement direction and connected in series.
  • Each organic electroluminescence element includes a pair of electrodes, a light emitting layer and an electron injection layer provided between the electrodes, The light emitting layer extends along the predetermined arrangement direction across the plurality of organic electroluminescence elements,
  • Each of the pair of electrodes has an extending portion that extends from the light emitting layer in the width direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the support substrate and the arrangement direction when viewed from one thickness direction of the support substrate.
  • a method for manufacturing a light emitting device further comprising: The ink containing the material to be the light emitting layer is continuously applied across the plurality of electrodes arranged on the support substrate along the predetermined arrangement direction, and light is emitted by solidifying the applied coating film. Forming a layer; And a step of forming the electron injection layer by coating and forming an ink containing an ionic polymer.
  • the ink containing the material to be the light emitting layer is continuously applied along the predetermined arrangement direction across the region where the plurality of organic electroluminescent elements are arranged when completed.
  • the light emitting layer is formed by solidifying the coated film.
  • a method of applying the ink including the material to be the light emitting layer is a cap coat method, a slit coat method, a spray coat method, or a printing method.
  • the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a light emitting device.
  • one embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a light-emitting device in which ink is applied in an air atmosphere in the step of forming the electron injection layer.
  • a plurality of electron injection layers having a structure that does not require a step of removing ink applied to unnecessary portions when forming a light emitting layer by a coating method and that can be easily formed.
  • a light-emitting device including the organic EL element and a manufacturing method thereof can be realized.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process of the light emitting device 11.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process of the light emitting device 11.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process of the light emitting device 11.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the light emitting device 31 of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 41 according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 51 of the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a light emitting device 61 according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 2 in which a plurality of organic EL elements 1 are connected in series.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process of the light emitting device 2.
  • FIG. 1 is a plan view schematically showing a light emitting device 11 according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the light emitting device 11 includes a support substrate 12 and a plurality of organic EL elements 13 provided on the support substrate 12 and connected in series.
  • the predetermined arrangement direction X is set in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction Z of the support substrate 12. That is, the arrangement direction X is set parallel to the main surface of the support substrate 12.
  • the plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged along a predetermined straight line, but may be arranged along a predetermined curve.
  • the arrangement direction X corresponds to the tangential direction of the predetermined curve.
  • the number of organic EL elements 13 provided on the support substrate 12 is appropriately set according to the design.
  • a light emitting device 11 provided with three organic EL elements 13 will be described below.
  • Each organic EL element 13 includes a pair of electrodes 14 and 15, and a light emitting layer 16 and an electron injection layer 20 provided between the electrodes 14 and 15.
  • any one of the pair of electrodes 14 and 15 functions as an anode of the organic EL element 13, and the other electrode functions as a cathode of the organic EL element 13.
  • an electrode disposed near the support substrate 12 is referred to as a first electrode 14, and the other electrode disposed apart from the support substrate 12 is referred to as a second electrode 15.
  • an organic EL element in which the first electrode 14 functions as an anode and the second electrode 15 functions as a cathode will be described.
  • the electron injection layer 20 is provided between the light emitting layer 16 and the electrode functioning as the cathode of the pair of electrodes 14 and 15.
  • the electron injection layer 20 is preferably disposed at a position in contact with the cathode.
  • the first electrode 14 functions as an anode and the second electrode 15 functions as a cathode. Therefore, the organic EL element includes the first electrode 14, the light emitting layer 20, the electron injection layer 16, the second electrode.
  • the electrodes 15 are stacked in this order.
  • the organic EL element is supported by the first electrode, the electron injection layer, the light emitting layer, and the second electrode. The layers are stacked in this order from the substrate side.
  • a predetermined layer other than the light emitting layer 16 and the electron injection layer 20 may be further provided between the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 as necessary.
  • the light emitting layer 16 extends along the arrangement direction X across the plurality of organic EL elements 13, and the plurality of organic EL elements 13 share one light emitting layer 16. That is, in this embodiment, in the plurality of organic EL elements 13 connected in series, from the light emitting layer 16 of the organic EL element 13 provided at one end in the arrangement direction X (left end in FIG. 1), the other end in the arrangement direction X (see FIG. The light emitting layer extending along the arrangement direction X is continuously and integrally formed up to the light emitting layer 16 of the organic EL element 13 provided at the right end in FIG.
  • the electron injection layer 20 preferably extends along the arrangement direction X across the plurality of organic EL elements 13, similarly to the light emitting layer 16. This is because, as will be described later, when the electron injection layer is formed by a coating method, a step of removing the electron injection layer formed at an unnecessary portion can be omitted.
  • the electron injection layer 20 When the electron injection layer 20 is formed so as to cover the light emitting layer 16, a site where the first electrode and the second electrode are connected only through the electron injection layer 20 is generated. In such a configuration, if the electron injection layer 20 exhibits conductivity, the first electrode and the second electrode may be electrically connected. Therefore, when the electron injection layer 20 exhibits conductivity, The electron injection layer 20 is preferably formed inside the light emitting layer 16 in plan view. When the electron injection layer 20 is formed in this way, a portion where the first electrode and the second electrode are connected only through the electron injection layer 20 does not occur, and there is no conductivity between the first electrode and the second electrode. Since a light emitting layer having a low thickness inevitably intervenes, leakage current can be prevented from occurring between the first electrode and the second electrode.
  • a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer and the electron injection layer may be provided between the first and second electrodes 14 and 15.
  • the predetermined layer may extend along the arrangement direction X across the plurality of organic EL elements 13. Further, the predetermined layer may be formed so as to be separated for each organic EL element 13.
  • the predetermined layer is arranged in the arrangement direction across the plurality of organic EL elements 13 like the light emitting layer 16. It preferably extends along X. This is because a step of removing a layer formed at an unnecessary portion can be omitted as will be described later.
  • the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 have extending portions 17 and 18, respectively.
  • the extending portions 17 and 18 extend so as to protrude from the light emitting layer 16 in the width direction Y when viewed from one side in the thickness direction Z of the support substrate 12 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “in plan view”). Exists.
  • the width direction Y is a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction Z of the support substrate and the arrangement direction X.
  • the extending portion 17 of the first electrode 14 is formed integrally with the first electrode 14.
  • the extending portion 18 of the second electrode 15 is formed integrally with the second electrode 15.
  • the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 (a pair of electrodes) constituting each organic EL element 13 are not in contact with each other for each organic EL element 13.
  • each organic EL element 13 it arrange
  • the extending portion 17 of the first electrode 14 extends in the width direction Y from the left end portion (hereinafter also referred to as the left end portion) of the portion facing the second electrode 15 in the first electrode 14. Extend.
  • the extending portion 18 of the second electrode 15 extends in the width direction Y from the right end portion (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the right end portion) of the second electrode 15 facing the first electrode 14. Yes. Therefore, the extending portion 17 of the first electrode 14 and the extending portion 18 of the second electrode 15 do not overlap in plan view but are electrically insulated.
  • One electrode of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 has a connection portion.
  • the connecting portion extends in the arrangement direction X from the extending portion to the other electrode of the organic EL element adjacent in the arrangement direction X, and is connected to the other electrode.
  • the other electrode of the pair of electrodes also extends in the arrangement direction X from the extension portion to one electrode of the organic EL element adjacent in the arrangement direction X, and is connected to the one electrode. You may have a connection part.
  • the first electrode 14 corresponding to one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 has a connection portion 19. That is, the first electrode 14 extends to the left from the extending portion 17 of the first electrode 14 to the extending portion 18 of the second electrode 15 (the other electrode) of the organic EL element disposed on the left. Connecting portion 19 is provided. As described above, the connection portion 19 of the first electrode 14 overlaps with the extension portion 18 of the second electrode 15 (the other electrode) of the organic EL element disposed on the left side in a plan view, and directly at the overlapping portion. It is connected to the second electrode 15 (the other electrode).
  • the extending portion 18 extending in the width direction Y from the light emitting layer 16 in plan view is provided in one or the other of the width directions Y, but is preferably provided in both the width directions Y. That is, the extended portions 17 and 18 protrude from the light emitting layer 16 in the width direction Y and the first extending portions 17a and 18a extending so as to protrude from the light emitting layer in one of the width directions in a plan view. It is preferable to include the second extending portions 17b and 18b extending so as to.
  • the 1st electrode 14 and the 2nd electrode 15 of the adjacent organic EL element 13 are width direction. It will be connected at both ends of Y.
  • the first electrode 14 of the organic EL element 13 arranged on the leftmost side and the second electrode of the organic EL element 13 arranged on the rightmost side Are respectively connected to wirings electrically connected to a power supply unit (not shown).
  • a power supply unit not shown.
  • Each organic EL element 13 is supplied with power from the connecting portion.
  • the organic EL elements 13 are supplied with power from both ends in the width direction Y by providing the extending portions 17 and 18 extending in the width direction Y from the light emitting layer 16 in plan view.
  • the luminance decreases due to a voltage drop.
  • the luminance decreases due to the voltage drop. Since power is supplied from the end portion, the influence of the voltage drop can be suppressed as compared with the element configuration that is supplied from one end portion in the width direction Y, and thus luminance unevenness (spots) can be suppressed.
  • the method for manufacturing a light-emitting device includes a support substrate and a plurality of organic electroluminescent elements provided on the support substrate along a predetermined arrangement direction and connected in series.
  • Each organic electroluminescence element includes a pair of electrodes, a light emitting layer and an electron injection layer provided between the electrodes, and the light emitting layer spans the plurality of organic electroluminescence elements,
  • Each of the pair of electrodes extends along a predetermined arrangement direction, and each of the pair of electrodes has a light emitting layer in a thickness direction of the support substrate and a width direction perpendicular to the arrangement direction when viewed from one thickness direction of the support substrate.
  • An organic electroluminescence element having an extending portion extending so as to protrude from the first electrode, wherein one of the pair of electrodes is adjacent to the arrangement direction
  • a method of manufacturing a light emitting device further including a connecting portion that extends in the arrangement direction from the extending portion to the other electrode and is connected to the other electrode, the ink including a material that becomes the light emitting layer
  • a step of forming a light emitting layer by solidly applying the applied coating across the plurality of electrodes arranged on the support substrate along the predetermined arrangement direction, and solidifying the applied coating; Forming the electron injection layer by coating and forming an ink containing a polymer.
  • the support substrate 12 is prepared.
  • a support substrate 12 on which a drive circuit (not shown) for driving the organic EL element 13 is formed in advance may be prepared.
  • the first electrode 14 is patterned on the support substrate 12 (see FIG. 2).
  • a conductive film is formed on the support substrate 12 by sputtering or vapor deposition, and then the first electrode 14 is patterned by patterning the conductive film into a predetermined shape by photolithography.
  • the first electrode 14 may be pattern-formed only at a predetermined portion by a mask vapor deposition method or the like without performing a photolithography process.
  • the first electrode 14 may be formed by transferring a conductive thin film by a laminating method.
  • the light emitting layer 16 is formed on the support substrate 12 (see FIG. 3).
  • ink containing a material that becomes the light emitting layer 16 is continuously applied across the plurality of first electrodes 14 arranged on the support substrate 12 along a predetermined arrangement direction, and the applied coating film is solidified. That is, by applying the ink including the material to be the light emitting layer 16 continuously along the arrangement direction X across the region where the plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged when completed, and solidifying the applied coating film The light emitting layer 16 can be formed.
  • Coating film can be solidified by natural drying, heat drying, vacuum drying, or the like. Moreover, when a coating film contains the material polymerized by applying energy, the coating film can be solidified by heating or light irradiation.
  • the electron injection layer 20 is formed on the support substrate 12 (see FIG. 4).
  • the electron injection layer 20 can be formed by continuously applying an ink containing an ionic polymer along the arrangement direction X onto the light emitting layer 16 and solidifying the applied coating film. That is, the ink containing the ionic polymer is continuously applied along the arrangement direction X across the region where the plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged, and the applied coating film is solidified to solidify the electron injection layer 20.
  • Ionic polymers are relatively stable in the atmosphere and can facilitate electron injection from the cathode. Details of the ionic polymer that can be applied to the present invention will be described later.
  • Coating film can be solidified by natural drying, heat drying, vacuum drying, or the like. Moreover, when a coating film contains the material polymerized by applying energy, the coating film can be solidified by heating or light irradiation.
  • the ink can be applied in an air atmosphere.
  • the step of forming the electron injection layer can be simplified as compared with the conventional technique.
  • the step of solidifying the film when applied is also preferably performed in an air atmosphere.
  • the electron injection layer 20 when the electron injection layer 20 exhibits conductivity, the electron injection layer 20 is preferably formed inside the light emitting layer 16 in plan view.
  • the film formation method of the second electrode 15 includes a vapor deposition method.
  • the second electrode 15 can be patterned by using a metal mask or the like.
  • the second electrode 15 can be formed using a coating method or a laminating method in the air atmosphere.
  • the second electrode 14 is formed by applying ink containing a conductive material by a predetermined coating method and solidifying the coated film.
  • the laminating method the second electrode 14 is formed by transferring a conductive thin film.
  • a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer 16 and the electron injection layer 20 may be provided between the first and second electrodes 14 and 15.
  • the predetermined layer is preferably formed by a coating method as in the case of the light emitting layer. That is, an ink containing a material that becomes a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer and the electron injection layer is continuously applied along the arrangement direction X across a region where the plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged at the time of completion.
  • the predetermined layer is preferably formed by solidifying the coated film.
  • a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer and the electron injection layer is formed by a dry method such as vapor deposition, the predetermined layer may be selectively formed only on the first electrode 14.
  • Examples of the ink application method include a cap coating method, a slit coating method, a spray coating method, a printing method, an ink jet method, and a nozzle printing method. Among these methods, a large area can be efficiently applied. Possible cap coating methods, slit coating methods, spray coating methods and printing methods are preferred.
  • the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 of the adjacent organic EL elements 13 are connected in the region protruding in the width direction Y from the region where the light emitting layer 16 is formed in plan view. Thereby, the adjacent organic EL elements 13 are connected in series. Therefore, it is not necessary to connect the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 of the adjacent organic EL elements 13 in the region between the organic EL elements 13. For this reason, a light emitting layer or the like may be formed in a region between adjacent organic EL elements 13, whereby a light emitting layer formed in a region between adjacent organic EL elements 13 when forming a light emitting layer by a coating method. The step of removing can be omitted. Therefore, even if it is a coating method such as a cap coat method that is relatively poor at applying a fine pattern, a plurality of organic EL elements 13 connected in series can be easily produced.
  • an electron injection layer can be easily formed using an ionic polymer.
  • the electron injection layer can be applied and formed in an air atmosphere.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 31 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the light emitting device 31 of this embodiment is different from the light emitting device 11 of the first embodiment described above only in the shapes of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15.
  • first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 of the second embodiment will be described.
  • portions corresponding to those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description is omitted.
  • the second electrode 15 in addition to the first electrode 14, the second electrode 15 also has a connection portion 32. That is, the second electrode 15 has a connecting portion 32 that extends from the extending portion to the first electrode 14 of the organic EL element adjacent in the arranging direction X in the arranging direction X and is connected to the first electrode 14.
  • the connection part 19 of the first electrode 14 of the organic EL element 13 arranged on the right side extends from the extension part 17 of the first electrode 14 to the left side.
  • the connection part 32 of the second electrode 15 of the organic EL element 13 arranged on the left side extends from the extension part 18 of the second electrode 15 to the right side.
  • the connection part 19 of these 1st electrodes 14 and the connection part 32 of the 2nd electrode 15 overlap, and the 1st electrode 14 and 2nd electrode 15 of a pair of adjacent organic EL element 13 are connected.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 41 according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • the light emitting device 41 of this embodiment differs from the light emitting device 11 of the first embodiment described above only in the shapes of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15.
  • first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 of the third embodiment will be described.
  • portions corresponding to those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description is omitted.
  • the first electrode 14 does not have the connection portion 19, and conversely, the second electrode 15 has the connection portion 42. That is, the second electrode 15 extends in the arrangement direction X from the extension portion to the first electrode 14 of the organic EL element adjacent in the arrangement direction X, and is connected to the first electrode 15.
  • the first electrode 14 has the connection portion 19.
  • the second electrode 15 is connected. Part 42.
  • the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 it is preferable that only the electrode having the lower sheet resistance has a connection portion. That is, when the sheet resistance of the first electrode 14 is lower than the sheet resistance of the second electrode 15, it is preferable that only the first electrode 14 has the connection portion 19 as in the light emitting device 11 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1. .
  • the sheet resistance of the second electrode 15 is lower than the sheet resistance of the first electrode 14, only the second electrode 15 may have the connection portion 42 as in the light emitting device 41 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 7. preferable.
  • any one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 is configured by a member that exhibits light transmittance in order to emit light emitted from the light emitting layer 16 to the outside.
  • a member exhibiting light transmittance has a higher sheet resistance than a conductive member exhibiting opaqueness.
  • one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 that exhibits optical transparency usually has a higher sheet resistance. Therefore, it is usually preferable that only the other electrode, which is not one electrode exhibiting optical transparency, has a connection portion.
  • connection part constituted by the conductor When driving the light-emitting device, a voltage drop also occurs in the connection part constituted by the conductor, but by providing the connection part only on the electrode constituted by a member having a low sheet resistance, the voltage generated in the connection part Lowering can be suppressed, and as a result, power consumption can be reduced.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 51 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the light emitting device 51 of the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the electrode.
  • the light emitting device 51 of this embodiment differs from the light emitting devices of the above-described embodiments only in the presence or absence of an auxiliary electrode. Below, only the auxiliary electrode of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated.
  • portions corresponding to those of the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description is omitted.
  • the region indicating the auxiliary electrode is hatched.
  • the auxiliary electrode is provided in contact with at least one of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 (a pair of electrodes). For example, when the auxiliary electrode is provided in contact with the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15, two of the auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the first electrode 14 and the auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the second electrode 15. Two auxiliary electrodes are provided.
  • the auxiliary electrode is composed of a member having a sheet resistance lower than that of the electrode in contact with the auxiliary electrode.
  • the auxiliary electrode 52 is preferably provided in contact with the electrode having the higher sheet resistance among the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 (a pair of electrodes).
  • any one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 is configured by a member that exhibits light transmittance in order to emit light emitted from the light emitting layer 16 to the outside.
  • One electrode exhibiting light transmittance usually has a higher sheet resistance than the other electrode. Therefore, it is usually preferable that the auxiliary electrode 52 is provided in contact with the light transmissive electrode of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15. In the light emitting device 51 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the auxiliary electrode 52 is provided in contact with the first electrode 14 provided as an electrode exhibiting light transmittance.
  • the auxiliary electrode 52 is usually opaque because the sheet resistance is lower than the electrode with which the auxiliary electrode 52 is in contact. When the opaque auxiliary electrode 52 is provided in contact with the electrode through which light is transmitted, the auxiliary electrode 52 may block the light. Therefore, the auxiliary electrode 52 is preferably provided in a region where the light emitting layer 16 does not emit light in principle in a plan view.
  • the light emitting layer 16 can emit light in principle in a region where the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 are opposed to each other in plan view (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a facing region). For this reason, the region that does not emit light in principle corresponds to a region excluding the opposing region of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 in plan view. Therefore, it is preferable that the auxiliary electrode 52 be provided in a region excluding a region where the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 are opposed in plan view.
  • the auxiliary electrode may be formed in the opposing region of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 in a plan view in consideration of the light emission amount and the voltage drop.
  • the auxiliary electrode may be provided in the periphery of the opposing region and the opposing region.
  • An electrode may be formed.
  • the auxiliary electrode may be formed in a lattice shape, a stripe shape, or a linear shape in the opposing region in plan view, and the auxiliary electrode formed in the opposing region may be connected to the auxiliary electrode formed in the periphery of the opposing region.
  • a material having high electrical conductivity is preferably used, and examples thereof include Al, Ag, Cu, Au, and W.
  • An alloy such as Al—Nd, Ag—Pd—Cu may be used for the auxiliary electrode.
  • the thickness of the auxiliary electrode is appropriately set depending on the required sheet resistance, and is, for example, 50 nm to 2000 nm.
  • the auxiliary electrode may be constituted by a single layer, or may be a laminate in which a plurality of layers are laminated. For example, a predetermined function is exhibited for the purpose of improving the adhesion with the support substrate 12 (glass substrate or the like) or the first electrode 14 (ITO thin film or the like) and protecting the metal surface from oxygen or moisture.
  • the layer may be laminated on a thin film made of a material having high electrical conductivity.
  • a laminated body composed of a thin film made of Mo, Mo—Nb, Cr, or the like and sandwiching a thin film made of a material having high electrical conductivity can be used as the auxiliary electrode.
  • each embodiment mentioned above has shown the light-emitting device by which one series connection was comprised by the some organic EL element, even if it is a light-emitting device by which the some series connection was comprised by the some organic EL element, this book The invention can be suitably applied. Further, the present invention can be suitably applied even to a light-emitting device configured by using both serial connection and parallel connection.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a light emitting device 61 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the light emitting device 61 of the present embodiment is a light emitting device having a configuration in which two rows of serial connections are connected in parallel. Each series connection is composed of three organic EL elements. In the two columns in series connection, one end and the other end of the electrodes of each organic EL element are electrically connected and connected in parallel.
  • the voltage of a drive source that drives the elements increases as the number of organic EL elements increases.
  • the supply voltage required for the source can be moderately suppressed.
  • the layer provided between the cathode and the light emitting layer include an electron transport layer and a hole blocking layer.
  • the hole blocking layer has a function of blocking hole transport.
  • these layers may also serve as the hole blocking layer.
  • Examples of the layer provided between the anode and the light emitting layer include a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, and an electron block layer.
  • the layer in contact with the anode is called a hole injection layer, and the layers other than the hole injection layer are positive. It is called a hole transport layer.
  • the hole injection layer has a function of improving the hole injection efficiency from the anode.
  • the hole transport layer has a function of improving hole injection from a layer in contact with the surface on the anode side.
  • the electron blocking layer has a function of blocking electron transport. When the hole injection layer and / or the hole transport layer has a function of blocking electron transport, these layers may also serve as an electron blocking layer.
  • the electron injection layer and the hole injection layer may be collectively referred to as a charge injection layer, and the electron transport layer and the hole transport layer may be collectively referred to as a charge transport layer.
  • An example of a layer structure that can be taken by the organic EL element of the present embodiment is shown below.
  • a) Anode / hole injection layer / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / cathode b) Anode / hole injection layer / light emitting layer / electron transport layer / electron injection layer / cathode c) Anode / hole injection layer / hole transport Layer / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / cathode d) anode / hole injection layer / hole transport layer / light emitting layer / electron transport layer / electron injection layer / cathode e) anode / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / cathode f) Anode / light-emitting layer / electron transport layer / electron injection layer / cathode (Here, the symbol “/” indicates that the layers sandwiching the symbol “/” are stacked adjacent to each other. The same applies hereinafter.)
  • the organic EL element of this embodiment may have two or more light emitting layers.
  • structural unit A when the laminate sandwiched between the anode and the cathode is referred to as “structural unit A”, the configuration of an organic EL element having two light emitting layers is obtained.
  • the layer structure shown in the following g) can be given. Note that the two (structural unit A) layer configurations may be the same or different.
  • examples of the constitution of the organic EL element having three or more light emitting layers include the layer constitution shown in the following h).
  • (Structural unit B) x represents a stacked body in which the structural unit B is stacked in x stages.
  • a plurality of (the structural unit B) may have the same or different layer structure.
  • the charge generation layer is a layer that generates holes and electrons by applying an electric field.
  • Examples of the charge generation layer include a thin film made of vanadium oxide, indium tin oxide (abbreviated as ITO), molybdenum oxide, or the like.
  • the organic EL element may be covered with a sealing member such as a sealing film and a sealing plate for hermetically sealing the element.
  • the organic EL elements are laminated on the support substrate in order from the left layer in the layer configurations of a) to h) given as an example, or are laminated on the support substrate in order from the right layer.
  • the first electrode 14 corresponds to the anode when stacked on the support substrate sequentially from the left layer, that is, when stacked on the support substrate sequentially from the anode.
  • the second electrode 15 corresponds to the cathode.
  • the first electrode 14 is the cathode.
  • the second electrode 15 corresponds to the anode.
  • Organic EL elements include (1) a bottom emission type, (2) a top emission type, and (3) a dual emission type.
  • the bottom emission type organic EL element emits light to the outside through a support substrate.
  • the top emission type organic EL element emits light to the outside from the side opposite to the support substrate.
  • the double-sided light emitting organic EL element emits light to the outside from both the support substrate side and the opposite side of the support substrate.
  • the present invention can be applied to any of bottom emission type, top emission type, and double-sided emission type organic EL elements.
  • the first electrode 14 is composed of an electrode exhibiting light transmittance, and conversely, the second electrode is composed of an electrode reflecting normal light.
  • the second electrode 15 is constituted by an electrode exhibiting light transmittance
  • the first electrode 14 is constituted by an electrode reflecting normal light.
  • both the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 are composed of electrodes exhibiting light transmittance.
  • ⁇ Support substrate> As the support substrate, one that is not chemically changed in the process of manufacturing the organic EL element is suitably used. For example, glass, plastic, a polymer film, a silicon plate, and a laminate of these are used. A drive substrate in which a drive circuit for driving the organic EL element is formed in advance may be used as the support substrate. In the case where a bottom emission type or double-sided light emitting type organic EL element configured to emit light through a support substrate is mounted on the support substrate, a substrate exhibiting light transmittance is used as the support substrate.
  • an electrode exhibiting optical transparency is used for the anode.
  • the electrode exhibiting light transmittance a thin film of metal oxide, metal sulfide, metal or the like can be used, and an electrode having high electrical conductivity and light transmittance is preferably used.
  • a thin film made of indium oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, ITO, indium zinc oxide (abbreviated as IZO), gold, platinum, silver, copper, or the like is used.
  • ITO, IZO Or a thin film made of tin oxide is preferably used.
  • Examples of a method for producing the anode include a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, an ion plating method, and a plating method.
  • an organic transparent conductive film such as polyaniline or a derivative thereof, polythiophene or a derivative thereof may be used as the anode.
  • the organic transparent conductive film can be produced by applying an organic conductive material such as polythiophene.
  • the film thickness of the anode is appropriately set in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 10 nm to 10 ⁇ m, preferably 20 nm to 1 ⁇ m, and more preferably 50 nm to 500 nm.
  • hole injection material constituting the hole injection layer
  • metal oxides such as vanadium oxide, molybdenum oxide, ruthenium oxide and aluminum oxide, phenylamine compounds, starburst amine compounds, phthalocyanines, amorphous carbon, Examples thereof include polyaniline and polythiophene derivatives.
  • Examples of the method for forming the hole injection layer include film formation from a solution containing a hole injection material.
  • a hole injection layer can be formed by coating a film containing a hole injection material by a predetermined coating method and solidifying the solution.
  • Solvents used for film formation from solution include chlorine solvents such as chloroform, methylene chloride and dichloroethane, ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene and xylene, and ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone. Examples thereof include solvents, ester solvents such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, and ethyl cellosolve acetate, and water.
  • chlorine solvents such as chloroform, methylene chloride and dichloroethane
  • ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran
  • aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene and xylene
  • ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone. Examples thereof include solvents, ester solvents such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, and ethyl cellosolve acetate, and water.
  • the film thickness of the hole injection layer is appropriately set in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 1 nm to 1 ⁇ m, preferably 2 nm to 500 nm, and more preferably 5 nm to 200 nm.
  • ⁇ Hole transport layer> As the hole transport material constituting the hole transport layer, polyvinylcarbazole or a derivative thereof, polysilane or a derivative thereof, a polysiloxane derivative having an aromatic amine in a side chain or a main chain, a pyrazoline derivative, an arylamine derivative, a stilbene derivative, Triphenyldiamine derivative, polyaniline or derivative thereof, polythiophene or derivative thereof, polyarylamine or derivative thereof, polypyrrole or derivative thereof, poly (p-phenylene vinylene) or derivative thereof, or poly (2,5-thienylene vinylene) or Examples thereof include derivatives thereof.
  • hole transport materials include polyvinyl carbazole or a derivative thereof, polysilane or a derivative thereof, a polysiloxane derivative having an aromatic amine compound group in a side chain or a main chain, polyaniline or a derivative thereof, polythiophene or a derivative thereof, poly Polymeric hole transport materials such as arylamine or derivatives thereof, poly (p-phenylene vinylene) or derivatives thereof, or poly (2,5-thienylene vinylene) or derivatives thereof are preferred, and polyvinylcarbazole or derivatives thereof are more preferred. , Polysilane or a derivative thereof, and a polysiloxane derivative having an aromatic amine in the side chain or main chain. In the case of a low-molecular hole transport material, it is preferably used by being dispersed in a polymer binder.
  • Examples of the method for forming the hole transport layer include film formation from a solution containing a hole transport material.
  • a hole transport layer can be formed by coating a film containing a hole transport material by a predetermined coating method and solidifying the solution.
  • the film may be formed using a solution in which a polymer binder is further mixed with the hole transport material.
  • Solvents used for film formation from solution include, for example, chlorine solvents such as chloroform, methylene chloride, dichloroethane, ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene and xylene, and ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone.
  • Examples thereof include ester solvents such as system solvents, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, and ethyl cellosolve acetate.
  • polystyrene examples include vinyl chloride and polysiloxane.
  • the film thickness of the hole transport layer is appropriately set in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 1 nm to 1 ⁇ m, preferably 2 nm to 500 nm, and more preferably 5 nm to 200 nm. .
  • the light emitting layer is usually formed of an organic substance that mainly emits fluorescence and / or phosphorescence, or an organic substance and a dopant that assists the organic substance. For example, a dopant is added in order to improve luminous efficiency and change the emission wavelength.
  • the organic substance contained in the light emitting layer may be a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound.
  • the light-emitting layer preferably contains a high molecular compound, and the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene as the high molecular compound Preferably contain from 10 3 to 10 8 compounds.
  • the light emitting material constituting the light emitting layer include the following dye materials, metal complex materials, polymer materials, and dopant materials.
  • dye-based materials include cyclopentamine derivatives, tetraphenylbutadiene derivative compounds, triphenylamine derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, pyrazoloquinoline derivatives, distyrylbenzene derivatives, distyrylarylene derivatives, pyrrole derivatives, thiophene ring compounds. Pyridine ring compounds, perinone derivatives, perylene derivatives, oligothiophene derivatives, oxadiazole dimers, pyrazoline dimers, quinacridone derivatives, coumarin derivatives, and the like.
  • Metal complex materials examples include rare earth metals such as Tb, Eu, and Dy, or Al, Zn, Be, Ir, Pt, etc. as a central metal, and oxadiazole, thiadiazole, phenylpyridine, phenylbenzimidazole, quinoline.
  • metal complexes having a structure as a ligand such as metal complexes having light emission from triplet excited states such as iridium complexes and platinum complexes, aluminum quinolinol complexes, benzoquinolinol beryllium complexes, and benzoxazolyl zinc.
  • a complex, a benzothiazole zinc complex, an azomethylzinc complex, a porphyrin zinc complex, a phenanthroline europium complex, and the like can be given.
  • Polymer material As polymer materials, polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, polyparaphenylene derivatives, polysilane derivatives, polyacetylene derivatives, polyfluorene derivatives, polyvinyl carbazole derivatives, the above dye materials and metal complex light emitting materials are polymerized. Things can be mentioned.
  • materials that emit blue light include distyrylarylene derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, and polymers thereof, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polyparaphenylene derivatives, polyfluorene derivatives, and the like.
  • polymer materials such as polyvinyl carbazole derivatives, polyparaphenylene derivatives, and polyfluorene derivatives are preferred.
  • examples of materials that emit green light include quinacridone derivatives, coumarin derivatives, and polymers thereof, polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives, polyfluorene derivatives, and the like. Of these, polymer materials such as polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives and polyfluorene derivatives are preferred.
  • examples of materials that emit red light include coumarin derivatives, thiophene ring compounds, and polymers thereof, polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, and polyfluorene derivatives.
  • polymer materials such as polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, and polyfluorene derivatives are preferable.
  • Dopant material examples include perylene derivatives, coumarin derivatives, rubrene derivatives, quinacridone derivatives, squalium derivatives, porphyrin derivatives, styryl dyes, tetracene derivatives, pyrazolone derivatives, decacyclene, phenoxazone, and the like. Note that the thickness of such a light emitting layer is usually about 2 nm to 200 nm.
  • the light emitting layer is formed, for example, by film formation from a solution.
  • the light emitting layer is formed, for example, by applying a solution containing a light emitting material by a predetermined application method and further solidifying the solution.
  • Examples of the solvent used for film formation from a solution include the same solvents as those used for forming a hole injection layer from the above solution.
  • an electron transport material constituting the electron transport layer an oxadiazole derivative, anthraquinodimethane or a derivative thereof, benzoquinone or a derivative thereof, naphthoquinone or a derivative thereof, anthraquinone or a derivative thereof, tetracyanoanthraquinodimethane or a derivative thereof, Fluorenone derivatives, diphenyldicyanoethylene or derivatives thereof, diphenoquinone derivatives, or metal complexes of 8-hydroxyquinoline or derivatives thereof, polyquinoline or derivatives thereof, polyquinoxaline or derivatives thereof, polyfluorene or derivatives thereof, and the like can be given.
  • Examples of the method for forming the electron transport layer include a vapor deposition method and a film formation method from a solution.
  • a polymer binder may be used in combination.
  • the film thickness of the electron transport layer is appropriately set in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 1 nm to 1 ⁇ m, preferably 2 nm to 500 nm, and more preferably 5 nm to 200 nm.
  • the electron injection layer includes an ionic polymer.
  • an ionic polymer constituting the electron injection layer for example, a structural unit containing one or more groups selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the following formula (1) and a group represented by the following formula (2) The polymer which has is mentioned.
  • Q 1 represents a divalent organic group
  • Y 1 represents —CO 2 ⁇ , —SO 3 ⁇ , —SO 2 — or —PO 3 2 ⁇
  • M 1 represents a metal cation.
  • Z 1 is F ⁇ , Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ , I ⁇ , OH ⁇ , R a SO 3 ⁇ , R a COO ⁇ , ClO ⁇ , ClO 2 ⁇ .
  • N1 represents an integer of 0 or more
  • a1 represents an integer of 1 or more
  • b1 represents an integer of 0 or more
  • a1 and b1 are charges of the group represented by the formula (1)
  • Selected to be 0 and R a is the number of carbon atoms with or without substituents Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 30 alkyl groups or an aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms with or without substituents, and when there are a plurality of Q 1 , M 1 and Z 1 , they may be the same or different Good.
  • Q 2 represents a divalent organic group
  • Y 2 represents a carbo cation, an ammonium cation, a phosphonyl cation or a sulfonyl cation or an iodonium cation
  • M 2 represents F ⁇ , Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ , I ⁇ , OH ⁇ , R b SO 3 ⁇ , R b COO ⁇ , ClO ⁇ , ClO 2 ⁇ , ClO 3 ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , SCN ⁇ , CN ⁇ , NO 3 ⁇ , SO 4 2 ⁇ , HSO 4 ⁇ , PO 4 3 ⁇ , HPO 4 2 ⁇ , H 2 PO 4 ⁇ , BF 4 - or PF 6 - represents, Z 2 represents an ammonium cation which does not have
  • a polymer having a group represented by the following formula (3) can be mentioned.
  • the group represented by the formula (3) may be contained in the structural unit of the ionic polymer, and is represented by the formula (1). And may be contained in the same structural unit as the structural unit containing one or more groups selected from the group consisting of the group represented by formula (2), or may be contained in another different structural unit. It may be.
  • a structural unit containing at least one of a group represented by the formula (1), a group represented by the formula (2), and a group represented by the formula (3) Is a polymer having 15 to 100 mol% of all structural units.
  • Q 3 represents a divalent organic group
  • Y 3 represents —CN or a group represented by any one of formulas (4) to (12)
  • n3 represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • R ′ represents a divalent hydrocarbon group with or without a substituent
  • R ′′ represents a monovalent with or without a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • a hydrocarbon group —COOH, —SO 3 H, —OH, —SH, —NR c 2 , —CN or —C ( ⁇ O) NR c 2 , wherein R ′ ′′ has a substituent, or Represents a trivalent hydrocarbon group not having, a3 represents an integer of 1 or more, a4 represents an integer of 0 or more, and R c is an alkyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent.
  • the ionic polymer comprises a structural unit represented by formula (13), a structural unit represented by formula (15), a structural unit represented by formula (17), and One or more structural units selected from the group consisting of the structural units (20), in the total structural units, preferably contains 15 to 100 mol%.
  • R 1 is a monovalent group including a group represented by Formula (14), and Ar 1 has a (2 + n4) -valent fragrance with or without a substituent other than R 1.
  • n4 represents an integer of 1 or more, and when there are a plurality of R 1 s , they may be the same or different.
  • R 2 represents a (1 + m1 + m2) -valent organic group
  • Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3 have the same meanings as described above.
  • M1 and m2 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, and when Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3 are plural, May be the same or different.
  • R 3 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by the formula (16), and Ar 2 has a (2 + n5) -valent fragrance with or without a substituent other than R 3.
  • n5 represents an integer of 1 or more, and when there are a plurality of R 3 s , they may be the same or different.
  • R 4 represents a (1 + m3 + m4) -valent organic group
  • Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 have the same meaning as described above.
  • M3 and m4 each independently represent an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • R 5 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by Formula (18)
  • R 6 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by Formula (19)
  • Ar 3 represents a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group having or not having a substituent other than R 5 and R 6
  • n6 and n7 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, and each of R 5 and R 6 May be the same or different when there are multiple.
  • R 7 represents a direct bond or a (1 + m5) -valent organic group
  • Q 1 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , n1, a1 and b1 represent the same meaning as described above
  • m5 represents Represents an integer of 1 or more, and when there are a plurality of Q 1 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , n 1 , a 1 and b 1 , they may be the same or different.
  • R 8 represents a single bond or a (1 + m6) -valent organic group
  • Y 3 and n3 represent the same meaning as described above
  • m6 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that R 8 is a single group.
  • M6 represents 1 when bonded, and when there are a plurality of Q 3 , Y 3 and n3, they may be the same or different.
  • R 9 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by the formula (21)
  • R 10 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by the formula (22)
  • Ar 4 represents a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group having or not having a substituent other than R 9 and R 10
  • n8 and n9 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, and each of R 9 and R 10 May be the same or different when there are multiple.
  • R 11 represents a single bond or a (1 + m7) valent organic group
  • Q 2 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , n 2 , a 2 and b 2 represent the same meaning as described above
  • m 7 represents Represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that when R 11 is a single bond, m7 represents 1, and when there are a plurality of Q 2 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , n 2 , a 2 and b 2 , they are the same or different May be.
  • R 12 represents a single bond or a (1 + m8) -valent organic group
  • Y 3 and n3 represent the same meaning as described above
  • the structural unit in the ionic polymer may contain two or more groups represented by the formula (1), may contain two or more groups represented by the formula (2), Two or more groups represented by 3) may be included.
  • the divalent organic group represented by Q 1 includes a methylene group, an ethylene group, a 1,2-propylene group, a 1,3-propylene group, a 1,2-butylene group, 1,3 -Butylene group, 1,4-butylene group, 1,5-pentylene group, 1,6-hexylene group, 1,9-nonylene group, 1,12-dodecylene group, at least one hydrogen in these groups
  • Divalent cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group 1,3-phenylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-naphthylene group, 1,5-naphthylene group, 2,6-naphthylene group, biphenyl-4,4 An arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, such as a '-diyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom of these groups is substituted with a substituent; Echi Have a substituent such as a lenoxy group, a propyleneoxy group, a butyleneoxy group, a pentyleneoxy group, a hexyleneoxy group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • a substituent such as a lenoxy group, a propyleneoxy group, a butyleneoxy group, a pentyleneoxy group, a hexyleneoxy group, or
  • An alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms; an imino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom; a silylene group having a substituent containing a carbon atom, and a monomer hereinafter, “ From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the “raw material monomer”, a divalent saturated hydrocarbon group, an arylene group, and an alkyleneoxy group are preferable.
  • substituents examples include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an arylthio group, an arylalkyl group, an arylalkoxy group, an arylalkylthio group, an arylalkenyl group, an arylalkynyl group, an amino group, and a substituted amino group.
  • C m -C n (m, n is a positive integer satisfying m ⁇ n) indicates that the organic group described together with this term has m to n carbon atoms.
  • a C m -C n alkyl group indicates that the alkyl group has m to n carbon atoms
  • a C m -C n alkyl aryl group indicates that the alkyl group has m carbon atoms of m to n.
  • n represents an aryl-C m -C n alkyl group, the alkyl group has m to n carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched, and may be a cycloalkyl group.
  • the alkyl group usually has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the alkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, t-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, and nonyl group. Decyl group, lauryl group and the like.
  • the hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • Examples of the fluorine atom-substituted alkyl group include a trifluoromethyl group, a pentafluoroethyl group, a perfluorobutyl group, a perfluorohexyl group, and a perfluorooctyl group.
  • Examples of the C 1 to C 12 alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, a t-butyl group, a pentyl group, an isoamyl group, and a hexyl group. Cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group and lauryl group.
  • the alkoxy group may be linear or branched, may be a cycloalkyloxy group, and may have a substituent.
  • the alkoxy group usually has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, isopropyloxy, butoxy, isobutoxy, s-butoxy, t-butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, cyclohexyloxy, heptyloxy Octyloxy group, nonyloxy group, decyloxy group, lauryloxy group and the like.
  • a hydrogen atom in the alkoxy group may be substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • Examples of the fluorine atom-substituted alkoxy group include a trifluoromethoxy group, a pentafluoroethoxy group, a perfluorobutoxy group, a perfluorohexyloxy group, and a perfluorooctyloxy group.
  • the alkoxy group also includes a methoxymethyloxy group and a 2-methoxyethyloxy group.
  • Examples of the C 1 -C 12 alkoxy group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, an isopropyloxy group, a butoxy group, an isobutoxy group, an s-butoxy group, a t-butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, and a hexyloxy group.
  • the alkylthio group may be linear or branched, may be a cycloalkylthio group, and may have a substituent.
  • the alkylthio group usually has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • alkylthio group examples include methylthio group, ethylthio group, propylthio group, isopropylthio group, butylthio group, isobutylthio group, s-butylthio group, t-butylthio group, pentylthio group, hexylthio group, cyclohexylthio group, heptylthio group, octylthio group , Nonylthio group, decylthio group, laurylthio group and the like.
  • a hydrogen atom in the alkylthio group may be substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • fluorine atom-substituted alkylthio group examples include a trifluoromethylthio group.
  • An aryl group is a remaining atomic group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom constituting an aromatic ring from an aromatic hydrocarbon, a group having a benzene ring, a group having a condensed ring, an independent benzene ring or A group in which two or more condensed rings are bonded through a single bond or a divalent organic group, for example, an alkenylene group such as a vinylene group is also included.
  • the aryl group usually has 6 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 7 to 48 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group includes a phenyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, a 2-naphthyl group, a 1-anthracenyl group, a 2-anthracenyl group, and a 9-anthracenyl group.
  • Etc. A hydrogen atom in the aryl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom. Examples of the fluorine atom-substituted aryl group include a pentafluorophenyl group.
  • a C 1 to C 12 alkoxyphenyl group and a C 1 to C 12 alkylphenyl group are preferable.
  • C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl groups include methoxyphenyl group, ethoxyphenyl group, propyloxyphenyl group, isopropyloxyphenyl group, butoxyphenyl group, isobutoxyphenyl group, s-butoxyphenyl group, t-butoxyphenyl group, pentyloxyphenyl group, hexyloxyphenyl group, cyclohexyloxyphenyl group, heptyloxyphenyl group, octyloxyphenyl group, 2-ethylhexyloxyphenyl group, nonyloxyphenyl group, decyloxyphenyl group, 3, Examples include 7-dimethyloctyloxyphenyl group, lauryloxyphenyl group, and the like.
  • the C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl group includes methylphenyl group, ethylphenyl group, dimethylphenyl group, propylphenyl group, mesityl group, methylethylphenyl group, isopropylphenyl group, butylphenyl group, isobutyl group.
  • Examples include phenyl group, t-butylphenyl group, pentylphenyl group, isoamylphenyl group, hexylphenyl group, heptylphenyl group, octylphenyl group, nonylphenyl group, decylphenyl group, dodecylphenyl group and the like.
  • the aryloxy group usually has 6 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 7 to 48 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aryloxy group include a phenoxy group, a C 1 to C 12 alkoxyphenoxy group, a C 1 to C 12 alkylphenoxy group, a 1-naphthyloxy group, a 2-naphthyloxy group, and a pentafluorophenyloxy group.
  • a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenoxy group and a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenoxy group are preferable.
  • the C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenoxy group includes a methoxyphenoxy group, an ethoxyphenoxy group, a propyloxyphenoxy group, an isopropyloxyphenoxy group, a butoxyphenoxy group, an isobutoxyphenoxy group, and an s-butoxyphenoxy group.
  • T-butoxyphenoxy group pentyloxyphenoxy group, hexyloxyphenoxy group, cyclohexyloxyphenoxy group, heptyloxyphenoxy group, octyloxyphenoxy group, 2-ethylhexyloxyphenoxy group, nonyloxyphenoxy group, decyloxyphenoxy group, 3 , 7-dimethyloctyloxyphenoxy group, lauryloxyphenoxy group and the like.
  • the C 1 -C 12 alkylphenoxy group includes methylphenoxy group, ethylphenoxy group, dimethylphenoxy group, propylphenoxy group, 1,3,5-trimethylphenoxy group, methylethylphenoxy group, isopropyl Phenoxy group, butylphenoxy group, isobutylphenoxy group, s-butylphenoxy group, t-butylphenoxy group, pentylphenoxy group, isoamylphenoxy group, hexylphenoxy group, heptylphenoxy group, octylphenoxy group, nonylphenoxy group, decylphenoxy group And dodecylphenoxy group.
  • the arylthio group is, for example, a group in which a sulfur element is bonded to the aforementioned aryl group.
  • the arylthio group may have a substituent on the aromatic ring of the aryl group.
  • the arylthio group usually has 6 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the arylthio group include a phenylthio group, a C 1 to C 12 alkoxyphenylthio group, a C 1 to C 12 alkylphenylthio group, a 1-naphthylthio group, a 2-naphthylthio group, and a pentafluorophenylthio group.
  • the arylalkyl group is, for example, a group in which the above alkyl group is bonded to the above aryl group.
  • the arylalkyl group may have a substituent.
  • the arylalkyl group usually has 7 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the arylalkyl group includes a phenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl group, 1- naphthyl -C 1 ⁇ C 12 alkyl group, 2-naphthyl -C 1 ⁇ C 12 alkyl group and the like.
  • the arylalkoxy group is, for example, a group in which the above alkoxy group is bonded to the above aryl group.
  • the arylalkoxy group may have a substituent.
  • the arylalkoxy group usually has 7 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the arylalkoxy group includes a phenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkoxy group, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkoxy group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkoxy group, 1- naphthyl -C 1 ⁇ C 12 alkoxy groups, 2-naphthyl -C 1 ⁇ C 12 alkoxy groups and the like.
  • the arylalkylthio group is, for example, a group in which the aforementioned alkylthio group is bonded to the aforementioned aryl group.
  • the arylalkylthio group may have a substituent.
  • the arylalkylthio group usually has 7 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the arylalkylthio group includes phenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkylthio group, C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkylthio group, C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkylthio group, 1- naphthyl -C 1 ⁇ C 12 alkylthio groups, 2-naphthyl -C 1 ⁇ C 12 alkylthio groups and the like.
  • the arylalkenyl group is, for example, a group in which an alkenyl group is bonded to the aforementioned aryl group.
  • the arylalkenyl group usually has 8 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 8 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the arylalkenyl group includes a phenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, 1- And naphthyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, 2-naphthyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, and the like.
  • C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, C 2 -C 12 alkylphenyl- C 2 -C 12 alkenyl groups are preferred.
  • Examples of the C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group include a vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 1-butenyl group, 2-butenyl group, 1-pentenyl group, 2-pentenyl group, and 1-hexenyl. Group, 2-hexenyl group and 1-octenyl group.
  • the arylalkynyl group is, for example, a group in which an alkynyl group is bonded to the aforementioned aryl group.
  • the arylalkynyl group usually has 8 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 8 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the arylalkynyl group includes phenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, 1- And naphthyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, 2-naphthyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, and the like.
  • C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl- C 2 -C 12 alkynyl groups are preferred.
  • the C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group includes, for example, ethynyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 1-butynyl group, 2-butynyl group, 1-pentynyl group, 2-pentynyl group, 1-hexynyl group. Group, 2-hexynyl group and 1-octynyl group.
  • the substituted amino group at least one hydrogen atom in the amino group is substituted with one or two groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group, and a monovalent heterocyclic group.
  • the amino group formed is preferred.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the substituted amino group is usually 1 to 60 excluding the number of carbon atoms of the substituent that the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have, 2 to 48 are preferred.
  • substituted amino groups include methylamino group, dimethylamino group, ethylamino group, diethylamino group, propylamino group, dipropylamino group, isopropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, butylamino group, isobutylamino group, and s-butylamino group.
  • the substituted silyl group at least one hydrogen atom in the silyl group is substituted with 1 to 3 groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group and a monovalent heterocyclic group Silyl group formed.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the substituted silyl group is usually 1 to 60 without including the number of carbon atoms of the substituent that the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have, 3 to 48 are preferred.
  • the substituted silyl group includes trimethylsilyl group, triethylsilyl group, tripropylsilyl group, triisopropylsilyl group, isopropyldimethylsilyl group, isopropyldiethylsilyl group, t-butyldimethylsilyl group, pentyldimethylsilyl group, hexyldimethylsilyl group.
  • halogen atom examples include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
  • the acyl group usually has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the acyl group include an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a butyryl group, an isobutyryl group, a pivaloyl group, a benzoyl group, a trifluoroacetyl group, and a pentafluorobenzoyl group.
  • the acyloxy group usually has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the acyloxy group include an acetoxy group, a propionyloxy group, a butyryloxy group, an isobutyryloxy group, a pivaloyloxy group, a benzoyloxy group, a trifluoroacetyloxy group, and a pentafluorobenzoyloxy group.
  • the imine residue means a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom in this structure from an imine compound having a structure represented by at least one of the formula: HN ⁇ C ⁇ and the formula: —N ⁇ CH—.
  • imine compounds include compounds in which a hydrogen atom bonded to a nitrogen atom in aldimine, ketimine, and aldimine is substituted with an alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group, arylalkenyl group, arylalkynyl group, or the like. It is done.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the imine residue is usually 2-20, and preferably 2-18.
  • Examples of the imine residue include a general formula: —CR ⁇ ⁇ N—R ⁇ or a general formula: —N ⁇ C (R ⁇ ) 2 (where R ⁇ is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl) A group, an arylalkenyl group, or an arylalkynyl group, and R ⁇ independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group, an arylalkenyl group, or an arylalkynyl group, provided that two R ⁇ are present.
  • Two R ⁇ are bonded to each other to form a divalent group, for example, an alkylene group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms such as an ethylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethylene group, pentamethylene group, hexamethylene group, etc. As a ring may be formed.).
  • the imine residue include the following groups.
  • the amide group usually has 1 to 20 carbon atoms and preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • As the amide group formamide group, acetamide group, propioamide group, butyroamide group, benzamide group, trifluoroacetamide group, pentafluorobenzamide group, diformamide group, diacetamide group, dipropioamide group, dibutyroamide group, dibenzamide group, ditrifluoro Examples include an acetamide group and a dipentafluorobenzamide group.
  • the acid imide group is a residue obtained by removing a hydrogen atom bonded to the nitrogen atom from an acid imide, and usually has 4 to 20 carbon atoms and preferably 4 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the acid imide group include the following groups.
  • the monovalent heterocyclic group refers to the remaining atomic group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a heterocyclic compound.
  • the heterocyclic compound is not only a carbon atom but also an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, a phosphorus atom, a boron atom, a silicon atom as an element constituting a ring among organic compounds having a cyclic structure.
  • An organic compound containing a heteroatom such as a selenium atom, a tellurium atom or an arsenic atom.
  • the monovalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent.
  • the monovalent heterocyclic group usually has 3 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the monovalent heterocyclic group does not include the number of carbon atoms of the substituent.
  • Examples of such a monovalent heterocyclic group include a thienyl group, a C 1 to C 12 alkyl thienyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a furyl group, a pyridyl group, a C 1 to C 12 alkyl pyridyl group, a pyridazinyl group, a pyrimidyl group, Examples include a pyrazinyl group, a triazinyl group, a pyrrolidyl group, a piperidyl group, a quinolyl group, and an isoquinolyl group, and among them, a thienyl group, a C 1 to C 12 alkylthienyl group, a pyridyl group, and a C 1 to C 12 alkylpyridyl group are preferable.
  • the substituted carboxyl group is a group in which a hydrogen atom in a carboxyl group is substituted with an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group or a monovalent heterocyclic group, that is, a formula: —C ( ⁇ O) OR * (formula R * is a group represented by an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group or a monovalent heterocyclic group.
  • the substituted oxycarbonyl group usually has 2 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 2 to 48 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent.
  • the number of carbon atoms does not include the number of carbon atoms of the substituent that the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group, or monovalent heterocyclic group may have.
  • the substituted carboxyl group include methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, propoxycarbonyl group, isopropoxycarbonyl group, butoxycarbonyl group, isobutoxycarbonyl group, s-butoxycarbonyl group, t-butoxycarbonyl group, pentyloxycarbonyl group, hexyl group.
  • Y 1 represents a monovalent group such as —CO 2 ⁇ , —SO 3 ⁇ , —SO 2 ⁇ , —PO 3 ⁇ , or —B (R a ) 3 —
  • Y 1 the, -CO 2 from the viewpoint of the acidity of the ionic polymer -, -SO 2 -, -PO 3 - is more preferred, from the viewpoint of the stability of the ionic polymer, - preferably, -CO 2 - CO 2 ⁇ , —SO 3 ⁇ , —SO 2 — or —PO 3 — is preferred.
  • M 1 represents a metal cation or an ammonium cation with or without a substituent.
  • the metal cation monovalent, divalent or trivalent ions are preferable, and Li, Na, K, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca, Ba, Ag, Al, Bi, Cu, Fe, Ga, Mn, Pb, Examples thereof include ions such as Sn, Ti, V, W, Y, Yb, Zn, and Zr, and Li + , Na + , K + , Cs + , Ag + , Mg 2+ , and Ca 2+ are preferable.
  • examples of the substituent that the ammonium ion may have include 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, i-butyl group, and t-butyl group. Of the alkyl group.
  • Z 1 represents F ⁇ , Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ , I ⁇ , OH ⁇ , R a SO 3 ⁇ , R a COO ⁇ , ClO ⁇ , ClO 2 ⁇ , ClO 3 ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , SCN ⁇ , CN ⁇ , NO 3 ⁇ , SO 4 2 ⁇ , HSO 4 ⁇ , PO 4 3 ⁇ , HPO 4 2 ⁇ , H 2 PO 4 ⁇ , BF 4 ⁇ or PF 6 ⁇ are represented.
  • n1 represents an integer of 0 or more, and is preferably an integer of 0 to 8, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, from the viewpoint of synthesis of raw material monomers.
  • a1 represents an integer of 1 or more
  • b1 represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • a1 and b1 are selected such that the charge of the group represented by the formula (1) is zero.
  • Y 1 is —CO 2 ⁇ , —SO 3 ⁇ , —SO 2 ⁇ , —PO 3 ⁇ , or —B (R a ) 3 —
  • M 1 has a monovalent metal cation or substituent.
  • Y 1 is —CO 2 ⁇ , —SO 3 ⁇ , —SO 2 ⁇ , —PO 3 ⁇ , or —B (R a ) 3 ——
  • M 1 is a divalent metal cation
  • Y 1 is —CO 2 ⁇ , —SO 3 ⁇ , —SO 2 ⁇ , —PO 3 ⁇ , or —B (R a ) 3 —
  • M 1 is a trivalent metal cation
  • Z 1 is F ⁇ , Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ , I ⁇ , OH ⁇ , R a SO 3 ⁇ , R a COO ⁇ , ClO ⁇ , ClO 2 ⁇ , ClO 3 ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , SCN ⁇ , CN ⁇ , NO 3 ⁇
  • Y 1 is —CO 2 ⁇ , —SO 3 ⁇ , —SO 2 ⁇ , —PO 3 ⁇ , or —B (R a ) 3 —
  • a1 is preferably an integer of 1 to 5, more preferably 1 or 2.
  • Ra represents an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent.
  • substituents which may be included include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description regarding Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • R a methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, t-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group Carbon number such as alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as decyl group, lauryl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9-anthracenyl group, etc. Examples thereof include 6 to 30 aryl groups.
  • Examples of the group represented by the formula (1) include the following groups.
  • the divalent organic group represented by Q 2 include the same groups as those exemplified for the divalent organic group represented by Q 1 described above, the raw material monomers for synthesis From the viewpoint of ease, a divalent saturated hydrocarbon group, an arylene group, and an alkyleneoxy group are preferable.
  • the group exemplified as an example of the divalent organic group represented by Q 2 may have a substituent, and the substituent is the same as the substituent exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above.
  • a substituent is mentioned. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • Y 2 represents a carbocation, an ammonium cation, a phosphonyl cation, a sulfonyl cation, or an iodonium cation.
  • the carbocation for example, -C + R 2 (Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
  • ammonium cations include: -N + R 3 (Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
  • Examples of phosphonyl cations include: -P + R 3 (Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
  • Examples of the sulfonyl cation include: -S + R 2 (Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
  • As an iodonium cation for example, -I + R 2 (Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
  • Y 2 represents a carbocation, an ammonium cation, a phosphonyl cation, a sulfonyl cation from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer and stability of the raw material monomer and the ionic polymer against air, moisture or heat. Are preferred, and ammonium cations are more preferred.
  • Z 2 represents a metal cation or an ammonium cation with or without a substituent.
  • the metal cation monovalent, divalent or trivalent ions are preferable, and Li, Na, K, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca, Ba, Ag, Al, Bi, Cu, Fe, Ga, Mn, Pb, Examples thereof include ions such as Sn, Ti, V, W, Y, Yb, Zn, and Zr.
  • Examples of the substituent that the ammonium cation may have include alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, isobutyl group, and t-butyl group. Groups.
  • M 2 represents F ⁇ , Cl ⁇ , Br ⁇ , I ⁇ , OH ⁇ , R b SO 3 ⁇ , R b COO ⁇ , ClO ⁇ , ClO 2 ⁇ , ClO 3 ⁇ , ClO 4 ⁇ , SCN ⁇ , CN ⁇ , NO 3 ⁇ , SO 4 2 ⁇ , HSO 4 ⁇ , PO 4 3 ⁇ , HPO 4 2 ⁇ , H 2 PO 4 ⁇ , BF 4 ⁇ or PF 6 ⁇ are represented.
  • n2 represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 2.
  • a2 represents an integer of 1 or more
  • b2 represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • a2 and b2 are selected such that the charge of the group represented by the formula (2) is zero.
  • a2 is preferably an integer from 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2.
  • R b represents an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent or an aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, and these groups have Examples of the substituent which may be included include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description regarding Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • R b is methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl Carbon number such as alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as decyl group, lauryl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9-anthracenyl group, etc. Examples thereof include 6 to 30 aryl groups.
  • Examples of the group represented by the formula (2) include the following groups.
  • examples of the divalent organic group represented by Q 3 include the same groups as those exemplified for the divalent organic group represented by Q 1 described above. From the viewpoint of ease, a divalent saturated hydrocarbon group, an arylene group, and an alkyleneoxy group are preferable.
  • the group mentioned as an example of the divalent organic group represented by Q 3 may have a substituent, and the substituent is the same as the substituent exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above.
  • a substituent is mentioned. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the divalent organic group represented by Q 3 is preferably a group represented by — (CH 2 ) —.
  • N3 represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 8.
  • Y 3 represents —CN or a group represented by any one of Formulas (4) to (12).
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group represented by R ′ includes a methylene group, an ethylene group, a 1,2-propylene group, a 1,3-propylene group, and a 1,2-butylene.
  • Group, 1,3-butylene group, 1,4-butylene group, 1,5-pentylene group, 1,6-hexylene group, 1,9-nonylene group, 1,12-dodecylene group, among these groups A divalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a substituent; an ethenylene group, a propenylene group, a 3-butenylene group; Substituents such as 2-butenylene group, 2-pentenylene group, 2-hexenylene group, 2-nonenylene group, 2-dodecenylene group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substitute
  • substituents examples include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the monovalent hydrocarbon group represented by R ′′ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, t -Butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, lauryl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like, An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9-anthracenyl group, and these groups; And an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group in which at
  • a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, and a 2-naphthyl group are preferable.
  • substituents include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the trivalent hydrocarbon group represented by R ′ ′′ includes a methanetriyl group, an ethanetriyl group, a 1,2,3-propanetriyl group, a 1,2,4-butanetriyl group, 1 , 2,5-pentanetriyl group, 1,3,5-pentanetriyl group, 1,2,6-hexanetriyl group, 1,3,6-hexanetriyl group, at least of these groups
  • Examples thereof include aryl groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. From the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer, a methanetriyl group, an ethanetriyl group, a 1,2,4-benzenetriyl group, and a 1,3,5-benzenetriyl group are preferable.
  • Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • R c is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group or a 2-naphthyl group from the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer.
  • a3 represents an integer of 1 or more, and an integer of 3 to 10 is preferable.
  • a4 represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • a4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 30, and more preferably an integer of 3 to 20.
  • a4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 10, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 5.
  • a4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 3 to 20.
  • a4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 10.
  • Y 3 represents —CN, a group represented by the formula (4), a group represented by the formula (6), a group represented by the formula (10), from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer.
  • a group represented by the formula (11) is preferable, a group represented by the formula (4), a group represented by the formula (6), a group represented by the formula (11) are more preferable, and the following groups are particularly preferable: preferable.
  • the ionic polymer used in the present invention includes a structural unit represented by the formula (13), a structural unit represented by the formula (15), a structural unit represented by the formula (17), and the formula (20). ), And more preferably an ionic polymer having 15 to 100 mol% of the structural units in all the structural units.
  • R 1 is a monovalent group including a group represented by formula (14), and Ar 1 has a substituent other than R 1. Or it represents the (2 + n4) valent aromatic group which does not have, and n4 represents an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the group represented by the formula (14) may be directly bonded to Ar 1, and includes a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, a nonylene group, a dodecylene group, a cyclopropylene group, Substitution, such as a cyclobutylene group, a cyclopentylene group, a cyclohexylene group, a cyclononylene group, a cyclododecylene group, a norbornylene group, an adamantylene group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent Alkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a group; oxymethylene group, oxyethylene group, oxypropylene group, oxybutylene group, oxypentylene group, oxyhexylene group, oxynonylene group,
  • Ar 1 may have a substituent other than R 1 .
  • substituents include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the substituent other than R 1 possessed by Ar 1 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a carboxyl group, or a substituted carboxyl group from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer.
  • n4 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
  • Examples of the (2 + n4) -valent aromatic group represented by Ar 1 in the formula (13) include a (2 + n4) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a (2 + n4) -valent aromatic heterocyclic group. Or a (2 + n4) -valent aromatic group consisting of carbon atoms and one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms.
  • Examples of the (2 + n4) -valent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a 1,3,5-triazine ring, and a furan ring.
  • Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
  • Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
  • Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include the following rings.
  • Examples of the Aribashi polycyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
  • the (2 + n4) -valent aromatic group includes (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by the formulas 1 to 14, 26 to 29, 37 to 39, or 41 from the viewpoint of easy synthesis of the raw material monomer.
  • a group obtained by removing (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by the formulas 1 to 6, 8, 13, 26, 27, 37, or 41 is more preferred, and the group represented by the formula 1, 37, or 41 is preferred. More preferred is a group in which (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the ring formed.
  • examples of the (1 + m1 + m2) -valent organic group represented by R 2 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • R 3 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by formula (16), and Ar 2 has a substituent other than R 3. Alternatively, it represents a (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group not present, and n5 represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • the group represented by the formula (16) may be directly bonded to Ar 2, and includes a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, a nonylene group, a dodecylene group, a cyclopropylene group, Substitution, such as a cyclobutylene group, a cyclopentylene group, a cyclohexylene group, a cyclononylene group, a cyclododecylene group, a norbornylene group, an adamantylene group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent Alkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a group; oxymethylene group, oxyethylene group, oxypropylene group, oxybutylene group, oxypentylene group, oxyhexylene group, oxynonylene group,
  • Ar 2 may have a substituent other than R 3 .
  • substituents include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the substituent other than R 3 possessed by Ar 2 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a carboxyl group or a substituted carboxyl group from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer.
  • n5 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
  • Examples of the (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group represented by Ar 2 in the formula (15) include a (2 + n5) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a (2 + n5) -valent aromatic heterocyclic group. Or a (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group consisting of carbon atoms and one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms.
  • Examples of the (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a 1,3,5-triazine ring, and a furan ring.
  • Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by formulas 1 to 12 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
  • Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by formulas 13 to 27 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
  • Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include rings represented by formulas 28 to 36 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
  • bridged polycyclic aromatic ring examples include rings represented by Formulas 37 to 44 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
  • the (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group includes (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by the formulas 1 to 14, 26 to 29, 37 to 39, or 41 from the viewpoint of easy synthesis of the raw material monomer.
  • a group obtained by removing (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by formulas 1 to 6, 8, 13, 26, 27, 37, or 41 is more preferred, and a group represented by formula 1, 37, or 41 is preferred. And more preferably a group in which (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the ring.
  • n3 and m4 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more.
  • examples of the (1 + m3 + m4) -valent organic group represented by R 4 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • R 5 is a monovalent group including a group represented by formula (18)
  • R 6 is a group represented by formula (19).
  • Ar 3 represents a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group having or not having a substituent other than R 5 and R 6 , and n6 and n7 are each independently an integer of 1 or more Represents.
  • the group represented by the formula (18) and the group represented by the formula (19) may be directly bonded to Ar 3, and include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, Nonylene group, dodecylene group, cyclopropylene group, cyclobutylene group, cyclopentylene group, cyclohexylene group, cyclononylene group, cyclododecylene group, norbornylene group, adamantylene group, and at least one hydrogen atom in these groups
  • Ar 3 may have a substituent other than R 5 and R 6 .
  • substituents include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the substituent other than R 5 and R 6 possessed by Ar 3 is an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a carboxyl group, or a substituted carboxyl group from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer. Is preferred.
  • n6 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
  • n7 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
  • Examples of the (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group represented by Ar 3 in the formula (17) include a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic heterocyclic group, and a carbon atom. Or a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group consisting of carbon atoms and one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms.
  • Examples of the (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, and an imidazole ring.
  • Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by Formulas 1 to 5 and Formulas 7 to 10 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
  • Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by formulas 13 to 27 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
  • Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include rings represented by formulas 28 to 36 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
  • bridged polycyclic aromatic ring examples include rings represented by Formulas 37 to 44 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
  • the (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group is a ring represented by the formula 1 to 5, 7 to 10, 13, 14, 26 to 29, 37 to 39 or 41 from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer.
  • a group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from the ring is preferred, and a group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by formula 1, 37 or 41 is more preferred, represented by formula 1, 38 or 42
  • a group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from the ring is more preferable.
  • R 7 represents a single bond or a (1 + m5) -valent organic group, and is preferably a (1 + m5) -valent organic group.
  • examples of the (1 + m5) -valent organic group represented by R 7 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • m5 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that m5 represents 1 when R 7 is a single bond.
  • R 8 represents a single bond or a (1 + m6) -valent organic group, and is preferably a (1 + m6) -valent organic group.
  • examples of the (1 + m6) -valent organic group represented by R 8 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • m6 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that m6 represents 1 when R 8 is a single bond.
  • R 9 is a monovalent group including a group represented by formula (21), and R 10 is a group represented by formula (22).
  • Ar 4 represents a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group having or not having a substituent other than R 9 and R 10 , and n8 and n9 are each independently an integer of 1 or more Represents.
  • the group represented by the formula (21) and the group represented by the formula (22) may be directly bonded to Ar 4, and include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, Nonylene group, dodecylene group, cyclopropylene group, cyclobutylene group, cyclopentylene group, cyclohexylene group, cyclononylene group, cyclododecylene group, norbornylene group, adamantylene group, and at least one hydrogen atom in these groups
  • Ar 4 may have a substituent other than R 9 and R 10 .
  • substituents include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the substituent other than R 9 and R 10 of Ar 4 is an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a carboxyl group, or a substituted carboxyl group from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer. Is preferred.
  • n8 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
  • n9 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
  • Examples of the (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group represented by Ar 4 in the formula (20) include a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic heterocyclic group. Or a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group consisting of carbon atoms and one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms.
  • Examples of the (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, and an imidazole ring.
  • Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by Formulas 1 to 5 and Formulas 7 to 10 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
  • Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by formulas 13 to 27 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
  • Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include rings represented by formulas 28 to 36 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
  • bridged polycyclic aromatic ring examples include rings represented by Formulas 37 to 44 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
  • the (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group is a ring represented by the formula 1 to 5, 7 to 10, 13, 14, 26 to 29, 37 to 39 or 41 from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer.
  • a group obtained by removing (2 + n8 + n9) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by formula 1, 37 or 41 is more preferable.
  • R 11 represents a single bond or a (1 + m7) -valent organic group, and is preferably a (1 + m7) -valent organic group.
  • examples of the (1 + m7) -valent organic group represented by R 11 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • m7 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that when R 11 is a single bond, m7 represents 1.
  • R 12 represents a single bond or a (1 + m8) valent organic group, and is preferably a (1 + m8) valent organic group.
  • examples of the (1 + m8) -valent organic group represented by R 12 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • alkyl A group remaining after removing m8 hydrogen atoms from a group remaining after removing m8 hydrogen atoms from an aryl group, a group obtained by removing m8 hydrogen atoms from an amino group.
  • substituents examples include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • m8 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that m8 represents 1 when R 12 is a single bond.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (13) As the structural unit represented by the formula (13), from the viewpoint of the electron transport property of the obtained ionic polymer, the structural unit represented by the formula (23), The structural unit represented by Formula (24) is preferable, and the structural unit represented by Formula (24) is more preferable.
  • R 13 represents a (1 + m9 + m10) -valent organic group
  • R 14 represents a monovalent organic group
  • Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1 , A1, b1 and n3 represent the same meaning as described above
  • m9 and m10 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more
  • b1 and n3 represent the same meaning as described above
  • m9 and m10 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more
  • b1 and n3 When there are a plurality of b1 and n3, they may be the same or different.
  • examples of the (1 + m9 + m10) -valent organic group represented by R 13 include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, and t-butyl.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • examples of the monovalent organic group represented by R 14 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, a t-butyl group, It has a substituent such as a pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, lauryl group, or a group obtained by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of these groups with a substituent.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (23) include the following structural units.
  • R 13 represents a (1 + m11 + m12) -valent organic group
  • Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3 have the same meaning as described above.
  • M11 and m12 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, and R 13 , m11, m12, Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1 and n3 (If there are several, each may be the same or different.)
  • examples of the (1 + m11 + m12) -valent organic group represented by R 13 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • a group obtained by removing (m11 + m12) hydrogen atoms from a reel group methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (24) include the following structural units.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (13) is preferable from the viewpoint of durability of the obtained ionic polymer.
  • R 15 represents a (1 + m13 + m14) -valent organic group
  • Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3 have the same meaning as described above.
  • M13, m14 and m15 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, R 15 , m13, m14, Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1 and If there are multiple n3s, they may be the same or different.
  • examples of the (1 + m13 + m14) -valent organic group represented by R 15 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (25) include the following structural units.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (15) As the structural unit represented by the formula (15), from the viewpoint of the electron transport property of the obtained ionic polymer, the structural unit represented by the formula (26), The structural unit represented by Formula (27) is preferable, and the structural unit represented by Formula (27) is more preferable.
  • R 16 represents a (1 + m16 + m17) valent organic group
  • R 17 represents a monovalent organic group
  • Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n2 , a2, b2 and n3 represent the same as defined above
  • Q 2, Q 3, Y 2, M 2, Z 2, Y 3, n2, a2 , B2 and n3 may be the same or different when there is a plurality.
  • examples of the (1 + m16 + m17) -valent organic group represented by R 16 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • a group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from a reel group methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc.
  • examples of the monovalent organic group represented by R 17 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, a t-butyl group, It has a substituent such as a pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, lauryl group, or a group obtained by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of these groups with a substituent.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (26) include the following structural units.
  • R 16 represents a (1 + m16 + m17) valent organic group
  • Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 have the same meaning as described above.
  • examples of the (1 + m16 + m17) -valent organic group represented by R 16 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • a group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from a reel group methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (27) include the following structural units.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (28) is preferable from the viewpoint of durability of the obtained ionic polymer.
  • R 18 represents a (1 + m18 + m19) valent organic group
  • Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 have the same meaning as described above.
  • M18, m19 and m20 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, and R 18 , m18, m19, Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n2, a2, b2 and If there are multiple n3s, they may be the same or different.
  • examples of the (1 + m18 + m19) -valent organic group represented by R 18 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • a group obtained by removing (m18 + m19) hydrogen atoms from a reel group methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (28) include the following structural units.
  • Example of Structural Unit Represented by Formula (17) As the structural unit represented by Formula (17), from the viewpoint of electron transport properties of the obtained ionic polymer, the structural unit represented by Formula (29) is preferable.
  • R 19 represents a single bond or a (1 + m21) -valent organic group
  • R 20 represents a single bond or a (1 + m22) -valent organic group
  • Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1, Y 3, n1 , a1, b1 and n3 represent the same as defined above, represents an integer of 1 or more, respectively m21 and m22 independently, provided that when R 19 is a single bond m21 represents 1 , R 20 is a single bond, m22 represents 1 , and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1 and n3 each have the same or different May be.
  • examples of the (1 + m21) -valent organic group represented by R 19 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • (m21) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkyl group, (m21) hydrogen atoms are removed from the aryl group, and (m21) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkoxy group.
  • the groups are preferred.
  • examples of the (1 + m22) -valent organic group represented by R 20 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • a group obtained by removing (m22) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group, a group obtained by removing (m22) hydrogen atoms from an aryl group, and (m22) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group are preferred.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (29) include the following structural units.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (17) is preferably the structural unit represented by the formula (30) from the viewpoint of durability of the obtained ionic polymer.
  • R 21 represents a single bond or a (1 + m23) -valent organic group
  • R 22 represents a single bond or a (1 + m24) -valent organic group
  • Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1, Y 3, n1 , a1, b1 and n3 represent the same as defined above, represents an integer of 1 or more, respectively m23 and m24 independently, provided that when R 21 is a single bond m23 represents 1 , R 22 is a single bond, m24 represents 1, m25 and m26 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, and m23, m24, R 21 , R 22 , Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , When there are a plurality of Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3, they may be the same or different.
  • examples of the (1 + m23) -valent organic group represented by R 21 include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, and t-butyl.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • examples of the (1 + m24) -valent organic group represented by R 22 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • (m24) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkyl group, (m24) hydrogen atoms are removed from the aryl group, and (m24) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkoxy group.
  • the groups are preferred.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (30) include the following structural units.
  • Example of Structural Unit Represented by Formula (20) As the structural unit represented by Formula (20), the structural unit represented by Formula (31) is preferable from the viewpoint of the obtained electron transport property.
  • R 23 represents a single bond or a (1 + m27) -valent organic group
  • R 24 represents a single bond or a (1 + m28) -valent organic group
  • Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 represent the same meaning as described above
  • m 27 and m 28 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, provided that m 27 represents 1 when R 23 is a single bond.
  • m28 represents 1, and when Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 are plural, they are the same or different May be.
  • examples of the (1 + m27) -valent organic group represented by R 23 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • examples of the (1 + m28) -valent organic group represented by R 24 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkyl group, (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the aryl group, and (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkoxy group.
  • (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkyl group, (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the aryl group, and (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkoxy group.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (31) include the following structural units.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (20) is preferable from the viewpoint of durability of the obtained ionic polymer.
  • R 25 represents a single bond or a (1 + m29) -valent organic group
  • R 26 represents a single bond or a (1 + m30) -valent organic group
  • Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 represent the same meaning as described above
  • m 29 and m 30 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, provided that m 29 represents 1 when R 25 is a single bond.
  • R 26 is a single bond
  • m30 represents 1, m31 and m32 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, m29, m30, R 25 , R 26 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , When there are a plurality of Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3, they may be the same or different.
  • examples of the (1 + m29) -valent organic group represented by R 25 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • a group in which (m29) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group, a group in which (m29) hydrogen atoms are removed from an aryl group, and (m29) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkoxy group are preferred.
  • examples of the (1 + m30) -valent organic group represented by R 26 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • a substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent.
  • a group in which (m30) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group, a group in which (m30) hydrogen atoms are removed from an aryl group, and (m30) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkoxy group are preferred.
  • Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (32) include the following structural units.
  • the ionic polymer used for this invention may have 1 or more types of structural units further represented by Formula (33).
  • Ar 5 represents a divalent aromatic group having or not having a substituent, or a divalent aromatic amine residue having or not having a substituent
  • X ′ represents a substituted group.
  • m33 and m34 are each independently 0 or 1 And at least one of m33 and m34 is 1.
  • Examples of the divalent aromatic group represented by Ar 5 in formula (33) include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • Examples of the divalent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a 1,3,5-triazine ring, a furan ring, and a pyrrole.
  • a divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a monocyclic aromatic ring such as a ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, oxadiazole ring, azadiazole ring; the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring
  • Two aromatic rings are methylene, ethylene and cal Group, and a divalent group in which two hydrogen atoms
  • the number of monocyclic aromatic rings to be condensed is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2 to 3, and further preferably 2 from the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer.
  • the number of aromatic rings to be connected is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2 to 3, and even more preferably 2 from the viewpoint of solubility.
  • the number of aromatic rings to be bridged is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2 to 3, and further preferably 2 from the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer.
  • Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
  • Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
  • Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include the following rings.
  • Examples of the Aribashi polycyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
  • the divalent aromatic group represented by Ar 5 is represented by the formulas 45 to 60, 61 to 71, 77 to 80, A divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by 91, 92, 93 or 96 is preferred, and the ring represented by the formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92 or 96 A divalent group in which two hydrogen atoms are removed from is more preferable.
  • the above divalent aromatic group may have a substituent.
  • substituents include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above.
  • Examples of the divalent aromatic amine residue represented by Ar 5 in Formula (33) include a group represented by Formula (34).
  • Ar 6 , Ar 7 , Ar 8 and Ar 9 are each independently an arylene group with or without a substituent or a divalent heterocyclic ring with or without a substituent.
  • Ar 10 , Ar 11 and Ar 12 each independently represent an aryl group with or without a substituent or a monovalent heterocyclic group with or without a substituent, and n10 and m35 independently represents 0 or 1.
  • Examples of the substituent that the arylene group, aryl group, divalent heterocyclic group, and monovalent heterocyclic group may have include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkyloxy group, an alkylthio group, an aryl group, and an aryloxy group.
  • arylthio group arylalkyl group, arylalkyloxy group, arylalkylthio group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, arylalkenyl group, arylalkynyl group, acyl group, acyloxy group, amide group, acid imide group, imine residue, substitution Amino group, substituted silyl group, substituted silyloxy group, substituted silylthio group, substituted silylamino group, cyano group, nitro group, monovalent heterocyclic group, heteroaryloxy group, heteroarylthio group, alkyloxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl Group, arylalkyloxycarbonyl group, Lower aryloxy carbonyl group and a carboxyl group and the like.
  • the substituent is vinyl group, acetylene group, butenyl group, acrylic group, acrylate group, acrylamide group, methacryl group, methacrylate group, methacrylamide group, vinyl ether group, vinylamino group, silanol group, small ring (cyclopropyl group) , A group having a cyclobutyl group, an epoxy group, an oxetane group, a diketene group, an episulfide group, etc.), a lactone group, a lactam group, or a group containing a structure of a siloxane derivative.
  • the carbon atom in Ar 6 and the carbon atom in Ar 8 may be directly bonded, or may be bonded through a divalent group such as —O— or —S—. .
  • the aryl group and monovalent heterocyclic group represented by Ar 10 , Ar 11 , and Ar 12 are the same as the aryl group and monovalent heterocyclic group described and exemplified above as the substituent.
  • Examples of the arylene group represented by Ar 6 , Ar 7 , Ar 8 , Ar 9 include the remaining atomic groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom constituting an aromatic ring from an aromatic hydrocarbon, Examples thereof include a group having a benzene ring, a group having a condensed ring, a group in which two or more independent benzene rings or condensed rings are bonded through a single bond or a divalent organic group, for example, an alkenylene group such as a vinylene group. .
  • the arylene group usually has 6 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 7 to 48 carbon atoms.
  • the arylene group include a phenylene group, a biphenylene group, a C 1 to C 17 alkoxyphenylene group, a C 1 to C 17 alkylphenylene group, a 1-naphthylene group, a 2-naphthylene group, a 1-anthracenylene group, and a 2-anthracenylene group. Group, 9-anthracenylene group.
  • a hydrogen atom in the aryl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • the fluorine atom-substituted aryl group include a tetrafluorophenylene group.
  • a phenylene group, a biphenylene group, a C 1 to C 12 alkoxyphenylene group, and a C 1 to C 12 alkylphenylene group are preferable.
  • Examples of the divalent heterocyclic group represented by Ar 6 , Ar 7 , Ar 8 , Ar 9 include the remaining atomic groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a heterocyclic compound.
  • the heterocyclic compound is not only a carbon atom but also an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, a phosphorus atom, a boron atom, a silicon atom as an element constituting a ring among organic compounds having a cyclic structure.
  • An organic compound containing a heteroatom such as a selenium atom, a tellurium atom or an arsenic atom.
  • the divalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent.
  • the divalent heterocyclic group usually has 4 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 4 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the divalent heterocyclic group does not include the number of carbon atoms of the substituent.
  • Examples of such a divalent heterocyclic group include a thiophene diyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylthiophene diyl group, a pyrrole diyl group, a furandiyl group, a pyridinediyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylpyridine diyl group, and a pyridazine.
  • diyl group a pyrimidine-diyl group, a pyrazinediyl group, a triazine-diyl group, pyrrolidinediyl group, piperidine-diyl group, quinolinediyl group, and isoquinoline-diyl group, among others, a thiophene-diyl group, C 1 ⁇ C 12 alkyl thiophenediyl group, pyridinediyl More preferred are groups and C 1 -C 12 alkylpyridinediyl groups.
  • the ionic polymer containing a divalent aromatic amine residue as a structural unit may further have another structural unit.
  • other structural units include arylene groups such as a phenylene group and a fluorenediyl group. Of these ionic polymers, those containing a crosslinking group are preferred.
  • examples of the divalent aromatic amine residue represented by the formula (34) include groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the aromatic amine represented by the following formulas 101 to 110.
  • the aromatic amines represented by the formulas 101 to 110 may have a substituent within a range capable of forming a divalent aromatic amine residue, and as the substituent, in the description of Q 1 described above, Examples of the substituent are the same as the exemplified substituents, and when a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • X ′ represents an imino group with or without a substituent, a silylene group with or without a substituent, an ethenylene group with or without a substituent, or an ethynylene group.
  • substituents that the imino group, silyl group or ethenylene group may have include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, a t-butyl group, and a pentyl group.
  • Alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, 3,7-dimethyloctyl group, lauryl group; phenyl group, 1 An aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms such as -naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9-anthracenyl group, etc., and when there are a plurality of substituents, They may be the same or different.
  • X ′ is preferably an imino group, an ethenylene group or an ethynylene group.
  • m33 is preferably 1 and m34 is preferably 0.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (33) is preferable from the viewpoint of electron acceptability of the ionic polymer.
  • Ar 13 is a pyridinediyl group with or without a substituent, a pyrazinediyl group with or without a substituent, a pyrimidinediyl group with or without a substituent, Represents a pyridazinediyl group with or without a group or a triazinediyl group with or without a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent that the pyridinediyl group may have include the same substituents as the substituents exemplified in the description regarding Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different. Examples of the substituent that the pyrazinediyl group may have include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different. Examples of the substituent that the pyrimidinediyl group may have include the same substituents as the substituents exemplified in the description regarding Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • Examples of the substituent that the pyridazinediyl group may have include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different. Examples of the substituent that the triazinediyl group may have include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
  • the total proportion of the structural units represented by the formula (20) is 30 to 100 mol% in all the structural units contained in the ionic polymer excluding the terminal structural unit. It is more preferable that
  • the terminal structural unit (terminal group) of the ionic polymer used in the present invention includes a hydrogen atom, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s- Butyl group, t-butyl group, pentyl group, isoamyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, lauryl group methoxy group, ethoxy group, propyloxy group, isopropyloxy group, butoxy group , Isobutoxy group, s-butoxy group, t-butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, 2-ethylhexyloxy group, nonyloxy group,
  • the ionic polymer used in the present invention is preferably a conjugated compound.
  • the ionic polymer used in the present invention is a conjugated compound when the ionic polymer has a multiple bond (for example, double bond, triple bond) or a nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, etc. in the main chain. It means that the pair includes a region that is continuous with one single bond.
  • the ratio calculated by the following mathematical formula (A) is preferably 50% or more and more preferably 60% or more from the viewpoint of electron transport properties of the conjugated compound. Preferably, it is 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and further preferably 90% or more.
  • the ionic polymer used in the present invention is preferably a polymer compound, more preferably a conjugated polymer compound.
  • the polymer compound means a compound having a polystyrene-equivalent number average molecular weight of 1 ⁇ 10 3 or more.
  • the ionic polymer used in the present invention being a conjugated polymer compound means that the ionic polymer is a conjugated compound and a polymer compound.
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the ionic polymer is preferably 1 ⁇ 10 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 8 , and preferably 2 ⁇ 10 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 7 is more preferable, 3 ⁇ 10 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 7 is more preferable, and 5 ⁇ 10 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 7 is even more preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene is preferably 1 ⁇ 10 3 to 5 ⁇ 10 7 , more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 7. More preferably, it is ⁇ 10 3 to 5 ⁇ 10 6 .
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene is 1 ⁇ 10 3 ⁇ 5 ⁇ 10 5, more preferably 1 ⁇ 10 3 ⁇ 5 ⁇ 10 4, More preferably, it is 1 ⁇ 10 3 to 3 ⁇ 10 3 .
  • the polystyrene-equivalent number average molecular weight and weight average molecular weight of the ionic polymer used in the present invention can be determined using, for example, gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • the number of all structural units (ie, the degree of polymerization) contained in the ionic polymer excluding the terminal structural unit is preferably 1 or more and 20 or less. It is more preferably 10 or less and more preferably 1 or more and 5 or less.
  • the orbital energy of the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) of the ionic polymer is ⁇ 5.0 eV or more and ⁇ 2.0 eV or less. It is preferable that it is -4.5 eV or more and -2.0 eV or less.
  • the orbital energy of the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) of the ionic polymer is preferably from -6.0 eV to -3.0 eV, more preferably from -5.5 eV to -3.0 eV. Is more preferable.
  • the orbital energy of HOMO is lower than that of LUMO.
  • the orbital energy of the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) of the ionic polymer is obtained by measuring the ionization potential of the ionic polymer and using the obtained ionization potential as the orbital energy.
  • the orbital energy of the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) of the ionic polymer is obtained by calculating the energy difference between HOMO and LUMO and using the sum of the value and the ionization potential measured above as the orbital energy. .
  • a photoelectron spectrometer is used to measure the ionization potential.
  • the energy difference between HOMO and LUMO is obtained from the absorption terminal by measuring the absorption spectrum of the ionic polymer using an ultraviolet / visible / near infrared spectrophotometer.
  • the polymer used in the present invention is preferably substantially non-luminescent when used in an electroluminescent device.
  • the fact that a certain polymer is substantially non-luminous means as follows. First, an electroluminescent element A having a layer containing a certain polymer is produced. On the other hand, the electroluminescent element 2 which does not have the layer containing a polymer is produced. Although the electroluminescent element A has a layer containing a polymer, the electroluminescent element 2 is different from the electroluminescent element 2 only in that it does not have a layer containing a polymer. Next, a forward voltage of 10 V is applied to the electroluminescent element A and the electroluminescent element 2 to measure an emission spectrum.
  • the wavelength ⁇ that gives the maximum peak in the emission spectrum obtained for the electroluminescent element 2 is obtained.
  • the emission spectrum at the wavelength ⁇ is set to 1, the emission spectrum obtained for the electroluminescent element 2 is normalized, and the normalized emission amount S 0 is calculated by integrating with respect to the wavelength.
  • the emission intensity at the wavelength ⁇ is 1, the emission spectrum obtained for the electroluminescent element A is also normalized, and the normalized emission amount S is calculated by integrating the wavelength.
  • the polymer When the value calculated by (S ⁇ S 0 ) / S 0 ⁇ 100% is 30% or less, that is, compared with the normalized luminescence amount of the electroluminescent device 2 having no polymer-containing layer, the polymer When the increase in the normalized luminescence amount of the electroluminescent element A having a layer containing is 30% or less, the polymer used is substantially non-luminous, and (S ⁇ S 0 ) / S The value calculated by 0 ⁇ 100 is preferably 15% or less, and more preferably 10% or less.
  • an ionic polymer consisting only of the group represented by the formula (23), a formula (23) One or more selected from the group consisting of groups represented by formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, and 101 to 110, wherein two hydrogen atoms are removed.
  • An ionic polymer comprising only the group represented by formula (24), a group represented by formula (24) and the formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92 96, 101 to 110, an ionic polymer comprising one or more groups selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, an ion comprising only the group represented by formula (25) Polymer, group represented by formula (25) and formula 4 An ionic polymer comprising one or more groups selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the groups represented by ⁇ 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, 101 to 110 An ionic polymer consisting only of a group represented by formula (29), a group represented by formula (29) and formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, 101 to 110 An ionic polymer comprising at least one group selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen
  • Examples of the ionic polymer containing the group represented by the formula (1) and the group represented by the formula (3) include the following polymer compounds. Among these, in the polymer compound represented by the formula in which two types of structural units are separated by a slash “/”, the proportion of the structural unit on the left is p mol% and the proportion of the structural unit on the right is (100 ⁇ p) mol%, and these structural units are randomly arranged. In the following formula, n represents the degree of polymerization.
  • an ionic polymer consisting only of the group represented by the formula (26), the formula (26) One or more selected from the group consisting of groups represented by formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, and 101 to 110, wherein two hydrogen atoms are removed.
  • An ionic polymer comprising only the group represented by the formula (27), a group represented by the formula (27) and the formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92 96, 101 to 110, an ionic polymer comprising one or more groups selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, ions comprising only groups represented by formula (28) Polymer, group represented by formula (28) and formula 4 An ionic polymer comprising one or more groups selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the groups represented by ⁇ 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, 101 to 110 An ionic polymer comprising only a group represented by formula (31), a group represented by formula (31), and formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, and 101 to 110 An ionic polymer comprising at least one group selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen
  • Examples of the ionic polymer containing the group represented by the formula (2) and the group represented by the formula (3) include the following polymer compounds. Among these, in the polymer compound represented by the formula in which two types of structural units are separated by a slash “/”, the proportion of the structural unit on the left is p mol% and the proportion of the structural unit on the right is (100 ⁇ p) mol%, and these structural units are randomly arranged. In the following formula, n represents the degree of polymerization.
  • a method for producing the ionic polymer used in the present invention will be described.
  • a suitable method for producing the ionic polymer used in the present invention for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (36) is selected and used as one of the raw materials.
  • -A a - compound in -A a - compound is a structural unit represented by the formula (13), said -A a - compound is a structural unit represented by the formula (15), said -A a - is the formula ( 17)
  • Y 4 -A a -Y 5 (36) In formula (36), A a is represented by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) and 1 represented by formula (3).
  • a repeating unit containing a group of at least species is represented, and Y 4 and Y 5 each independently represent a group involved in condensation polymerization.
  • the ionic polymer used in the present invention contains a structural unit represented by -A a- in the above formula (36) and another structural unit other than -A a- .
  • a compound having two substituents involved in condensation polymerization which is another structural unit other than —A a —, is used together with the compound represented by the formula (36), the condensation polymerization is performed. Good.
  • Examples of the compound having two condensation-polymerizable substituents used to contain such other structural units include compounds represented by the formula (37).
  • the structural unit represented by -A b- is obtained by condensation polymerization of the compound represented by Formula (37).
  • the ionic polymer used in the present invention can be produced.
  • Y 6 -A b -Y 7 (37) (In the formula (37), Ab is a structural unit represented by the general formula (33) or a structural unit represented by the general formula (35), and Y 6 and Y 7 are each independently a condensation polymerization. Represents a group involved in
  • Examples of groups (Y 4 , Y 5 , Y 6 and Y 7 ) involved in such condensation polymerization include a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl sulfonate group, an aryl sulfonate group, an arylalkyl sulfonate group, a borate ester residue, Examples thereof include a sulfonium methyl group, a phosphonium methyl group, a phosphonate methyl group, a monohalogenated methyl group, —B (OH) 2 , a formyl group, a cyano group, and a vinyl group.
  • halogen atom examples include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • aryl sulfonate group include a benzene sulfonate group and a p-toluene sulfonate group. Is exemplified.
  • examples of the boric acid ester residue that can be selected as a group involved in the condensation polymerization include groups represented by the following formulae.
  • the sulfonium methyl group that can be selected as a group involved in the condensation polymerization includes the following formula: —CH 2 S + Me 2 E ⁇ or —CH 2 S + Ph 2 E ⁇ (Wherein E represents a halogen atom, Ph represents a phenyl group, and the same shall apply hereinafter).
  • Examples of the phosphonium methyl group that can be selected as the group involved in the condensation polymerization include the following formula: -CH 2 P + Ph 3 E - (Wherein E represents a halogen atom).
  • the phosphonate methyl group that can be selected as the group involved in the condensation polymerization is represented by the following formula: —CH 2 PO (OR d ) 2 (Wherein, R d represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an arylalkyl group).
  • examples of the monohalogenated methyl group that can be selected as the group involved in the condensation polymerization include a methyl fluoride group, a methyl chloride group, a methyl bromide group, and a methyl iodide group.
  • a group suitable as a group involved in condensation polymerization varies depending on the type of polymerization reaction.
  • a zerovalent nickel complex such as a Yamamoto coupling reaction
  • a halogen atom an alkyl sulfonate group, an aryl sulfonate group And arylalkyl sulfonate groups.
  • a nickel catalyst or palladium catalyst such as a Suzuki coupling reaction
  • an alkyl sulfonate group, a halogen atom, a borate ester residue, —B (OH) 2 and the like can be mentioned.
  • oxidative polymerization a hydrogen atom is exemplified.
  • the compound (monomer) represented by the general formula (36) or (37) having a plurality of groups involved in condensation polymerization may be used.
  • Such polymerization methods include, for example, “Organic Reactions”, Vol. 14, pages 270-490, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1965, “Organic Synthesis”.
  • a known condensation polymerization reaction according to the group which participates in condensation polymerization.
  • examples of such a polymerization method include a method of polymerizing a corresponding monomer by a Suzuki coupling reaction, a method of polymerizing by a Grignard reaction, a method of polymerizing by a Ni (0) complex, a method of polymerizing by an oxidizing agent such as FeCl 3 , Examples thereof include a method of electrochemically oxidative polymerization and a method of decomposing an intermediate polymer having an appropriate leaving group.
  • a polymerization method using a Suzuki coupling reaction a polymerization method using a Grignard reaction, and a polymerization method using a nickel zero-valent complex are preferable because the structure of the resulting ionic polymer can be easily controlled.
  • One aspect of a preferred method for producing the ionic polymer used in the present invention is a group selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an alkyl sulfonate group, an aryl sulfonate group, and an aryl alkyl sulfonate group as a group involved in condensation polymerization.
  • This is a method for producing an ionic polymer by condensation polymerization in the presence of a nickel zero-valent complex using a starting material monomer.
  • Examples of the raw material monomer used in such a method include dihalogenated compounds, bis (alkyl sulfonate) compounds, bis (aryl sulfonate) compounds, bis (aryl alkyl sulfonate) compounds, halogen-alkyl sulfonate compounds, and halogen-aryl sulfonates.
  • dihalogenated compounds bis (alkyl sulfonate) compounds, bis (aryl sulfonate) compounds, bis (aryl alkyl sulfonate) compounds, halogen-alkyl sulfonate compounds, and halogen-aryl sulfonates.
  • a group involved in condensation polymerization includes a halogen atom, an alkyl sulfonate group, an aryl sulfonate group, an aryl alkyl sulfonate group, —B (OH) 2 , and a boric acid ester residue.
  • the organic solvent although it varies depending on the compound and reaction used, it is generally preferable to use an organic solvent that has been sufficiently deoxygenated to suppress side reactions.
  • an organic solvent that has been sufficiently deoxygenated to suppress side reactions.
  • organic solvents examples include saturated hydrocarbons such as pentane, hexane, heptane, octane and cyclohexane, unsaturated hydrocarbons such as benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene and xylene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, dichloromethane, chlorobutane, bromobutane, chloro Halogenated saturated hydrocarbons such as pentane, bromopentane, chlorohexane, bromohexane, chlorocyclohexane and bromocyclohexane, halogenated unsaturated hydrocarbons such as chlorobenzene, dichlorobenzene and trichlorobenzene, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, alcohols such as t-butyl alcohol, carboxylic acids such as formic acid, acetic acid and propionic
  • organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • ethers are more preferable from the viewpoint of reactivity
  • tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether are more preferable
  • toluene and xylene are preferable from the viewpoint of reaction rate.
  • an alkali or a suitable catalyst in order to react the raw material monomers. What is necessary is just to select such an alkali or a catalyst according to the superposition
  • Such an alkali or catalyst is preferably one that is sufficiently dissolved in the solvent used in the reaction.
  • the alkali or catalyst solution is slowly added while stirring the reaction liquid under an inert atmosphere such as argon or nitrogen, or the reaction liquid is added to the alkali or catalyst solution. The method of adding slowly is illustrated.
  • the terminal group is protected with a stable group. May be.
  • the terminal group is protected with such a stable group, when the ionic polymer used in the present invention is a conjugated compound, it has a conjugated bond continuous with the conjugated structure of the main chain of the ionic polymer.
  • the structure is preferably, for example, a structure bonded to an aryl group or a heterocyclic group via a carbon-carbon bond. Examples of such a stable group for protecting the end group include substituents such as a monovalent aromatic compound group represented by the structural formula of Chemical Formula 10 in JP-A-9-45478.
  • an ionic polymer having no cation is polymerized in the first step, and then from the ionic polymer in the second step.
  • the method of manufacturing the ionic polymer containing a cation is mentioned.
  • the above-mentioned condensation polymerization reaction may be mentioned.
  • the reaction in the second step include a hydrolysis reaction with a metal hydroxide, an alkyl ammonium hydroxide, or the like.
  • an ionic polymer having no ions is polymerized in the first step, and ions are generated from the ionic polymer in the second step.
  • the method of manufacturing the ionic polymer containing this is mentioned.
  • the above-mentioned condensation polymerization reaction may be mentioned.
  • the reaction in the second step include quaternary ammonium chlorination reaction of amine using alkyl halide, halogen abstraction reaction with SbF 5 and the like.
  • the ionic polymer used in the present invention is excellent in charge injection and transportability, an element that emits light with high brightness can be obtained.
  • Examples of a method for forming a layer containing an ionic polymer include a method of forming a film using a solution containing an ionic polymer.
  • Solvents used for film formation from such solutions include alcohols other than water, ethers, esters, nitrile compounds, nitro compounds, alkyl halides, aryl halides, thiols, sulfides Of the solvents such as sulfoxides, thioketones, amides and carboxylic acids, those having a solubility parameter of 9.3 or more are preferable.
  • Examples of the solvent include methanol (12.9), ethanol (11.2), 2-propanol (11.5), 1- Butanol (9.9), t-butyl alcohol (10.5), acetonitrile (11.8), 1,2-ethanediol (14.7), N, N-dimethylformamide (11.5), dimethyl sulfoxide (12.8), acetic acid (12.4), nitrobenzene (11.1), nitromethane (11.0), 1,2-dichloroethane (9.7), dichloromethane (9.6), chlorobenzene (9.6) ), Bromobenzene (9.9), dioxane (9.8), propylene carbonate (13.3), pyridine (10.4), carbon disulfide (10.0), and a mixed solvent thereof.
  • a mixed solvent formed by mixing two kinds of solvents (referred to as solvent 1 and solvent 2) will be described.
  • the film thickness of the electron injection layer the optimum value varies depending on the ionic polymer to be used, so that the drive voltage and the light emission efficiency may be selected to be appropriate values, and a thickness that does not cause pinholes is required.
  • the film thickness is preferably 1 nm to 1 ⁇ m, more preferably 2 nm to 500 nm, and even more preferably 2 nm to 200 nm.
  • the film thickness is preferably 5 nm to 1 ⁇ m.
  • a material for the cathode As a material for the cathode, a material having high electrical conductivity is preferable. Moreover, in the organic EL element of the structure which takes out light from an anode side, in order to reflect the light from a light emitting layer to an anode side with a cathode, the material with a high visible light reflectance is preferable as a material of a cathode.
  • gold, silver, platinum, copper, aluminum, manganese, titanium, cobalt, nickel, tungsten, tin alone or an alloy containing one or more, graphite, or a graphite intercalation compound is used.
  • a conductive metal oxide, a conductive resin, a mixture of a resin and a conductive filler, or the like can be used.
  • the conductive metal oxide include indium oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, ITO, and IZO
  • examples of the conductive resin include 3,4-polyethylenedioxythiophene / polystyrene sulfonic acid. Can do.
  • a conductive resin can be used as the resin.
  • metal fine particles, conductive wires, and the like can be used as the conductive filler.
  • Au, Ag, Al, or the like can be used.
  • the cathode may be composed of a laminate in which two or more layers are laminated.
  • the film thickness of the cathode is appropriately designed in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 10 nm to 10 ⁇ m, preferably 20 nm to 1 ⁇ m, and more preferably 50 nm to 500 nm.
  • Examples of the method for producing the cathode include a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, and a laminating method in which a metal thin film is thermocompression bonded.
  • a coating method can be used in the case of using ink in which a conductive filler and a resin are dispersed in a dispersion medium.
  • An ionic polymer was produced by the following method, and an organic EL device was produced using this ionic polymer for an electron injection layer.
  • the resulting solid was filtered off and washed with heated acetonitrile. The washed solid was dissolved in acetone, and the solid was recrystallized from the obtained acetone solution and filtered.
  • the resulting solid (62.7 g), 2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] -p-toluenesulfonate (86.3 g), potassium carbonate (62.6 g), and 18-crown-6 (7 2 g) was dissolved in N, N-dimethylformamide (DMF) (670 mL) and the solution was transferred to a flask and stirred at 105 ° C. overnight. The obtained mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, added to ice water, and stirred for 1 hour.
  • DMF N, N-dimethylformamide
  • the obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran.
  • the solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid.
  • the obtained solid was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried.
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer A was 5.2 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the polymer A consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (A).
  • Conjugated polymer compound 1 is composed of a repeating unit represented by formula (B) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) ” is 100 mol%.
  • the conjugated polymer compound 1 had an orbital energy of HOMO of ⁇ 5.5 eV and an orbital energy of LUMO of ⁇ 2.7 eV.
  • Conjugated polymer compound 2 is composed of a repeating unit represented by formula (C) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 100 mol%.)
  • the conjugated polymer compound 2 had an orbital energy of HOMO of ⁇ 5.5 eV and an orbital energy of LUMO of ⁇ 2.7 eV.
  • Conjugated polymer compound 3 is composed of a repeating unit represented by formula (D) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 100 mol%.)
  • the conjugated polymer compound 3 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.8 eV.
  • the conjugated polymer compound 4 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (E) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 90 mol%.)
  • the conjugated polymer compound 4 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.8 eV.
  • reaction was allowed to react for 3.5 hours. Thereafter, parabromotoluene (0.68 g) was added thereto, and the mixture was further reacted for 2.5 hours. After the reaction, the reaction solution was cooled to room temperature, 50 ml of ethyl acetate / 50 ml of distilled water were added, and the aqueous layer was removed. After adding 50 ml of distilled water again to remove the aqueous layer, magnesium sulfate was added as a desiccant, and the insoluble matter was filtered to remove the organic solvent.
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer B was 2.0 ⁇ 10 3 .
  • the polymer B is represented by the formula (F).
  • the obtained polymer B cesium salt is referred to as a conjugated polymer compound 5.
  • the conjugated polymer compound 5 is represented by the formula (G) (“one type selected from the group consisting of the group represented by the formula (1) and the group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the conjugated polymer compound 5 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.6 eV.
  • the obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran.
  • the solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid.
  • the obtained solid was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried.
  • the yield of the obtained polymer C was 526 mg.
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer C was 3.6 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the polymer C consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (H).
  • N, N′-bis (4-bromophenyl) -N, N′-bis (4-t-butyl-2,6-dimethylphenyl) 1,4-phenylenediamine is disclosed in, for example, JP-A-2008-74017. It can be synthesized by the method described in the publication.
  • the resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (150 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer C had completely disappeared.
  • the obtained cesium salt of polymer C is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 6.
  • the conjugated polymer compound 6 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (I) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 95 mol%.).
  • the conjugated polymer compound 6 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.3 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.6 eV.
  • the mixed solution was dropped into 300 mL of methanol and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered, dried under reduced pressure for 2 hours, and dissolved in 20 mL of tetrahydrofuran.
  • the obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran.
  • the solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid.
  • the obtained solid was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column.
  • the tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried.
  • the yield of the obtained polymer D was 590 mg.
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer D was 2.7 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the polymer D consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (J). 3,7-Dibromo-N- (4-n-butylphenyl) phenoxazine was synthesized by the method described in JP2004137456.
  • conjugated polymer compound 7 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (K) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by the formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 90 mol%.)
  • the conjugated polymer compound 7 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.3 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.4 eV.
  • Phenylboronic acid (0.002 g) was added to the reaction solution and refluxed for 10 hours. Next, an aqueous sodium diethyldithiacarbamate solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added and stirred for 1 hour. The mixed solution was dropped into 300 mL of methanol and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered, dried under reduced pressure for 2 hours, and dissolved in 20 mL of tetrahydrofuran.
  • the obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran.
  • the solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid.
  • the obtained solid was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried.
  • the yield of the obtained polymer E was 293 mg.
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer E was 1.8 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the polymer E consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (L).
  • Conjugated polymer compound 8 is composed of a repeating unit represented by formula (M) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 75 mol%.)
  • the conjugated polymer compound 8 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.6 eV.
  • Phenylboronic acid (0.002 g) was added to the reaction solution and refluxed for 4 hours. Next, an aqueous sodium diethyldithiacarbamate solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added and stirred for 1 hour. The mixed solution was dropped into 300 mL of methanol and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered, dried under reduced pressure for 2 hours, and dissolved in 20 mL of tetrahydrofuran.
  • the obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran.
  • the solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid.
  • the obtained solid was dissolved in a mixed solvent of tetrahydrofuran / ethyl acetate (1/1 (volume ratio)) and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column.
  • the tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried.
  • the yield of the obtained polymer E was 343 mg.
  • the polystyrene equivalent number average molecular weight of the polymer F was 6.0 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the polymer F consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (N).
  • the resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (130 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer E completely disappeared.
  • the resulting cesium salt of polymer F is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 9.
  • the conjugated polymer compound 9 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (O) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by the formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 75 mol%.)
  • the conjugated polymer compound 9 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.9 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.8 eV.
  • the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and redissolved in tetrahydrofuran.
  • the solution was added dropwise to a mixture of methanol (200 mL) and 15% aqueous ammonia (100 mL), and the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration.
  • the precipitate was redissolved in tetrahydrofuran, added dropwise to a mixture of methanol (200 mL) and water (100 mL), and the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration.
  • the collected precipitate was dried under reduced pressure to obtain a polymer G (360 mg).
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer G was 6.0 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the polymer G consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (P).
  • the conjugated polymer compound 10 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (Q) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by the formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 100 mol%.)
  • the conjugated polymer compound 10 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.7 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.9 eV.
  • the obtained precipitate was filtered off to obtain a solid (18 g). Under an inert atmosphere, the obtained solid (1 g), 2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] -p-toluenesulfonate (1.5 g), potassium carbonate (0.7 g), DMF (15 mL) were added. Mix and stir at 100 ° C. for 4 hours. After allowing to cool, chloroform was added to perform liquid separation and extraction, and the solution was concentrated. The concentrate was dissolved in chloroform and purified by passing through a silica gel column. The solution was concentrated to give 1,3-dibromo-5-ethoxycarbonyl-6- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] benzene (1.0 g).
  • Phenylboronic acid (6 mg) was added to the reaction solution and refluxed for 14 hours. Then, a sodium diethyldithiacarbamate aqueous solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The aqueous layer was removed, the organic layer was washed with distilled water, and the solid obtained by concentration was dissolved in chloroform and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The eluate from the column was concentrated and dried. The yield of the obtained polymer H was 0.44 g.
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer H was 3.6 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the polymer H consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (R).
  • conjugated polymer compound 11 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (S) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by the formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 100 mol%.)
  • the conjugated polymer compound 11 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.8 eV.
  • the resulting solid was filtered off and washed with heated acetonitrile. The washed solid was dissolved in acetone, and the solid was recrystallized from the obtained acetone solution and filtered.
  • the resulting solid (16.3 g), 2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] -p-toluenesulfonate (60.3 g), potassium carbonate (48.6 g), and 18-crown-6 (2 4 g) was dissolved in N, N-dimethylformamide (DMF) (500 mL) and the solution was transferred to a flask and stirred at 110 ° C. for 15 hours. The obtained mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, added to ice water, and stirred for 1 hour.
  • DMF N, N-dimethylformamide
  • the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer I was 2.0 ⁇ 10 3 .
  • the polymer I is represented by the formula (T).
  • 2- (4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,2,3-dioxaboran-2-yl) -9,9-dioctylfluorene is described in, for example, JP-A-2008-74017. It can be synthesized by the method.
  • the obtained polymer I cesium salt is referred to as a conjugated polymer compound 12.
  • the conjugated polymer compound 12 is represented by the formula (U) (“one type selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units).
  • the conjugated polymer compound 12 had a HOMO orbital energy of ⁇ 5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of ⁇ 2.8 eV.
  • PEDOT PSS solution (poly (3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) / polystyrene sulfonic acid, product name: “Baytron”) manufactured by Starck Vitec Co., Ltd. was used as the hole injection material solution.
  • a hole transporting polymer material and xylene were mixed to obtain a composition for forming a hole transporting layer containing 0.7 wt% of the hole transporting polymer material.
  • the hole transporting polymer material was synthesized by the following method. To a 1 liter three-necked round bottom flask equipped with a reflux condenser and an overhead stirrer was added 2,7-bis (1,3,2-dioxyborol) -9,9-di (1-octyl) fluorene (3.863 g). 7.283 mmol), N, N-di (p-bromophenyl) -N- (4- (butan-2-yl) phenyl) amine (3.177 g, 6.919 mmol) and di (4-bromophenyl) Benzocyclobutanamine (156.3 mg, 0.364 mmol) was added.
  • the aqueous layer was removed and the organic layer was washed with 50 mL of water.
  • the organic layer was returned to the reaction flask and 0.75 g of sodium diethyldithiocarbamate and 50 mL of water were added.
  • the resulting mixture was stirred in an 85 ° C. oil bath for 16 hours.
  • the aqueous layer was removed and the organic layer was washed 3 times with 100 mL of water and then passed through a column of silica gel and basic alumina.
  • toluene as an eluent, a toluene solution containing the eluted polymer was recovered. Next, the recovered toluene solution was poured into methanol to precipitate a polymer.
  • the precipitated polymer was dissolved again in toluene, and the obtained toluene solution was poured into methanol to precipitate the polymer again.
  • the precipitated polymer was vacuum-dried at 60 ° C. to obtain 4.2 g of a hole transporting polymer material.
  • the obtained hole transporting polymer material had a polystyrene equivalent weight average molecular weight of 1.24 ⁇ 10 5 and a molecular weight distribution index (Mw / Mn) of 2.8. It was.
  • the composition for forming a hole transport layer was applied by a spin coating method to obtain a coating film having a thickness of 20 nm.
  • the substrate provided with this coating film was heated at 190 ° C. for 20 minutes in an inert atmosphere (in a nitrogen atmosphere) to insolubilize the coating film, and then naturally cooled to room temperature to form a substrate on which the hole transport layer was formed. Obtained.
  • a light emitting polymer material (“Lumation BP361” manufactured by Summation Co., Ltd.) and xylene were mixed to obtain a composition for forming a light emitting layer containing 1.4% by weight of the light emitting polymer material.
  • the composition for light emitting layer formation was apply
  • the substrate provided with this coating film was heated at 130 ° C. for 15 minutes in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) to evaporate the solvent and then naturally cooled to room temperature to obtain a substrate on which a light emitting layer was formed.
  • the substrate on which the layer containing the conjugated polymer compound 1 obtained above was formed was inserted into a vacuum apparatus, and an Al film was formed on the layer by vacuum vapor deposition to form a cathode, thereby forming a laminated structure. 1 was produced.
  • the laminated structure 1 obtained above was taken out from the vacuum apparatus and sealed with sealing glass and a two-component mixed epoxy resin in an inert atmosphere (in a nitrogen atmosphere) to obtain an organic EL element 1.
  • Example 13 In Example 13, except that Au was used instead of Al, the same operation as in Example 13 was performed to obtain an electroluminescent element 16.
  • Example 29 Methanol and conjugated polymer compound 1 were mixed to obtain a composition containing 0.2% by weight of conjugated polymer compound 1.
  • the composition was applied by spin coating in the air on an ITO cathode (film thickness: 45 nm) patterned on the surface of a glass substrate to obtain a coating film having a film thickness of 10 nm.
  • the substrate provided with this coating film was heated in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) at 130 ° C. for 10 minutes to evaporate the solvent, and then naturally cooled to room temperature. A formed substrate was obtained.
  • a light emitting polymer material (“Lumation BP361” manufactured by Summation Co., Ltd.) and xylene were mixed to obtain a composition for forming a light emitting layer containing 1.4% by weight of the light emitting polymer material.
  • a composition for forming a light-emitting layer is applied in the air by a spin coating method on the layer containing the conjugated polymer compound 1 of the substrate on which the layer containing the conjugated polymer compound 1 obtained above is formed. Coating film was obtained.
  • the substrate provided with this coating film was heated at 130 ° C. for 15 minutes in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) to evaporate the solvent and then naturally cooled to room temperature to obtain a substrate on which a light emitting layer was formed.
  • the hole injection material solution was applied in the air by a spin coating method on the light emitting layer of the substrate on which the light emitting layer obtained above was formed, to obtain a coating film having a film thickness of 60 nm.
  • the substrate provided with this coating film was heated in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) at 130 ° C. for 15 minutes to evaporate the solvent and then naturally cooled to room temperature to obtain a substrate on which a hole injection layer was formed.
  • PEDOT PSS solution (poly (3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) / polystyrenesulfonic acid, product name: “Baytron”) manufactured by Starck Vitec Co., Ltd. was used as the hole injection material solution.
  • the substrate on which the hole injection layer formed above was formed was inserted into a vacuum apparatus, Au was deposited on the layer by 80 nm by a vacuum deposition method, and an anode was formed, whereby the laminated structure 1 was manufactured. .
  • the laminated structure 2 obtained above was taken out from the vacuum apparatus and sealed with sealing glass and a two-component mixed epoxy resin in an inert atmosphere (in a nitrogen atmosphere) to obtain an organic EL element 17.
  • the light emitting device and the manufacturing method thereof according to the present invention can be used in technical fields such as a display and a lighting device.

Abstract

Provided is a light emitting device having a structure that does not need to undergo a step for removing ink applied in unwanted locations when forming a light emitting layer according to a coating method, and provided with multiple organic EL elements having an easily-formed electron injection layer. One embodiment of this light emitting device is provided with a support substrate, and multiple organic EL elements disposed on the support substrate along a prescribed array direction and connected in series. A light emitting layer straddles the multiple organic EL elements and extends along the prescribed array direction. Pairs of electrodes each have, as viewed from one of thickness directions of the support substrate, an extended section that extends in such a manner as to protrude from the light emitting layer in the width direction. One of the electrodes of the pair of electrodes extends from the extended section in the array direction to the other electrode of the adjacent organic EL element in the array direction, and also has a connection section that is connected to the other electrode. The electron injection layer contains an ionic polymer.

Description

発光装置及び発光装置の製造方法LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE AND LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE MANUFACTURING METHOD
 本発明は発光装置およびその製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a light emitting device and a manufacturing method thereof.
 有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子(以下、「エレクトロルミネッセンス(ElectroLuminescence)」を「EL」と記載することがある。)は、電圧を印加することによって発光する発光素子の一種であり、一対の電極と、この一対の電極間に配置される発光層とを含んで構成される。有機EL素子に電圧を印加すると、陽極から正孔が注入されるとともに、陰極から電子が注入される。これら正孔と電子とが発光層において結合することにより発光が生じる。 An organic electroluminescence element (hereinafter, “electroluminescence” may be referred to as “EL”) is a type of light-emitting element that emits light when a voltage is applied. And a light emitting layer disposed between the electrodes. When a voltage is applied to the organic EL element, holes are injected from the anode and electrons are injected from the cathode. Light emission occurs when these holes and electrons are combined in the light emitting layer.
 なお陽極と陰極との間に発光層のみが設けられた構成の有機EL素子では、所期の発光特性をえることがむずかしいため、通常は陽極と陰極との間に発光層以外の所定の層がさらに設けられる。このような層としてたとえば、陰極からの電子注入を容易にする電子注入層が設けられることがある。 In addition, in an organic EL element having a configuration in which only a light emitting layer is provided between an anode and a cathode, it is difficult to obtain the desired light emitting characteristics. Therefore, a predetermined layer other than the light emitting layer is usually provided between the anode and the cathode. Is further provided. As such a layer, for example, an electron injection layer that facilitates electron injection from the cathode may be provided.
 またさらに、所期の発光特性をえるために、複数の有機EL素子を直列に接続した発光装置が提案されている(たとえば特許文献1参照)。 Furthermore, in order to obtain the desired light emission characteristics, a light emitting device in which a plurality of organic EL elements are connected in series has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
 図9は複数(図9では3個)の有機EL素子1が直列接続された発光装置2を模式的に示す図である。図9(1)は発光装置2の平面図であり、図9(2)は発光装置2の断面図である。 FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 2 in which a plurality (three in FIG. 9) of organic EL elements 1 are connected in series. FIG. 9A is a plan view of the light-emitting device 2, and FIG. 9B is a cross-sectional view of the light-emitting device 2.
 図9に示す発光装置2は3個の有機EL素子1を備える。これら3個の有機EL素子1は、支持基板3上において所定の配列方向Xに沿って配置され、直列接続されている。 The light emitting device 2 shown in FIG. 9 includes three organic EL elements 1. These three organic EL elements 1 are arranged along a predetermined arrangement direction X on the support substrate 3 and are connected in series.
 図9に示す各有機EL素子1は、一対の電極4,5と、この電極間に設けられる発光層6および電子注入層7とを備える。以下では一対の電極4,5のうちで、支持基板3寄りに配置される電極を第1電極4と記載し、第1電極4よりも支持基板2から離間して配置される電極を第2電極5と記載する。これら第1および第2電極4,5のうちのいずれか一方が陽極として機能し、他方が陰極として機能する。 Each organic EL element 1 shown in FIG. 9 includes a pair of electrodes 4 and 5, and a light emitting layer 6 and an electron injection layer 7 provided between the electrodes. Hereinafter, of the pair of electrodes 4 and 5, an electrode disposed near the support substrate 3 is referred to as a first electrode 4, and an electrode disposed farther from the support substrate 2 than the first electrode 4 is a second electrode. This is referred to as an electrode 5. One of the first and second electrodes 4 and 5 functions as an anode, and the other functions as a cathode.
 図9では第1電極4が陽極として機能し、第2電極5が陰極として機能する構成の有機EL素子1を示している。この場合、有機EL素子1は、第1電極4、発光層6、電子注入層7、および第2電極5がこの順で支持基板2上に積層されて構成される。なお素子特性および工程の簡易さなどを勘案して、第1および第2電極4,5間には発光層6および電子注入層7のみならず、これらの層とは異なる所定の層が設けられることもある。 FIG. 9 shows the organic EL element 1 having a configuration in which the first electrode 4 functions as an anode and the second electrode 5 functions as a cathode. In this case, the organic EL element 1 is configured by laminating the first electrode 4, the light emitting layer 6, the electron injection layer 7, and the second electrode 5 on the support substrate 2 in this order. In consideration of element characteristics and process simplicity, not only the light emitting layer 6 and the electron injection layer 7 but also a predetermined layer different from these layers is provided between the first and second electrodes 4 and 5. Sometimes.
 図9に示すように各有機EL素子1の第1電極4は、互いに配列方向Xに所定の間隔をあけて離散的に配置されるため、相互に電気的には接続されていない。同様に各有機EL素子1の第2電極5は、互いに配列方向Xに所定の間隔をあけて配置されるため、相互に電気的には接続されていない。このように複数の有機EL素子の第1電極4同士および第2電極5同士はそれぞれ互いに電気的には接続されていない。 As shown in FIG. 9, the first electrodes 4 of the organic EL elements 1 are discretely arranged at a predetermined interval in the arrangement direction X and are not electrically connected to each other. Similarly, the second electrodes 5 of the respective organic EL elements 1 are not electrically connected to each other because they are arranged at a predetermined interval in the arrangement direction X. Thus, the first electrodes 4 and the second electrodes 5 of the plurality of organic EL elements are not electrically connected to each other.
 他方、配列方向Xに隣り合う有機EL素子1の第1電極4と、第2電極5とは物理的に接続され、互いに電気的に接続されている。これによって複数の有機EL素子1は直列接続を構成する。具体的には第1電極4は、配列方向Xの一方(以下、「配列方向Xの一方」を「左方」といい、「配列方向Xの他方」を右方ということがある。)の端部(以下、左端部ということがある。)が、左方に隣り合う有機EL素子1の第2電極5の右方の端部(以下、右端部ということがある。)に重なる位置まで延在するように形成され、左方に隣り合う有機EL素子1の第2電極5と物理的に接続されている。このように配列方向Xに隣り合う有機EL素子1の第1電極4と第2電極5とが物理的に接続されることにより、複数の有機EL素子1は直列接続を構成する。 On the other hand, the first electrode 4 and the second electrode 5 of the organic EL element 1 adjacent in the arrangement direction X are physically connected and electrically connected to each other. Thus, the plurality of organic EL elements 1 constitutes a series connection. Specifically, the first electrode 4 is one of the arrangement directions X (hereinafter, “one of the arrangement directions X” may be referred to as “left”, and “the other of the arrangement directions X” may be referred to as right). Up to a position where the end (hereinafter also referred to as the left end) overlaps the right end (hereinafter also referred to as the right end) of the second electrode 5 of the organic EL element 1 adjacent to the left. It is formed so as to extend and is physically connected to the second electrode 5 of the organic EL element 1 adjacent to the left. Thus, the 1st electrode 4 and the 2nd electrode 5 of the organic EL element 1 which adjoin the arrangement direction X are physically connected, The some organic EL element 1 comprises a serial connection.
 つぎに図10を参照して図9に示す発光装置の製造方法を説明する。 Next, a method for manufacturing the light emitting device shown in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.
 まず支持基板3上に第1電極4を形成する。具体的には支持基板3上に、配列方向Xに所定の間隔をあけて離散的に3つの第1電極4を形成する(図10(1)参照)。 First, the first electrode 4 is formed on the support substrate 3. Specifically, three first electrodes 4 are discretely formed on the support substrate 3 at predetermined intervals in the arrangement direction X (see FIG. 10A).
 つぎに発光層6となる材料を含むインキを、所定の塗布法によって支持基板3上に塗布する。一般に、塗布法は意図する部位にのみ選択的にインキ(ink)をパターン塗布することがむずかしく、第1電極4間などの不要な部位にもインキが塗布される(図10(2)参照)。そのためインキを塗布した後に、不要な部位に塗布されたインキを除去する工程が必要となる(図10(3)参照)。このインキの除去は、たとえばインキが可溶な溶剤を含ませた布や綿棒などを使ってインキを拭き取る方法や、レーザーアブレーション法などによっておこなうことができる。 Next, an ink containing a material that becomes the light emitting layer 6 is applied onto the support substrate 3 by a predetermined application method. In general, it is difficult for the coating method to selectively apply ink (ink) in a pattern only to an intended portion, and ink is also applied to unnecessary portions such as between the first electrodes 4 (see FIG. 10 (2)). . Therefore, after applying the ink, a step of removing the ink applied to unnecessary portions is required (see FIG. 10 (3)). This ink can be removed by, for example, a method of wiping the ink using a cloth or cotton swab containing a solvent in which the ink is soluble, a laser ablation method, or the like.
 つぎに発光層6上に電子注入層7をパターン形成する(図10(4)参照)。電子注入層7は一般に大気中において不安定な電子注入材料によって構成されている。一般に電子注入層はBa、BaO、LiFおよびNaFなどによって構成されており、通常は真空雰囲気中において形成される。その後、第2電極5をパターン形成する(図10(5)参照)。これによって、直列接続された3個の有機EL素子1を備える発光装置2を作製することができる。 Next, a pattern of the electron injection layer 7 is formed on the light emitting layer 6 (see FIG. 10 (4)). The electron injection layer 7 is generally made of an electron injection material that is unstable in the atmosphere. In general, the electron injection layer is made of Ba, BaO, LiF, NaF, or the like, and is usually formed in a vacuum atmosphere. Thereafter, the second electrode 5 is patterned (see FIG. 10 (5)). As a result, a light emitting device 2 including three organic EL elements 1 connected in series can be manufactured.
特開2010-183116号公報JP 2010-183116 A
 上述の従来の技術では、不要な部位に塗布されたインキを除去する工程が必要となるため、工程数が増加するという問題がある。さらに不要な部位に塗布されたインキを除去するさいに、発光層に異物が混入するおそれもある。 The above-described conventional technique has a problem that the number of steps increases because a step of removing ink applied to unnecessary portions is required. Further, when removing the ink applied to unnecessary portions, there is a possibility that foreign matters may be mixed into the light emitting layer.
 また一般に電子注入材料は大気雰囲気下で不安定であるため、電子注入層は上述のように真空雰囲気で形成されていた。そこで真空雰囲気を必要としない簡易な工程で形成することができ、かつ電子注入層としても機能するような電子注入材料が求められていた。 In general, since the electron injection material is unstable in the air atmosphere, the electron injection layer is formed in a vacuum atmosphere as described above. Therefore, there has been a demand for an electron injection material that can be formed by a simple process that does not require a vacuum atmosphere and that also functions as an electron injection layer.
 したがって本発明の目的は、発光層を塗布法によって形成するさいに不要な部位に塗布されたインキを除去する工程が不要な構造であって、かつ簡易に形成することが可能な電子注入層を有する複数の有機EL素子を備える発光装置及びその製造方法を提供することにある。 Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide an electron injection layer that has a structure that does not require a step of removing ink applied to unnecessary portions when forming a light emitting layer by a coating method, and can be easily formed. A light emitting device including a plurality of organic EL elements and a method for manufacturing the same.
 本発明の一態様は、支持基板と、所定の配列方向に沿って前記支持基板上に設けられ、直列接続される複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子とを備える発光装置であって、
 各有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子はそれぞれ、一対の電極と、該電極間に設けられる発光層および電子注入層とを備え、
 前記発光層は、前記複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子に跨って、前記所定の配列方向に沿って延在しており、
 前記一対の電極はそれぞれ、前記支持基板の厚み方向一方から見て、前記支持基板の厚み方向および前記配列方向のいずれにも垂直な幅方向に、発光層から突出するように延在する延在部を有し、
 前記一対の電極のうちの一方の電極は、前記配列方向に隣り合う有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子の他方の電極にまで前記延在部から前記配列方向に延在し、該他方の電極に接続される接続部をさらに有し、
 前記電子注入層は、イオン性ポリマーを含む発光装置に関する。
One embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting device including a support substrate and a plurality of organic electroluminescence elements that are provided on the support substrate along a predetermined arrangement direction and connected in series.
Each organic electroluminescence element includes a pair of electrodes, a light emitting layer and an electron injection layer provided between the electrodes,
The light emitting layer extends along the predetermined arrangement direction across the plurality of organic electroluminescence elements,
Each of the pair of electrodes extends so as to protrude from the light emitting layer in a width direction perpendicular to both the thickness direction of the support substrate and the arrangement direction when viewed from one thickness direction of the support substrate. Part
One electrode of the pair of electrodes extends from the extension portion to the other electrode of the organic electroluminescence element adjacent in the arrangement direction, and is connected to the other electrode. Further comprising
The electron injection layer relates to a light emitting device including an ionic polymer.
 また本発明の一態様は、前記電極に接して設けられる補助電極をさらに有し、
 該補助電極は、当該補助電極に接する電極よりもシート抵抗が低い発光装置に関する。
One embodiment of the present invention further includes an auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the electrode,
The auxiliary electrode relates to a light emitting device having a sheet resistance lower than that of an electrode in contact with the auxiliary electrode.
 また本発明の一態様は、前記補助電極は、前記一対の電極のうちでシート抵抗が高い方の電極に接して設けられる発光装置に関する。 Further, one embodiment of the present invention relates to a light emitting device in which the auxiliary electrode is provided in contact with an electrode having a higher sheet resistance among the pair of electrodes.
 また本発明の一態様は、前記一対の電極のうちでシート抵抗が低い方の電極のみが、前記接続部を有する発光装置に関する。 Further, one embodiment of the present invention relates to a light-emitting device in which only the electrode having the lower sheet resistance among the pair of electrodes has the connection portion.
 また本発明の一態様は、前記延在部は、前記厚み方向一方から見て、前記幅方向の一方に発光層から突出するように延在する第1延在部と、前記幅方向の他方に発光層から突出するように延在する第2延在部とを含む発光装置に関する。 Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, the extending portion includes a first extending portion that extends so as to protrude from the light emitting layer in one of the width directions when viewed from one of the thickness directions, and the other in the width direction. And a second extending portion extending so as to protrude from the light emitting layer.
 また本発明の一態様は、支持基板と、所定の配列方向に沿って前記支持基板上に設けられ、直列接続される複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子とを備える発光装置であり、
 各有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子はそれぞれ、一対の電極と、該電極間に設けられる発光層および電子注入層を備え、
 前記発光層は、前記複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子に跨って、前記所定の配列方向に沿って延在しており、
 前記一対の電極はそれぞれ、前記支持基板の厚み方向一方から見て、前記支持基板の厚み方向および前記配列方向に垂直な幅方向に、発光層から突出するように延在する延在部を有し、
 前記一対の電極のうちの一方の電極は、前記配列方向に隣り合う有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子の他方の電極にまで前記延在部から前記配列方向に延在し、該他方の電極に接続される接続部をさらに有する発光装置の製造方法であって、
 前記発光層となる材料を含むインキを、前記所定の配列方向に沿って前記支持基板上に配置された複数の前記電極に跨って連続的に塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより発光層を形成する工程と、
 イオン性ポリマーを含むインキを塗布成膜することによって前記電子注入層を形成する工程と、を含む発光装置の製造方法に関する。
 換言すれば、発光層を形成する工程では、前記発光層となる材料を含むインキを、前記複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子が完成時に配置される領域に跨って前記所定の配列方向に沿って連続的に塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより発光層を形成する。
One embodiment of the present invention is a light-emitting device including a support substrate and a plurality of organic electroluminescence elements that are provided on the support substrate along a predetermined arrangement direction and connected in series.
Each organic electroluminescence element includes a pair of electrodes, a light emitting layer and an electron injection layer provided between the electrodes,
The light emitting layer extends along the predetermined arrangement direction across the plurality of organic electroluminescence elements,
Each of the pair of electrodes has an extending portion that extends from the light emitting layer in the width direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the support substrate and the arrangement direction when viewed from one thickness direction of the support substrate. And
One electrode of the pair of electrodes extends from the extending portion to the other electrode of the organic electroluminescence element adjacent in the arrangement direction and is connected to the other electrode. A method for manufacturing a light emitting device further comprising:
The ink containing the material to be the light emitting layer is continuously applied across the plurality of electrodes arranged on the support substrate along the predetermined arrangement direction, and light is emitted by solidifying the applied coating film. Forming a layer;
And a step of forming the electron injection layer by coating and forming an ink containing an ionic polymer.
In other words, in the step of forming the light emitting layer, the ink containing the material to be the light emitting layer is continuously applied along the predetermined arrangement direction across the region where the plurality of organic electroluminescent elements are arranged when completed. The light emitting layer is formed by solidifying the coated film.
 また本発明の一態様は、前記発光層となる材料を含むインキを塗布する方法が、キャップコート(cap coat)法、スリットコート(slit coat)法、スプレーコート(spray coat)法または印刷法である発光装置の製造方法に関する。 Further, according to one embodiment of the present invention, a method of applying the ink including the material to be the light emitting layer is a cap coat method, a slit coat method, a spray coat method, or a printing method. The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a light emitting device.
 また本発明の一態様は、前記電子注入層を形成する工程では、大気雰囲気下でインキを塗布する発光装置の製造方法に関する。 Further, one embodiment of the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a light-emitting device in which ink is applied in an air atmosphere in the step of forming the electron injection layer.
 本発明によれば、発光層を塗布法によって形成するさいに不要な部位に塗布されたインキを除去する工程が不要な構造であり、かつ簡易に形成することが可能な電子注入層を有する複数の有機EL素子を備える発光装置及びその製造方法を実現することができる。 According to the present invention, a plurality of electron injection layers having a structure that does not require a step of removing ink applied to unnecessary portions when forming a light emitting layer by a coating method and that can be easily formed. A light-emitting device including the organic EL element and a manufacturing method thereof can be realized.
本発明の第1実施形態の発光装置11を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the light-emitting device 11 of 1st Embodiment of this invention. 発光装置11の製造工程を説明するための図である。6 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process of the light emitting device 11. FIG. 発光装置11の製造工程を説明するための図である。6 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process of the light emitting device 11. FIG. 発光装置11の製造工程を説明するための図である。6 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process of the light emitting device 11. FIG. 図5は第2実施形態の発光装置31を模式的に示す図である。FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the light emitting device 31 of the second embodiment. 図6は第3実施形態の発光装置41を模式的に示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 41 according to the third embodiment. 図7は第4実施形態の発光装置51を模式的に示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 51 of the fourth embodiment. 図8は第5実施形態の発光装置61を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a light emitting device 61 according to the fifth embodiment. 図9は複数の有機EL素子1が直列接続された発光装置2を模式的に示す図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 2 in which a plurality of organic EL elements 1 are connected in series. 図10は発光装置2の製造工程を説明するための図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a manufacturing process of the light emitting device 2.
 1)発光装置の構成
 以下、図面を参照して発光装置の構成についてまず説明する。本実施形態の発光装置はたとえば照明装置、液晶表示装置およびスキャナなどの光源に用いられる。図1は本発明の第1実施形態の発光装置11を模式的に示す平面図である。発光装置11は、支持基板12と、支持基板12上に設けられ、直列接続される複数の有機EL素子13とを備える。
1) Configuration of Light Emitting Device First, the configuration of the light emitting device will be described below with reference to the drawings. The light emitting device of this embodiment is used for a light source such as a lighting device, a liquid crystal display device, and a scanner. FIG. 1 is a plan view schematically showing a light emitting device 11 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. The light emitting device 11 includes a support substrate 12 and a plurality of organic EL elements 13 provided on the support substrate 12 and connected in series.
 所定の配列方向Xは支持基板12の厚み方向Zに垂直な方向に設定される。すなわち配列方向Xは支持基板12の主面に平行に設定される。本実施形態では図1に示すように複数の有機EL素子13は所定の直線に沿って配列しているが、所定の曲線に沿って配列されていてもよい。なお所定の曲線に沿って複数の有機EL素子13が配列されている場合、配列方向Xは前記所定の曲線の接線方向に相当する。 The predetermined arrangement direction X is set in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction Z of the support substrate 12. That is, the arrangement direction X is set parallel to the main surface of the support substrate 12. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged along a predetermined straight line, but may be arranged along a predetermined curve. When a plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged along a predetermined curve, the arrangement direction X corresponds to the tangential direction of the predetermined curve.
 支持基板12上に設けられる有機EL素子13の個数は設計に応じて適宜設定される。以下第1実施形態では3個の有機EL素子13が設けられた発光装置11について説明する。 The number of organic EL elements 13 provided on the support substrate 12 is appropriately set according to the design. In the first embodiment, a light emitting device 11 provided with three organic EL elements 13 will be described below.
 各有機EL素子13はそれぞれ一対の電極14,15と、該電極14,15間に設けられる発光層16および電子注入層20とを備える。 Each organic EL element 13 includes a pair of electrodes 14 and 15, and a light emitting layer 16 and an electron injection layer 20 provided between the electrodes 14 and 15.
 一対の電極14,15のうちのいずれか一方の電極が有機EL素子13の陽極として機能し、いずれか他方の電極が有機EL素子13の陰極として機能する。以下一対の電極14,15のうちで支持基板12寄りに配置される電極を第1電極14と記載し、支持基板12から離間して配置される他方の電極を第2電極15と記載する。以下では一例として第1電極14が陽極として機能し、第2電極15が陰極として機能する有機EL素子について説明する。 Any one of the pair of electrodes 14 and 15 functions as an anode of the organic EL element 13, and the other electrode functions as a cathode of the organic EL element 13. Hereinafter, of the pair of electrodes 14 and 15, an electrode disposed near the support substrate 12 is referred to as a first electrode 14, and the other electrode disposed apart from the support substrate 12 is referred to as a second electrode 15. Hereinafter, as an example, an organic EL element in which the first electrode 14 functions as an anode and the second electrode 15 functions as a cathode will be described.
 電子注入層20は、一対の電極14,15のうちで陰極として機能する電極と、発光層16との間に設けられる。この電子注入層20は陰極に接する位置に配置されることが好ましい。上述したように本実施形態では第1電極14が陽極として機能し、第2電極15が陰極として機能するため、有機EL素子は、第1電極14、発光層20、電子注入層16、第2電極15がこの順で積層されて構成される。なお他の実施形態として第1電極14が陰極として機能し、第2電極15が陽極として機能する場合には、有機EL素子は、第1電極、電子注入層、発光層、第2電極が支持基板側からこの順で積層されて構成される。 The electron injection layer 20 is provided between the light emitting layer 16 and the electrode functioning as the cathode of the pair of electrodes 14 and 15. The electron injection layer 20 is preferably disposed at a position in contact with the cathode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first electrode 14 functions as an anode and the second electrode 15 functions as a cathode. Therefore, the organic EL element includes the first electrode 14, the light emitting layer 20, the electron injection layer 16, the second electrode. The electrodes 15 are stacked in this order. As another embodiment, when the first electrode 14 functions as a cathode and the second electrode 15 functions as an anode, the organic EL element is supported by the first electrode, the electron injection layer, the light emitting layer, and the second electrode. The layers are stacked in this order from the substrate side.
 なお第1および第2電極14,15間には、発光層16および電子注入層20以外の所定の層が必要に応じてさらに設けられることもある。 A predetermined layer other than the light emitting layer 16 and the electron injection layer 20 may be further provided between the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 as necessary.
 発光層16は複数の有機EL素子13に跨って配列方向Xに沿って延在しており、複数の有機EL素子13が一つの発光層16を共有している。つまり本実施形態では、直列接続される複数の有機EL素子13において、配列方向Xの一端(図1では左端)に設けられる有機EL素子13の発光層16から、配列方向Xの他端(図1では右端)に設けられる有機EL素子13の発光層16まで、配列方向Xに沿って延在する発光層が連続して一体的に形成されている。 The light emitting layer 16 extends along the arrangement direction X across the plurality of organic EL elements 13, and the plurality of organic EL elements 13 share one light emitting layer 16. That is, in this embodiment, in the plurality of organic EL elements 13 connected in series, from the light emitting layer 16 of the organic EL element 13 provided at one end in the arrangement direction X (left end in FIG. 1), the other end in the arrangement direction X (see FIG. The light emitting layer extending along the arrangement direction X is continuously and integrally formed up to the light emitting layer 16 of the organic EL element 13 provided at the right end in FIG.
 電子注入層20は発光層16と同様に、複数の有機EL素子13に跨って配列方向Xに沿って延在していることが好ましい。後述するように塗布法で電子注入層を形成する場合に、不要な部位に形成された電子注入層を除去する工程が省略できるためである。 The electron injection layer 20 preferably extends along the arrangement direction X across the plurality of organic EL elements 13, similarly to the light emitting layer 16. This is because, as will be described later, when the electron injection layer is formed by a coating method, a step of removing the electron injection layer formed at an unnecessary portion can be omitted.
 電子注入層20が発光層16を覆うように形成されていると、第1電極と第2電極とが電子注入層20のみを介して接続される部位が生じる。このような構成では、仮に電子注入層20が導電性を示す場合、第1電極と第2電極とが電気的に導通することがあるため、電子注入層20が導電性を示す場合には、電子注入層20は、平面視で発光層16よりも内側に形成されることが好ましい。このように電子注入層20を形成すると、第1電極と第2電極とが電子注入層20のみを介して接続される部位が生じず、第1電極と第2電極との間には導電性の低い発光層が必然的に介在するため、第1電極および第2電極間にリーク電流が生じることを防ぐことができる。 When the electron injection layer 20 is formed so as to cover the light emitting layer 16, a site where the first electrode and the second electrode are connected only through the electron injection layer 20 is generated. In such a configuration, if the electron injection layer 20 exhibits conductivity, the first electrode and the second electrode may be electrically connected. Therefore, when the electron injection layer 20 exhibits conductivity, The electron injection layer 20 is preferably formed inside the light emitting layer 16 in plan view. When the electron injection layer 20 is formed in this way, a portion where the first electrode and the second electrode are connected only through the electron injection layer 20 does not occur, and there is no conductivity between the first electrode and the second electrode. Since a light emitting layer having a low thickness inevitably intervenes, leakage current can be prevented from occurring between the first electrode and the second electrode.
 発光層および電子注入層とは異なる所定の層が第1および第2電極14,15間に設けられていてもよい。この所定の層は、複数の有機EL素子13に跨って配列方向Xに沿って延在していてもよい。また上記所定の層は有機EL素子13ごとに離間するように形成されていてもよい。なお発光層16および電子注入層20とは異なる所定の層が塗布法によって形成される場合には、この所定の層は、発光層16と同様に、複数の有機EL素子13に跨って配列方向Xに沿って延在していることが好ましい。後述するように不要な部位に形成された層を除去する工程が省略できるためである。 A predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer and the electron injection layer may be provided between the first and second electrodes 14 and 15. The predetermined layer may extend along the arrangement direction X across the plurality of organic EL elements 13. Further, the predetermined layer may be formed so as to be separated for each organic EL element 13. In the case where a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer 16 and the electron injection layer 20 is formed by a coating method, the predetermined layer is arranged in the arrangement direction across the plurality of organic EL elements 13 like the light emitting layer 16. It preferably extends along X. This is because a step of removing a layer formed at an unnecessary portion can be omitted as will be described later.
 第1および第2電極14,15(一対の電極)はそれぞれ延在部17,18を有する。この延在部17,18は、支持基板12の厚み方向Zの一方から見て(以下、「平面視で」ということがある。)、幅方向Yに、発光層16から突出するように延在する。幅方向Yとは、前記支持基板の厚み方向Zおよび前記配列方向Xに垂直な方向である。第1電極14の延在部17は第1電極14と一体的に形成されている。また第2電極15の延在部18は第2電極15と一体的に形成されている。各有機EL素子13を構成する第1電極14と第2電極15(一対の電極)とは、有機EL素子13ごとには互いに接触していない。また各有機EL素子13においては、平面視で第1電極14の延在部17と第2電極15の延在部18とは重ならないように配置されている。本実施形態では第1電極14の延在部17は、第1電極14において、第2電極15と対向する部分の左方の端部(以下、左端部ということがある)から幅方向Yに延在する。第2電極15の延在部18は、第2電極15において、第1電極14との対向部の右方の端部(以下、右端部ということがある)から幅方向Yに延在している。そのため第1電極14の延在部17と第2電極15の延在部18とは平面視で重ならず、電気的に絶縁されている。 The first and second electrodes 14 and 15 (a pair of electrodes) have extending portions 17 and 18, respectively. The extending portions 17 and 18 extend so as to protrude from the light emitting layer 16 in the width direction Y when viewed from one side in the thickness direction Z of the support substrate 12 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “in plan view”). Exists. The width direction Y is a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction Z of the support substrate and the arrangement direction X. The extending portion 17 of the first electrode 14 is formed integrally with the first electrode 14. The extending portion 18 of the second electrode 15 is formed integrally with the second electrode 15. The first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 (a pair of electrodes) constituting each organic EL element 13 are not in contact with each other for each organic EL element 13. Moreover, in each organic EL element 13, it arrange | positions so that the extension part 17 of the 1st electrode 14 and the extension part 18 of the 2nd electrode 15 may not overlap by planar view. In the present embodiment, the extending portion 17 of the first electrode 14 extends in the width direction Y from the left end portion (hereinafter also referred to as the left end portion) of the portion facing the second electrode 15 in the first electrode 14. Extend. The extending portion 18 of the second electrode 15 extends in the width direction Y from the right end portion (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the right end portion) of the second electrode 15 facing the first electrode 14. Yes. Therefore, the extending portion 17 of the first electrode 14 and the extending portion 18 of the second electrode 15 do not overlap in plan view but are electrically insulated.
 第1および第2電極14,15(一対の電極)の一方の電極は接続部を有する。この接続部は、延在部から、配列方向Xに隣り合う有機EL素子の他方の電極にまで、配列方向Xに延在し、該他方の電極に接続される。なお第1および第2電極14,15のうち一方の電極のみならず他方の電極も接続部を有していてもよい。すなわち、一対の電極のうちの他方の電極も、その延在部から、配列方向Xに隣り合う有機EL素子の一方の電極にまで、配列方向Xに延在し、該一方の電極に接続される接続部を有していてもよい。 One electrode of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 (a pair of electrodes) has a connection portion. The connecting portion extends in the arrangement direction X from the extending portion to the other electrode of the organic EL element adjacent in the arrangement direction X, and is connected to the other electrode. Note that not only one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 but also the other electrode may have a connecting portion. That is, the other electrode of the pair of electrodes also extends in the arrangement direction X from the extension portion to one electrode of the organic EL element adjacent in the arrangement direction X, and is connected to the one electrode. You may have a connection part.
 本実施形態では第1および第2電極14,15(一対の電極)の一方の電極に相当する第1電極14が接続部19を有する。すなわち第1電極14は、第1電極14の延在部17から、左方に配置される有機EL素子の第2電極15(他方の電極)の延在部18にまで、左方に延在する接続部19を備える。このように第1電極14の接続部19は、左方に配置される有機EL素子の第2電極15(他方の電極)の延在部18と平面視で重なり、この重なる部分で直接的に第2電極15(他方の電極)と接続される。 In the present embodiment, the first electrode 14 corresponding to one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 (a pair of electrodes) has a connection portion 19. That is, the first electrode 14 extends to the left from the extending portion 17 of the first electrode 14 to the extending portion 18 of the second electrode 15 (the other electrode) of the organic EL element disposed on the left. Connecting portion 19 is provided. As described above, the connection portion 19 of the first electrode 14 overlaps with the extension portion 18 of the second electrode 15 (the other electrode) of the organic EL element disposed on the left side in a plan view, and directly at the overlapping portion. It is connected to the second electrode 15 (the other electrode).
 平面視において発光層16から幅方向Yに延在する延在部18は、幅方向Yの一方または他方に設けられるが、幅方向Yの両方に設けられることが好ましい。すなわち延在部17,18は、平面視で、前記幅方向の一方に発光層から突出するように延在する第1延在部17a,18aと、幅方向Yの他方に発光層16から突出するように延在する第2延在部17b,18bと、を含むことが好ましい。このように平面視において発光層16から幅方向Yの両方に延在する延在部17,18を備えることにより、隣り合う有機EL素子13の第1電極14と第2電極15とが幅方向Yの両方の端部で接続されることになる。 The extending portion 18 extending in the width direction Y from the light emitting layer 16 in plan view is provided in one or the other of the width directions Y, but is preferably provided in both the width directions Y. That is, the extended portions 17 and 18 protrude from the light emitting layer 16 in the width direction Y and the first extending portions 17a and 18a extending so as to protrude from the light emitting layer in one of the width directions in a plan view. It is preferable to include the second extending portions 17b and 18b extending so as to. Thus, by providing the extension parts 17 and 18 extended in both the width directions Y from the light emitting layer 16 in planar view, the 1st electrode 14 and the 2nd electrode 15 of the adjacent organic EL element 13 are width direction. It will be connected at both ends of Y.
 さらに直列接続を構成する複数の有機EL素子13のうちで、最も左方に配置される有機EL素子13の第1電極14と、最も右方に配置される有機EL素子13の第2電極とは、電力供給部(不図示)に電気的につながる配線にそれぞれ接続される。これによって電力供給部から、直列接続を構成する複数の有機EL素子13に電力が供給され、各有機EL素子が発光する。 Further, among the plurality of organic EL elements 13 constituting the series connection, the first electrode 14 of the organic EL element 13 arranged on the leftmost side and the second electrode of the organic EL element 13 arranged on the rightmost side Are respectively connected to wirings electrically connected to a power supply unit (not shown). As a result, power is supplied from the power supply unit to the plurality of organic EL elements 13 constituting the series connection, and each organic EL element emits light.
 各有機EL素子13は接続部から給電される。本実施形態では平面視で発光層16から幅方向Yの両方に延在する延在部17,18を備えることにより、各有機EL素子13は幅方向Yの両方の端部から給電される。有機EL素子13は、給電される部位から離間するほど、電圧降下のために輝度が低下する。本実施形態では延在部17,18から幅方向Yに離間するほど、すなわち幅方向Yの中央部ほど電圧低下のために輝度が低下するが、各有機EL素子13は幅方向Yの両方の端部から給電されるため、幅方向Yの一方の端部から給電される素子構成に比べると電圧降下の影響を抑制することができ、ひいては輝度ムラ(斑)を抑制することができる。 Each organic EL element 13 is supplied with power from the connecting portion. In the present embodiment, the organic EL elements 13 are supplied with power from both ends in the width direction Y by providing the extending portions 17 and 18 extending in the width direction Y from the light emitting layer 16 in plan view. As the organic EL element 13 is further away from the site to be fed, the luminance decreases due to a voltage drop. In this embodiment, as the distance from the extending portions 17 and 18 in the width direction Y, that is, in the center portion in the width direction Y, the luminance decreases due to the voltage drop. Since power is supplied from the end portion, the influence of the voltage drop can be suppressed as compared with the element configuration that is supplied from one end portion in the width direction Y, and thus luminance unevenness (spots) can be suppressed.
 2)発光装置の製造方法
 本実施形態の発光装置の製造方法は、支持基板と、所定の配列方向に沿って前記支持基板上に設けられ、直列接続される複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子とを備える発光装置であり、各有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子はそれぞれ、一対の電極と、該電極間に設けられる発光層および電子注入層を備え、前記発光層は、前記複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子に跨って、前記所定の配列方向に沿って延在しており、前記一対の電極はそれぞれ、前記支持基板の厚み方向一方から見て、前記支持基板の厚み方向および前記配列方向に垂直な幅方向に、発光層から突出するように延在する延在部を有し、前記一対の電極のうちの一方の電極は、前記配列方向に隣り合う有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子の他方の電極にまで前記延在部から前記配列方向に延在し、該他方の電極に接続される接続部をさらに有する発光装置の製造方法であって、前記発光層となる材料を含むインキを、前記所定の配列方向に沿って前記支持基板上に配置された複数の前記電極に跨って連続的に塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより発光層を形成する工程と、イオン性ポリマーを含むインキを塗布成膜することによって前記電子注入層を形成する工程と、を含む。
2) Method for Manufacturing Light-Emitting Device The method for manufacturing a light-emitting device according to the present embodiment includes a support substrate and a plurality of organic electroluminescent elements provided on the support substrate along a predetermined arrangement direction and connected in series. Each organic electroluminescence element includes a pair of electrodes, a light emitting layer and an electron injection layer provided between the electrodes, and the light emitting layer spans the plurality of organic electroluminescence elements, Each of the pair of electrodes extends along a predetermined arrangement direction, and each of the pair of electrodes has a light emitting layer in a thickness direction of the support substrate and a width direction perpendicular to the arrangement direction when viewed from one thickness direction of the support substrate. An organic electroluminescence element having an extending portion extending so as to protrude from the first electrode, wherein one of the pair of electrodes is adjacent to the arrangement direction A method of manufacturing a light emitting device further including a connecting portion that extends in the arrangement direction from the extending portion to the other electrode and is connected to the other electrode, the ink including a material that becomes the light emitting layer A step of forming a light emitting layer by solidly applying the applied coating across the plurality of electrodes arranged on the support substrate along the predetermined arrangement direction, and solidifying the applied coating; Forming the electron injection layer by coating and forming an ink containing a polymer.
 以下図2~図4を参照して発光装置を製造する方法を説明する。 Hereinafter, a method for manufacturing a light emitting device will be described with reference to FIGS.
 まず支持基板12を用意する。本工程では有機EL素子13を駆動する駆動回路(不図示)が予め形成されている支持基板12を用意してもよい。 First, the support substrate 12 is prepared. In this step, a support substrate 12 on which a drive circuit (not shown) for driving the organic EL element 13 is formed in advance may be prepared.
 つぎに支持基板12上に第1電極14をパターン形成する(図2参照)。たとえばスパッタリング法または蒸着法によって、導電体膜を支持基板12上に成膜し、つぎにフォトリソグラフィによって導電体膜を所定の形状にパターニングすることによって、第1電極14をパターン形成する。なおフォトリソグラフィ工程を行うことなく、マスク蒸着法などによって所定の部位にのみ第1電極14をパターン形成してもよい。また塗布法により導電性材料を含むインキを塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより第1電極14を形成しても良い。また、ラミネート法により導電性薄膜を転写することにより第1電極14を形成してもよい。さらには、第1電極14があらかじめ形成された支持基板12を用意してもよい。 Next, the first electrode 14 is patterned on the support substrate 12 (see FIG. 2). For example, a conductive film is formed on the support substrate 12 by sputtering or vapor deposition, and then the first electrode 14 is patterned by patterning the conductive film into a predetermined shape by photolithography. Note that the first electrode 14 may be pattern-formed only at a predetermined portion by a mask vapor deposition method or the like without performing a photolithography process. Moreover, you may form the 1st electrode 14 by apply | coating the ink containing an electroconductive material with the apply | coating method, and solidifying the apply | coated coating film. Alternatively, the first electrode 14 may be formed by transferring a conductive thin film by a laminating method. Furthermore, you may prepare the support substrate 12 in which the 1st electrode 14 was formed previously.
 つぎに支持基板12上に発光層16を形成する(図3参照)。たとえば発光層16となる材料を含むインキを、所定の配列方向に沿って支持基板12上に配置された複数の第1電極14に跨って連続的に塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化する。つまり、発光層16となる材料を含むインキを、複数の有機EL素子13が完成時に配置される領域に跨って配列方向Xに沿って連続的に塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより発光層16を形成することができる。 Next, the light emitting layer 16 is formed on the support substrate 12 (see FIG. 3). For example, ink containing a material that becomes the light emitting layer 16 is continuously applied across the plurality of first electrodes 14 arranged on the support substrate 12 along a predetermined arrangement direction, and the applied coating film is solidified. That is, by applying the ink including the material to be the light emitting layer 16 continuously along the arrangement direction X across the region where the plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged when completed, and solidifying the applied coating film The light emitting layer 16 can be formed.
 塗膜の固化は、自然乾燥、加熱乾燥、真空乾燥などによっておこなうことができる。またエネルギーを加えることによって重合する材料を塗膜が含む場合には、加熱、または光照射によって塗膜を固化することができる。 Coating film can be solidified by natural drying, heat drying, vacuum drying, or the like. Moreover, when a coating film contains the material polymerized by applying energy, the coating film can be solidified by heating or light irradiation.
 つぎに支持基板12上に電子注入層20を形成する(図4参照)。たとえばイオン性ポリマーを含むインキを、配列方向Xに沿って発光層16上に連続的に塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより電子注入層20を形成することができる。つまり、イオン性ポリマーを含むインキを、複数の有機EL素子13が配置される領域に跨って配列方向Xに沿って連続的に塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより電子注入層20を形成することができる。イオン性ポリマーは大気中において比較的安定であってかつ陰極からの電子注入を容易にすることができる。本発明に適用することができるイオン性ポリマーの詳細については後述する。 Next, the electron injection layer 20 is formed on the support substrate 12 (see FIG. 4). For example, the electron injection layer 20 can be formed by continuously applying an ink containing an ionic polymer along the arrangement direction X onto the light emitting layer 16 and solidifying the applied coating film. That is, the ink containing the ionic polymer is continuously applied along the arrangement direction X across the region where the plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged, and the applied coating film is solidified to solidify the electron injection layer 20. Can be formed. Ionic polymers are relatively stable in the atmosphere and can facilitate electron injection from the cathode. Details of the ionic polymer that can be applied to the present invention will be described later.
 塗膜の固化は、自然乾燥、加熱乾燥、真空乾燥などによっておこなうことができる。またエネルギーを加えることによって重合する材料を塗膜が含む場合には、加熱、または光照射によって塗膜を固化することができる。 Coating film can be solidified by natural drying, heat drying, vacuum drying, or the like. Moreover, when a coating film contains the material polymerized by applying energy, the coating film can be solidified by heating or light irradiation.
 イオン性ポリマーは大気中において比較的安定であるため、大気雰囲気下でインキを塗布することができる。このように、従来の技術のようには真空雰囲気を導入する必要がないため、従来の技術とくらべると、電子注入層を形成する工程を簡易にすることができる。またさらに、塗布したと膜を固化する工程も、大気雰囲気下でおこなうことが好ましい。 Since the ionic polymer is relatively stable in the air, the ink can be applied in an air atmosphere. Thus, since it is not necessary to introduce a vacuum atmosphere as in the conventional technique, the step of forming the electron injection layer can be simplified as compared with the conventional technique. Furthermore, the step of solidifying the film when applied is also preferably performed in an air atmosphere.
 なお前述したように、電子注入層20が導電性を示す場合には、電子注入層20は、平面視で発光層16の内側に形成することが好ましい。 As described above, when the electron injection layer 20 exhibits conductivity, the electron injection layer 20 is preferably formed inside the light emitting layer 16 in plan view.
 つぎに支持基板12上に第2電極15を形成する。第2電極15の成膜方法としては蒸着法があげられ、たとえばメタルマスクなどを用いることにより第2電極15をパターン形成することができる。また前記イオン性ポリマーを含む電子注入層20は大気雰囲気下で安定なため、大気雰囲気下で、塗布法やラミネート法を用いて第2電極15を形成することもできる。第2電極15を塗布法で形成する場合、導電性材料を含むインキを所定の塗布方法で塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより第2電極14を形成する。ラミネート法では導電性薄膜を転写することにより第2電極14を形成する。 Next, the second electrode 15 is formed on the support substrate 12. The film formation method of the second electrode 15 includes a vapor deposition method. For example, the second electrode 15 can be patterned by using a metal mask or the like. In addition, since the electron injection layer 20 containing the ionic polymer is stable in the air atmosphere, the second electrode 15 can be formed using a coating method or a laminating method in the air atmosphere. When the second electrode 15 is formed by a coating method, the second electrode 14 is formed by applying ink containing a conductive material by a predetermined coating method and solidifying the coated film. In the laminating method, the second electrode 14 is formed by transferring a conductive thin film.
 なお前述したように第1および第2電極14,15間には発光層16および電子注入層20とは異なる所定の層を設けることがある。この所定の層を、発光層の場合と同様に塗布法によって形成することが好ましい。すなわち、発光層および電子注入層とは異なる所定の層となる材料を含むインキを、複数の有機EL素子13が完成時に配置される領域に跨って配列方向Xに沿って連続的に塗布する。この塗布した塗膜を固化することにより、上記所定の層を形成することが好ましい。なお発光層および電子注入層とは異なる所定の層を蒸着法などの乾式法で形成する場合には、この所定の層を第1電極14上にのみ選択的に形成してもよい。 As described above, a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer 16 and the electron injection layer 20 may be provided between the first and second electrodes 14 and 15. The predetermined layer is preferably formed by a coating method as in the case of the light emitting layer. That is, an ink containing a material that becomes a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer and the electron injection layer is continuously applied along the arrangement direction X across a region where the plurality of organic EL elements 13 are arranged at the time of completion. The predetermined layer is preferably formed by solidifying the coated film. When a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer and the electron injection layer is formed by a dry method such as vapor deposition, the predetermined layer may be selectively formed only on the first electrode 14.
 インキを塗布する方法としては、キャップコート法、スリットコート法、スプレーコート法、印刷法、インクジェット法、ノズルプリンティング法などをあげることができ、これらのなかでも大面積を効率的に塗布することが可能なキャップコート法、スリットコート法、スプレーコート法および印刷法が好ましい。 Examples of the ink application method include a cap coating method, a slit coating method, a spray coating method, a printing method, an ink jet method, and a nozzle printing method. Among these methods, a large area can be efficiently applied. Possible cap coating methods, slit coating methods, spray coating methods and printing methods are preferred.
 以上説明した発光装置11では、平面視で発光層16が形成される領域から幅方向Yに突出した領域において、隣り合う有機EL素子13の第1電極14と第2電極15とが接続されることにより、隣り合う有機EL素子13が直列接続される。したがって、隣り合う有機EL素子13の第1電極14と第2電極15とを有機EL素子13間の領域において接続する必要がない。そのため隣り合う有機EL素子13間の領域に発光層などが形成されていてもよく、これによって塗布法で発光層を形成するさいに、隣り合う有機EL素子13間の領域に形成される発光層を除去する工程を省略することができる。したがって微細なパターン塗布が比較的不得手なキャップコート法などの塗布法であっても、直列接続される複数の有機EL素子13を簡便に作製することができる。 In the light emitting device 11 described above, the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 of the adjacent organic EL elements 13 are connected in the region protruding in the width direction Y from the region where the light emitting layer 16 is formed in plan view. Thereby, the adjacent organic EL elements 13 are connected in series. Therefore, it is not necessary to connect the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 of the adjacent organic EL elements 13 in the region between the organic EL elements 13. For this reason, a light emitting layer or the like may be formed in a region between adjacent organic EL elements 13, whereby a light emitting layer formed in a region between adjacent organic EL elements 13 when forming a light emitting layer by a coating method. The step of removing can be omitted. Therefore, even if it is a coating method such as a cap coat method that is relatively poor at applying a fine pattern, a plurality of organic EL elements 13 connected in series can be easily produced.
 また上記理由と同様の理由から、イオン性ポリマーを用いて簡易に電子注入層を形成することができる。 Also, for the same reason as described above, an electron injection layer can be easily formed using an ionic polymer.
 また前述したようにイオン性ポリマーは大気中で比較的安定なため、電子注入層を大気雰囲気下で塗布成膜することができる。 Further, as described above, since the ionic polymer is relatively stable in the air, the electron injection layer can be applied and formed in an air atmosphere.
 図5は本発明の第2実施形態の発光装置31を模式的に示す図である。本実施形態の発光装置31は、前述の第1実施形態の発光装置11とは第1電極14および第2電極15の形状のみが異なる。以下では、第2実施形態の第1電極14および第2電極15についてのみ説明する。第2実施形態のうち第1実施形態と対応する部分については同一の参照符号を付して、重複する説明を省略する。 FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 31 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The light emitting device 31 of this embodiment is different from the light emitting device 11 of the first embodiment described above only in the shapes of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15. Hereinafter, only the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, portions corresponding to those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description is omitted.
 本実施形態では第1電極14に加えて、第2電極15も接続部32を有する。すなわち第2電極15は、配列方向Xに隣り合う有機EL素子の第1電極14にまで延在部から配列方向Xに延在し、該第1電極14に接続される接続部32を有する。配列方向Xに隣り合う一対の有機EL素子13において、右方に配置される有機EL素子13の第1電極14の接続部19が、第1電極14の延在部17から左方に延在する。左方に配置される有機EL素子13の第2電極15の接続部32が、第2電極15の延在部18から右方に延在する。これら第1電極14の接続部19と、第2電極15の接続部32とが重なることによって、隣り合う一対の有機EL素子13の第1電極14と第2電極15とが接続される。 In this embodiment, in addition to the first electrode 14, the second electrode 15 also has a connection portion 32. That is, the second electrode 15 has a connecting portion 32 that extends from the extending portion to the first electrode 14 of the organic EL element adjacent in the arranging direction X in the arranging direction X and is connected to the first electrode 14. In the pair of organic EL elements 13 adjacent to each other in the arrangement direction X, the connection part 19 of the first electrode 14 of the organic EL element 13 arranged on the right side extends from the extension part 17 of the first electrode 14 to the left side. To do. The connection part 32 of the second electrode 15 of the organic EL element 13 arranged on the left side extends from the extension part 18 of the second electrode 15 to the right side. The connection part 19 of these 1st electrodes 14 and the connection part 32 of the 2nd electrode 15 overlap, and the 1st electrode 14 and 2nd electrode 15 of a pair of adjacent organic EL element 13 are connected.
 図6は本発明の第3実施形態の発光装置41を模式的に示す図である。本実施形態の発光装置41は前述の第1実施形態の発光装置11とは第1電極14および第2電極15の形状のみが異なる。以下では、第3実施形態の第1電極14および第2電極15についてのみ説明する。第3実施形態のうち第1実施形態と対応する部分については同一の参照符号を付して、重複する説明を省略する。 FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 41 according to a third embodiment of the present invention. The light emitting device 41 of this embodiment differs from the light emitting device 11 of the first embodiment described above only in the shapes of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15. Hereinafter, only the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, portions corresponding to those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description is omitted.
 本実施形態では第1電極14が接続部19を有さず、逆に第2電極15が接続部42を有する。すなわち第2電極15は、その延在部から、配列方向Xに隣り合う有機EL素子の第1電極14にまで、配列方向Xに延在し、該第1電極15に接続される接続部42を有する。 In the present embodiment, the first electrode 14 does not have the connection portion 19, and conversely, the second electrode 15 has the connection portion 42. That is, the second electrode 15 extends in the arrangement direction X from the extension portion to the first electrode 14 of the organic EL element adjacent in the arrangement direction X, and is connected to the first electrode 15. Have
 図1に示す第1実施形態の発光装置11では、第1電極14のみが接続部19を有し、逆に図6に示す第3実施形態の発光装置41では、第2電極15のみが接続部42を有する。第1および第2電極14,15のうちのいずれか一方のみが接続部を有する場合、いずれの電極が接続部を有するかは設計に応じて適宜選択すればよい。なお、第1および第2電極14,15(一対の電極)のうちでシート抵抗が低い方の電極のみが接続部を有することが好ましい。すなわち第2電極15のシート抵抗よりも第1電極14のシート抵抗が低い場合、図1に示す第1実施形態の発光装置11のように第1電極14のみが接続部19を有することが好ましい。逆に第1電極14のシート抵抗よりも第2電極15のシート抵抗が低い場合、図7に示す第3実施形態の発光装置41のように第2電極15のみが接続部42を有することが好ましい。 In the light emitting device 11 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1, only the first electrode 14 has the connection portion 19. Conversely, in the light emitting device 41 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 6, only the second electrode 15 is connected. Part 42. In the case where only one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 has a connection portion, which electrode has a connection portion may be appropriately selected according to the design. Of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 (a pair of electrodes), it is preferable that only the electrode having the lower sheet resistance has a connection portion. That is, when the sheet resistance of the first electrode 14 is lower than the sheet resistance of the second electrode 15, it is preferable that only the first electrode 14 has the connection portion 19 as in the light emitting device 11 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1. . Conversely, when the sheet resistance of the second electrode 15 is lower than the sheet resistance of the first electrode 14, only the second electrode 15 may have the connection portion 42 as in the light emitting device 41 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 7. preferable.
 第1および第2電極14,15のうちのいずれか一方は、発光層16から放射される光を外に出射するために光透過性を示す部材によって構成される。光透過性を示す部材は一般に、不透光性を示す導電性部材にくらべてシート抵抗が高い。そのため第1および第2電極14,15のうちの光透過性を示す一方の電極の方が通常はシート抵抗が高い。したがって光透過性を示す一方の電極ではない他方の電極のみが接続部を有することが通常は好ましい。 Any one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 is configured by a member that exhibits light transmittance in order to emit light emitted from the light emitting layer 16 to the outside. In general, a member exhibiting light transmittance has a higher sheet resistance than a conductive member exhibiting opaqueness. For this reason, one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 that exhibits optical transparency usually has a higher sheet resistance. Therefore, it is usually preferable that only the other electrode, which is not one electrode exhibiting optical transparency, has a connection portion.
 発光装置を駆動するさいには導電体によって構成される接続部にも電圧降下が発生するが、シート抵抗が低い部材によって構成される電極にのみ接続部を設けることによって、接続部で発生する電圧降下を抑制することができ、ひいては消費電力を低減することができる。 When driving the light-emitting device, a voltage drop also occurs in the connection part constituted by the conductor, but by providing the connection part only on the electrode constituted by a member having a low sheet resistance, the voltage generated in the connection part Lowering can be suppressed, and as a result, power consumption can be reduced.
 図7は本発明の第4実施形態の発光装置51を模式的に示す図である。本実施形態の発光装置51は、電極に接して設けられる補助電極をさらに有する。本実施形態の発光装置51は前述の各実施形態の発光装置とは補助電極の有無のみが異なる。以下では、第4実施形態の補助電極についてのみ説明する。第4実施形態のうち前述した各実施形態と対応する部分については同一の参照符号を付して、重複する説明を省略する。図7では補助電極を示す領域にハッチングを施している。 FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a light emitting device 51 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. The light emitting device 51 of the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the electrode. The light emitting device 51 of this embodiment differs from the light emitting devices of the above-described embodiments only in the presence or absence of an auxiliary electrode. Below, only the auxiliary electrode of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. In the fourth embodiment, portions corresponding to those of the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description is omitted. In FIG. 7, the region indicating the auxiliary electrode is hatched.
 補助電極は第1電極14および第2電極15(一対の電極)のうちの少なくとも一方の電極に接して設けられる。たとえば第1電極14と第2電極15とに補助電極が接して設けられる場合には、第1電極14に接して設けられる補助電極と、第2電極15に接して設けられる補助電極との2つの補助電極が設けられる。 The auxiliary electrode is provided in contact with at least one of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 (a pair of electrodes). For example, when the auxiliary electrode is provided in contact with the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15, two of the auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the first electrode 14 and the auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the second electrode 15. Two auxiliary electrodes are provided.
 補助電極は、当該補助電極に接する電極よりもシート抵抗が低い部材によって構成される。補助電極52は、第1電極14および第2電極15(一対の電極)のうちでシート抵抗が高い方の電極に接して設けられることが好ましい。前述したように第1および第2電極14,15のうちのいずれか一方は、発光層16から放射される光を外に出射するために光透過性を示す部材によって構成される。そして光透過性を示す一方の電極の方が他方の電極よりも通常はシート抵抗が高い。そのため通常は第1および第2電極14,15のうちの光透過性を示す電極に補助電極52が接して設けられることが好ましい。図8に示す本実施の形態の発光装置51では、光透過性を示す電極として設けられる第1電極14に接して補助電極52が設けられる。 The auxiliary electrode is composed of a member having a sheet resistance lower than that of the electrode in contact with the auxiliary electrode. The auxiliary electrode 52 is preferably provided in contact with the electrode having the higher sheet resistance among the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 (a pair of electrodes). As described above, any one of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 is configured by a member that exhibits light transmittance in order to emit light emitted from the light emitting layer 16 to the outside. One electrode exhibiting light transmittance usually has a higher sheet resistance than the other electrode. Therefore, it is usually preferable that the auxiliary electrode 52 is provided in contact with the light transmissive electrode of the first and second electrodes 14 and 15. In the light emitting device 51 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the auxiliary electrode 52 is provided in contact with the first electrode 14 provided as an electrode exhibiting light transmittance.
 補助電極52は当該補助電極52が接する電極よりもシート抵抗が低いため、通常は不透明である。光が透過する方の電極に不透明な補助電極52を接して設ける場合、この補助電極52が光を遮ることがある。そのため補助電極52は平面視で、発光層16が原理的に発光しない領域に設けられることが好ましい。 The auxiliary electrode 52 is usually opaque because the sheet resistance is lower than the electrode with which the auxiliary electrode 52 is in contact. When the opaque auxiliary electrode 52 is provided in contact with the electrode through which light is transmitted, the auxiliary electrode 52 may block the light. Therefore, the auxiliary electrode 52 is preferably provided in a region where the light emitting layer 16 does not emit light in principle in a plan view.
 発光層16は、平面視で第1電極14と第2電極15とが対向する領域(以下、対向領域ということがある。)で原理的に発光可能である。そのため原理的に発光しない領域とは、平面視で第1電極14と第2電極15との対向領域を除く領域に相当する。したがって補助電極52は平面視で第1電極14と第2電極15との対向領域を除く領域に設けられることが好ましい。 The light emitting layer 16 can emit light in principle in a region where the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 are opposed to each other in plan view (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a facing region). For this reason, the region that does not emit light in principle corresponds to a region excluding the opposing region of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 in plan view. Therefore, it is preferable that the auxiliary electrode 52 be provided in a region excluding a region where the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 are opposed in plan view.
 なお発光量および電圧降下などを勘案して、補助電極を平面視で第1電極14と第2電極15との対向領域に形成してもよく、たとえば対向領域の周縁と、対向領域とに補助電極を形成してもよい。平面視でたとえば対向領域に格子状、ストライプ状又は線状に補助電極を形成し、対向領域に形成される補助電極と、対向領域の周縁に形成される補助電極とを接続してもよい。 The auxiliary electrode may be formed in the opposing region of the first electrode 14 and the second electrode 15 in a plan view in consideration of the light emission amount and the voltage drop. For example, the auxiliary electrode may be provided in the periphery of the opposing region and the opposing region. An electrode may be formed. For example, the auxiliary electrode may be formed in a lattice shape, a stripe shape, or a linear shape in the opposing region in plan view, and the auxiliary electrode formed in the opposing region may be connected to the auxiliary electrode formed in the periphery of the opposing region.
 補助電極の材料としては、電気伝導率の高い材料が好適に用いられ、Al、Ag、Cu、Au、Wなどをあげることができる。また補助電極にはAl-Nd、Ag-Pd-Cuなどの合金を用いてもよい。補助電極の厚みは求められるシート抵抗などによって適宜設定され、たとえば50nm~2000nmである。補助電極は単層によって構成されていてもよく、また複数の層が積層された積層体であってもよい。たとえば支持基板12(ガラス基板等)や第1電極14(ITO薄膜等)との密着性の向上させること、および金属表面を酸素や水分から保護することなどを目的として、所定の機能を発揮する層を、電気伝導率の高い材料からなる薄膜に積層してもよい。たとえばMo、Mo-NbおよびCrなどから成る薄膜で、電気伝導率の高い材料からなる薄膜を挟持した構成の積層体を補助電極として用いることができる。 As the material of the auxiliary electrode, a material having high electrical conductivity is preferably used, and examples thereof include Al, Ag, Cu, Au, and W. An alloy such as Al—Nd, Ag—Pd—Cu may be used for the auxiliary electrode. The thickness of the auxiliary electrode is appropriately set depending on the required sheet resistance, and is, for example, 50 nm to 2000 nm. The auxiliary electrode may be constituted by a single layer, or may be a laminate in which a plurality of layers are laminated. For example, a predetermined function is exhibited for the purpose of improving the adhesion with the support substrate 12 (glass substrate or the like) or the first electrode 14 (ITO thin film or the like) and protecting the metal surface from oxygen or moisture. The layer may be laminated on a thin film made of a material having high electrical conductivity. For example, a laminated body composed of a thin film made of Mo, Mo—Nb, Cr, or the like and sandwiching a thin film made of a material having high electrical conductivity can be used as the auxiliary electrode.
 なお前述した各実施形態では複数の有機EL素子によって1つの直列接続が構成された発光装置を示しているが、複数の有機EL素子によって複数の直列接続が構成された発光装置であっても本発明を好適に適用することができる。また直列接続と並列接続とを併用して構成された発光装置であっても本発明を好適に適用することができる。 In addition, although each embodiment mentioned above has shown the light-emitting device by which one series connection was comprised by the some organic EL element, even if it is a light-emitting device by which the some series connection was comprised by the some organic EL element, this book The invention can be suitably applied. Further, the present invention can be suitably applied even to a light-emitting device configured by using both serial connection and parallel connection.
 図8は本発明の第5実施形態の発光装置61を示す図である。本実施形態の発光装置61は、2列の直列接続を並列接続した構成の発光装置である。各直列接続は、3個の有機EL素子から構成される。2列の直列接続は、各有機EL素子の電極の一端同士および他端同士が電気的に接続され、並列接続される。 FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a light emitting device 61 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. The light emitting device 61 of the present embodiment is a light emitting device having a configuration in which two rows of serial connections are connected in parallel. Each series connection is composed of three organic EL elements. In the two columns in series connection, one end and the other end of the electrodes of each organic EL element are electrically connected and connected in parallel.
 複数の有機EL素子によって1つの直列接続が構成された発光装置では、有機EL素子の数が増加するほど、素子を駆動する駆動源の電圧が高くなるが、並列接続を併用することによって、駆動源に要求される供給電圧を適度に抑制することができる。 In a light-emitting device in which one series connection is configured by a plurality of organic EL elements, the voltage of a drive source that drives the elements increases as the number of organic EL elements increases. The supply voltage required for the source can be moderately suppressed.
 以下支持基板12および有機EL素子13の構成についてさらに詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the configurations of the support substrate 12 and the organic EL element 13 will be described in more detail.
 前述したように第1および第2電極14,15間には発光層16および電子注入層20のみならず、発光層16および電子注入層20とは異なる所定の層がさらに設けられることがある。陰極と発光層との間に設けられる層としては、電子輸送層、正孔ブロック層などを挙げることができる。 As described above, not only the light emitting layer 16 and the electron injection layer 20 but also a predetermined layer different from the light emitting layer 16 and the electron injection layer 20 may be further provided between the first and second electrodes 14 and 15. Examples of the layer provided between the cathode and the light emitting layer include an electron transport layer and a hole blocking layer.
 正孔ブロック層は正孔の輸送を堰き止める機能を有する。なお電子注入層及び/又は電子輸送層が正孔の輸送を堰き止める機能を有する場合には、これらの層が正孔ブロック層を兼ねることがある。 The hole blocking layer has a function of blocking hole transport. In the case where the electron injection layer and / or the electron transport layer have a function of blocking hole transport, these layers may also serve as the hole blocking layer.
 陽極と発光層との間に設けられる層としては、正孔注入層、正孔輸送層、電子ブロック層などを挙げることができる。陽極と発光層との間に、正孔注入層と正孔輸送層との両方の層が設けられる場合、陽極に接する層を正孔注入層といい、この正孔注入層を除く層を正孔輸送層という。 Examples of the layer provided between the anode and the light emitting layer include a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, and an electron block layer. When both the hole injection layer and the hole transport layer are provided between the anode and the light-emitting layer, the layer in contact with the anode is called a hole injection layer, and the layers other than the hole injection layer are positive. It is called a hole transport layer.
 正孔注入層は陽極からの正孔注入効率を改善する機能を有する。正孔輸送層は陽極側の表面に接する層からの正孔注入を改善する機能を有する。電子ブロック層は電子の輸送を堰き止める機能を有する。なお正孔注入層及び/又は正孔輸送層が電子の輸送を堰き止める機能を有する場合には、これらの層が電子ブロック層を兼ねることがある。 The hole injection layer has a function of improving the hole injection efficiency from the anode. The hole transport layer has a function of improving hole injection from a layer in contact with the surface on the anode side. The electron blocking layer has a function of blocking electron transport. When the hole injection layer and / or the hole transport layer has a function of blocking electron transport, these layers may also serve as an electron blocking layer.
 なお電子注入層および正孔注入層を総称して電荷注入層ということがあり、電子輸送層および正孔輸送層を総称して電荷輸送層ということがある。 Note that the electron injection layer and the hole injection layer may be collectively referred to as a charge injection layer, and the electron transport layer and the hole transport layer may be collectively referred to as a charge transport layer.
 本実施形態の有機EL素子のとりうる層構成の一例を以下に示す。
a)陽極/正孔注入層/発光層/電子注入層/陰極
b)陽極/正孔注入層/発光層/電子輸送層/電子注入層/陰極
c)陽極/正孔注入層/正孔輸送層/発光層/電子注入層/陰極
d)陽極/正孔注入層/正孔輸送層/発光層/電子輸送層/電子注入層/陰極
e)陽極/発光層/電子注入層/陰極
f)陽極/発光層/電子輸送層/電子注入層/陰極
(ここで、記号「/」は、記号「/」を挟む各層が隣接して積層されていることを示す。以下同じ。)
An example of a layer structure that can be taken by the organic EL element of the present embodiment is shown below.
a) Anode / hole injection layer / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / cathode b) Anode / hole injection layer / light emitting layer / electron transport layer / electron injection layer / cathode c) Anode / hole injection layer / hole transport Layer / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / cathode d) anode / hole injection layer / hole transport layer / light emitting layer / electron transport layer / electron injection layer / cathode e) anode / light emitting layer / electron injection layer / cathode f) Anode / light-emitting layer / electron transport layer / electron injection layer / cathode (Here, the symbol “/” indicates that the layers sandwiching the symbol “/” are stacked adjacent to each other. The same applies hereinafter.)
 本実施形態の有機EL素子は2層以上の発光層を有していてもよい。上記a)~f)の層構成のうちのいずれか1つにおいて、陽極と陰極とに挟持された積層体を「構成単位A」とすると、2層の発光層を有する有機EL素子の構成として、下記g)に示す層構成をあげることができる。なお2つある(構成単位A)の層構成は互いに同じでも、異なっていてもよい。
g)陽極/(構成単位A)/電荷発生層/(構成単位A)/陰極
The organic EL element of this embodiment may have two or more light emitting layers. In any one of the layer configurations of a) to f) above, when the laminate sandwiched between the anode and the cathode is referred to as “structural unit A”, the configuration of an organic EL element having two light emitting layers is obtained. The layer structure shown in the following g) can be given. Note that the two (structural unit A) layer configurations may be the same or different.
g) Anode / (constituent unit A) / charge generation layer / (constituent unit A) / cathode
 また「(構成単位A)/電荷発生層」を「構成単位B」とすると、3層以上の発光層を有する有機EL素子の構成として、下記h)に示す層構成を挙げることができる。
h)陽極/(構成単位B)x/(構成単位A)/陰極
Further, when “(constituent unit A) / charge generation layer” is “constituent unit B”, examples of the constitution of the organic EL element having three or more light emitting layers include the layer constitution shown in the following h).
h) Anode / (Structural unit B) x / (Structural unit A) / Cathode
 なお記号「x」は2以上の整数を表し、(構成単位B)xは、構成単位Bがx段積層された積層体を表す。また複数ある(構成単位B)の層構成は同じでもそれぞれ異なっていてもよい。 Note that the symbol “x” represents an integer of 2 or more, and (Structural unit B) x represents a stacked body in which the structural unit B is stacked in x stages. A plurality of (the structural unit B) may have the same or different layer structure.
 ここで電荷発生層とは電界を印加することにより正孔と電子を発生する層である。電荷発生層としてはたとえば酸化バナジウム、インジウムスズ酸化物(Indium Tin Oxide:略称ITO)、酸化モリブデンなどから成る薄膜を挙げることができる。 Here, the charge generation layer is a layer that generates holes and electrons by applying an electric field. Examples of the charge generation layer include a thin film made of vanadium oxide, indium tin oxide (abbreviated as ITO), molybdenum oxide, or the like.
 なお有機EL素子は、素子を気密に封止するための封止膜および封止板などの封止部材で覆われていてもよい。 Note that the organic EL element may be covered with a sealing member such as a sealing film and a sealing plate for hermetically sealing the element.
 有機EL素子は、例としてあげたa)~h)の層構成において、左側の層から順に支持基板上に積層されるか、または右側の層から順に支持基板上に積層される。なお例としてあげたa)~h)の層構成において、左側の層から順に支持基板上に積層される場合、すなわち陽極から順に支持基板上に積層される場合、第1電極14が陽極に相当し、第2電極15が陰極に相当する。逆に、例としてあげたa)~h)の層構成において、右側の層から順に支持基板上に積層される場合、すなわち陰極から順に支持基板上に積層される場合、第1電極14が陰極に相当し、第2電極15が陽極に相当する。 The organic EL elements are laminated on the support substrate in order from the left layer in the layer configurations of a) to h) given as an example, or are laminated on the support substrate in order from the right layer. In the layer configurations of a) to h) given as examples, the first electrode 14 corresponds to the anode when stacked on the support substrate sequentially from the left layer, that is, when stacked on the support substrate sequentially from the anode. The second electrode 15 corresponds to the cathode. Conversely, in the layer configurations of a) to h) given as an example, when the layers are stacked on the support substrate sequentially from the right layer, that is, when the layers are stacked on the support substrate sequentially from the cathode, the first electrode 14 is the cathode. The second electrode 15 corresponds to the anode.
 有機EL素子には、(1)ボトムエミッション型の構成のものと、(2)トップエミッション型の構成のものと、(3)両面発光型の構成のものとがある。ボトムエミッション型の有機EL素子は支持基板を通して光を外界に出射する。トップエミッション型の有機EL素子は、支持基板とは反対側から光を外界に出射する。両面発光型の有機EL素子は、支持基板側および支持基板とは反対側の両方から光を外界に出射する。本発明はボトムエミッション型、トップエミッション型、および両面発光型の有機EL素子のいずれであっても適用することができる。ボトムエミッション型の有機EL素子では、第1電極14を通して光が出射するため、第1電極14が光透過性を示す電極によって構成され、逆に第2電極は通常光を反射する電極によって構成される。またトップエミッション型の有機EL素子では第2電極を通して光が出射するため、第2電極15が光透過性を示す電極によって構成され、逆に第1電極14は通常光を反射する電極によって構成される。また両面発光型の有機EL素子では、第1および第2電極14,15の両方の電極が、光透過性を示す電極によって構成される。 Organic EL elements include (1) a bottom emission type, (2) a top emission type, and (3) a dual emission type. The bottom emission type organic EL element emits light to the outside through a support substrate. The top emission type organic EL element emits light to the outside from the side opposite to the support substrate. The double-sided light emitting organic EL element emits light to the outside from both the support substrate side and the opposite side of the support substrate. The present invention can be applied to any of bottom emission type, top emission type, and double-sided emission type organic EL elements. In the bottom emission type organic EL element, since light is emitted through the first electrode 14, the first electrode 14 is composed of an electrode exhibiting light transmittance, and conversely, the second electrode is composed of an electrode reflecting normal light. The In the top emission type organic EL element, since light is emitted through the second electrode, the second electrode 15 is constituted by an electrode exhibiting light transmittance, and conversely, the first electrode 14 is constituted by an electrode reflecting normal light. The In the double-sided light emitting organic EL element, both the first and second electrodes 14 and 15 are composed of electrodes exhibiting light transmittance.
 <支持基板>
 支持基板は有機EL素子を製造する工程において化学的に変化しないものが好適に用いられ、たとえばガラス、プラスチック、高分子フィルム、およびシリコン板、並びにこれらを積層したものなどが用いられる。なお有機EL素子を駆動する駆動回路が予め形成されている駆動用基板を支持基板として用いてもよい。支持基板を通して光が出射する構成のボトムエミッション型または両面発光型の有機EL素子を支持基板に搭載する場合、支持基板には光透過性を示す基板が用いられる。
<Support substrate>
As the support substrate, one that is not chemically changed in the process of manufacturing the organic EL element is suitably used. For example, glass, plastic, a polymer film, a silicon plate, and a laminate of these are used. A drive substrate in which a drive circuit for driving the organic EL element is formed in advance may be used as the support substrate. In the case where a bottom emission type or double-sided light emitting type organic EL element configured to emit light through a support substrate is mounted on the support substrate, a substrate exhibiting light transmittance is used as the support substrate.
 <陽極>
 発光層から放射される光が陽極を通って外に出射する構成の有機EL素子の場合、陽極には光透過性を示す電極が用いられる。光透過性を示す電極としては、金属酸化物、金属硫化物および金属などの薄膜を用いることができ、電気伝導度および光透過率の高いものが好適に用いられる。具体的には酸化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化スズ、ITO、インジウム亜鉛酸化物(Indium Zinc Oxide:略称IZO)、金、白金、銀、および銅などから成る薄膜が用いられ、これらの中でもITO、IZO、または酸化スズから成る薄膜が好適に用いられる。陽極の作製方法としては、真空蒸着法、スパッタリング法、イオンプレーティング法、メッキ法などを挙げることができる。また該陽極として、ポリアニリンもしくはその誘導体、ポリチオフェンもしくはその誘導体などの有機の透明導電膜を用いてもよい。有機の透明導電膜は、ポリチオフェンなどの有機導電材料を塗布法により作製することができる。
<Anode>
In the case of an organic EL element configured to emit light emitted from the light emitting layer through the anode, an electrode exhibiting optical transparency is used for the anode. As the electrode exhibiting light transmittance, a thin film of metal oxide, metal sulfide, metal or the like can be used, and an electrode having high electrical conductivity and light transmittance is preferably used. Specifically, a thin film made of indium oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, ITO, indium zinc oxide (abbreviated as IZO), gold, platinum, silver, copper, or the like is used. Among these, ITO, IZO Or a thin film made of tin oxide is preferably used. Examples of a method for producing the anode include a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, an ion plating method, and a plating method. Further, as the anode, an organic transparent conductive film such as polyaniline or a derivative thereof, polythiophene or a derivative thereof may be used. The organic transparent conductive film can be produced by applying an organic conductive material such as polythiophene.
 陽極の膜厚は、要求される特性および工程の簡易さなどを考慮して適宜設定され、たとえば10nm~10μmであり、好ましくは20nm~1μmであり、さらに好ましくは50nm~500nmである。 The film thickness of the anode is appropriately set in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 10 nm to 10 μm, preferably 20 nm to 1 μm, and more preferably 50 nm to 500 nm.
 <正孔注入層>
 正孔注入層を構成する正孔注入材料としては、酸化バナジウム、酸化モリブデン、酸化ルテニウムおよび酸化アルミニウムなどの金属酸化物や、フェニルアミン系化合物、スターバースト型アミン系化合物、フタロシアニン系、アモルファスカーボン、ポリアニリンおよびポリチオフェン誘導体などを挙げることができる。
<Hole injection layer>
As the hole injection material constituting the hole injection layer, metal oxides such as vanadium oxide, molybdenum oxide, ruthenium oxide and aluminum oxide, phenylamine compounds, starburst amine compounds, phthalocyanines, amorphous carbon, Examples thereof include polyaniline and polythiophene derivatives.
 正孔注入層の成膜方法としては、たとえば正孔注入材料を含む溶液からの成膜を挙げることができる。たとえば所定の塗布法によって正孔注入材料を含む溶液を塗布成膜し、さらにこれを固化することによって正孔注入層を形成することができる。 Examples of the method for forming the hole injection layer include film formation from a solution containing a hole injection material. For example, a hole injection layer can be formed by coating a film containing a hole injection material by a predetermined coating method and solidifying the solution.
 溶液からの成膜に用いられる溶媒としては、クロロホルム、塩化メチレン、ジクロロエタンなどの塩素系溶媒、テトラヒドロフランなどのエーテル系溶媒、トルエン、キシレンなどの芳香族炭化水素系溶媒、アセトン、メチルエチルケトンなどのケトン系溶媒、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、エチルセルソルブアセテートなどのエステル系溶媒、および水を挙げることができる。 Solvents used for film formation from solution include chlorine solvents such as chloroform, methylene chloride and dichloroethane, ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene and xylene, and ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone. Examples thereof include solvents, ester solvents such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, and ethyl cellosolve acetate, and water.
 正孔注入層の膜厚は、求められる特性および工程の簡易さなどを考慮して適宜設定され、たとえば1nm~1μmであり、好ましくは2nm~500nmであり、さらに好ましくは5nm~200nmである。 The film thickness of the hole injection layer is appropriately set in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 1 nm to 1 μm, preferably 2 nm to 500 nm, and more preferably 5 nm to 200 nm.
 <正孔輸送層>
 正孔輸送層を構成する正孔輸送材料としては、ポリビニルカルバゾール若しくはその誘導体、ポリシラン若しくはその誘導体、側鎖若しくは主鎖に芳香族アミンを有するポリシロキサン誘導体、ピラゾリン誘導体、アリールアミン誘導体、スチルベン誘導体、トリフェニルジアミン誘導体、ポリアニリン若しくはその誘導体、ポリチオフェン若しくはその誘導体、ポリアリールアミン若しくはその誘導体、ポリピロール若しくはその誘導体、ポリ(p-フェニレンビニレン)若しくはその誘導体、又はポリ(2,5-チエニレンビニレン)若しくはその誘導体などを挙げることができる。
<Hole transport layer>
As the hole transport material constituting the hole transport layer, polyvinylcarbazole or a derivative thereof, polysilane or a derivative thereof, a polysiloxane derivative having an aromatic amine in a side chain or a main chain, a pyrazoline derivative, an arylamine derivative, a stilbene derivative, Triphenyldiamine derivative, polyaniline or derivative thereof, polythiophene or derivative thereof, polyarylamine or derivative thereof, polypyrrole or derivative thereof, poly (p-phenylene vinylene) or derivative thereof, or poly (2,5-thienylene vinylene) or Examples thereof include derivatives thereof.
 これらのなかで正孔輸送材料としては、ポリビニルカルバゾール若しくはその誘導体、ポリシラン若しくはその誘導体、側鎖若しくは主鎖に芳香族アミン化合物基を有するポリシロキサン誘導体、ポリアニリン若しくはその誘導体、ポリチオフェン若しくはその誘導体、ポリアリールアミン若しくはその誘導体、ポリ(p-フェニレンビニレン)若しくはその誘導体、又はポリ(2,5-チエニレンビニレン)若しくはその誘導体などの高分子正孔輸送材料が好ましく、さらに好ましくはポリビニルカルバゾール若しくはその誘導体、ポリシラン若しくはその誘導体、側鎖若しくは主鎖に芳香族アミンを有するポリシロキサン誘導体である。低分子の正孔輸送材料の場合には、高分子バインダーに分散させて用いることが好ましい。 Among these, hole transport materials include polyvinyl carbazole or a derivative thereof, polysilane or a derivative thereof, a polysiloxane derivative having an aromatic amine compound group in a side chain or a main chain, polyaniline or a derivative thereof, polythiophene or a derivative thereof, poly Polymeric hole transport materials such as arylamine or derivatives thereof, poly (p-phenylene vinylene) or derivatives thereof, or poly (2,5-thienylene vinylene) or derivatives thereof are preferred, and polyvinylcarbazole or derivatives thereof are more preferred. , Polysilane or a derivative thereof, and a polysiloxane derivative having an aromatic amine in the side chain or main chain. In the case of a low-molecular hole transport material, it is preferably used by being dispersed in a polymer binder.
 正孔輸送層の成膜方法としては、たとえば正孔輸送材料を含む溶液からの成膜を挙げることができる。たとえば所定の塗布法によって正孔輸送材料を含む溶液を塗布成膜し、さらにこれを固化することによって正孔輸送層を形成することができる。低分子の正孔輸送材料を用いる場合、正孔輸送材料とともに高分子バインダーをさらに混合した溶液を用いて成膜してもよい。 Examples of the method for forming the hole transport layer include film formation from a solution containing a hole transport material. For example, a hole transport layer can be formed by coating a film containing a hole transport material by a predetermined coating method and solidifying the solution. When a low molecular hole transport material is used, the film may be formed using a solution in which a polymer binder is further mixed with the hole transport material.
 溶液からの成膜に用いられる溶媒としては、たとえばクロロホルム、塩化メチレン、ジクロロエタンなどの塩素系溶媒、テトラヒドロフランなどのエーテル系溶媒、トルエン、キシレンなどの芳香族炭化水素系溶媒、アセトン、メチルエチルケトンなどのケトン系溶媒、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、エチルセルソルブアセテートなどのエステル系溶媒などを挙げることができる。 Solvents used for film formation from solution include, for example, chlorine solvents such as chloroform, methylene chloride, dichloroethane, ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene and xylene, and ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone. Examples thereof include ester solvents such as system solvents, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, and ethyl cellosolve acetate.
 混合する高分子バインダーとしては、電荷輸送を極度に阻害しないものが好ましく、また可視光に対する吸収の弱いものが好適に用いられ、たとえばポリカーボネート、ポリアクリレート、ポリメチルアクリレート、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリスチレン、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリシロキサンなどを挙げることができる。 As the polymer binder to be mixed, those that do not extremely inhibit charge transport are preferable, and those that weakly absorb visible light are preferably used. For example, polycarbonate, polyacrylate, polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, polystyrene, poly Examples thereof include vinyl chloride and polysiloxane.
 正孔輸送層の膜厚は、要求される特性および工程の簡易さなどを考慮して適宜設定され、たとえば1nm~1μmであり、好ましくは2nm~500nmであり、さらに好ましくは5nm~200nmである。 The film thickness of the hole transport layer is appropriately set in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 1 nm to 1 μm, preferably 2 nm to 500 nm, and more preferably 5 nm to 200 nm. .
 <発光層>
 発光層は、通常、主として蛍光及び/又はりん光を発光する有機物、または該有機物とこれを補助するドーパントとから形成される。たとえば発光効率の向上や、発光波長を変化させるためにドーパントは加えられる。なお発光層に含まれる有機物は、低分子化合物でも高分子化合物でもよい。低分子化合物よりも溶媒への溶解性が一般的に高い高分子化合物は塗布法に好適に用いられるため、発光層は高分子化合物を含むことが好ましく、高分子化合物としてポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量が10~10の化合物を含むことが好ましい。発光層を構成する発光材料としては、たとえば以下の色素系材料、金属錯体系材料、高分子系材料、ドーパント材料を挙げることができる。
<Light emitting layer>
The light emitting layer is usually formed of an organic substance that mainly emits fluorescence and / or phosphorescence, or an organic substance and a dopant that assists the organic substance. For example, a dopant is added in order to improve luminous efficiency and change the emission wavelength. The organic substance contained in the light emitting layer may be a low molecular compound or a high molecular compound. Since a high molecular compound having a generally higher solubility in a solvent than a low molecular compound is preferably used in the coating method, the light-emitting layer preferably contains a high molecular compound, and the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene as the high molecular compound Preferably contain from 10 3 to 10 8 compounds. Examples of the light emitting material constituting the light emitting layer include the following dye materials, metal complex materials, polymer materials, and dopant materials.
 (色素系材料)
 色素系材料としては、たとえば、シクロペンダミン誘導体、テトラフェニルブタジエン誘導体化合物、トリフェニルアミン誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、ピラゾロキノリン誘導体、ジスチリルベンゼン誘導体、ジスチリルアリーレン誘導体、ピロール誘導体、チオフェン環化合物、ピリジン環化合物、ペリノン誘導体、ペリレン誘導体、オリゴチオフェン誘導体、オキサジアゾールダイマー、ピラゾリンダイマー、キナクリドン誘導体、クマリン誘導体などを挙げることができる。
(Dye material)
Examples of dye-based materials include cyclopentamine derivatives, tetraphenylbutadiene derivative compounds, triphenylamine derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, pyrazoloquinoline derivatives, distyrylbenzene derivatives, distyrylarylene derivatives, pyrrole derivatives, thiophene ring compounds. Pyridine ring compounds, perinone derivatives, perylene derivatives, oligothiophene derivatives, oxadiazole dimers, pyrazoline dimers, quinacridone derivatives, coumarin derivatives, and the like.
 (金属錯体系材料)
 金属錯体系材料としては、たとえばTb、Eu、Dyなどの希土類金属、またはAl、Zn、Be、Ir、Ptなどを中心金属に有し、オキサジアゾール、チアジアゾール、フェニルピリジン、フェニルベンゾイミダゾール、キノリン構造などを配位子に有する金属錯体を挙げることができ、たとえばイリジウム錯体、白金錯体などの三重項励起状態からの発光を有する金属錯体、アルミニウムキノリノール錯体、ベンゾキノリノールベリリウム錯体、ベンゾオキサゾリル亜鉛錯体、ベンゾチアゾール亜鉛錯体、アゾメチル亜鉛錯体、ポルフィリン亜鉛錯体、フェナントロリンユーロピウム錯体などを挙げることができる。
(Metal complex materials)
Examples of the metal complex material include rare earth metals such as Tb, Eu, and Dy, or Al, Zn, Be, Ir, Pt, etc. as a central metal, and oxadiazole, thiadiazole, phenylpyridine, phenylbenzimidazole, quinoline. Examples include metal complexes having a structure as a ligand, such as metal complexes having light emission from triplet excited states such as iridium complexes and platinum complexes, aluminum quinolinol complexes, benzoquinolinol beryllium complexes, and benzoxazolyl zinc. A complex, a benzothiazole zinc complex, an azomethylzinc complex, a porphyrin zinc complex, a phenanthroline europium complex, and the like can be given.
 (高分子系材料)
 高分子系材料としては、ポリパラフェニレンビニレン誘導体、ポリチオフェン誘導体、ポリパラフェニレン誘導体、ポリシラン誘導体、ポリアセチレン誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体、ポリビニルカルバゾール誘導体、上記色素系材料や金属錯体系発光材料を高分子化したものなどを挙げることができる。
(Polymer material)
As polymer materials, polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, polyparaphenylene derivatives, polysilane derivatives, polyacetylene derivatives, polyfluorene derivatives, polyvinyl carbazole derivatives, the above dye materials and metal complex light emitting materials are polymerized. Things can be mentioned.
 上記発光性材料のうち、青色に発光する材料としては、ジスチリルアリーレン誘導体、オキサジアゾール誘導体、およびそれらの重合体、ポリビニルカルバゾール誘導体、ポリパラフェニレン誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体などを挙げることができる。なかでも高分子材料のポリビニルカルバゾール誘導体、ポリパラフェニレン誘導体やポリフルオレン誘導体などが好ましい。 Among the luminescent materials described above, materials that emit blue light include distyrylarylene derivatives, oxadiazole derivatives, and polymers thereof, polyvinylcarbazole derivatives, polyparaphenylene derivatives, polyfluorene derivatives, and the like. Of these, polymer materials such as polyvinyl carbazole derivatives, polyparaphenylene derivatives, and polyfluorene derivatives are preferred.
 また、緑色に発光する材料としては、キナクリドン誘導体、クマリン誘導体、およびそれらの重合体、ポリパラフェニレンビニレン誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体などを挙げることができる。なかでも高分子材料のポリパラフェニレンビニレン誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体などが好ましい。 In addition, examples of materials that emit green light include quinacridone derivatives, coumarin derivatives, and polymers thereof, polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives, polyfluorene derivatives, and the like. Of these, polymer materials such as polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives and polyfluorene derivatives are preferred.
 また、赤色に発光する材料としては、クマリン誘導体、チオフェン環化合物、およびそれらの重合体、ポリパラフェニレンビニレン誘導体、ポリチオフェン誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体などを挙げることができる。なかでも高分子材料のポリパラフェニレンビニレン誘導体、ポリチオフェン誘導体、ポリフルオレン誘導体などが好ましい。 In addition, examples of materials that emit red light include coumarin derivatives, thiophene ring compounds, and polymers thereof, polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, and polyfluorene derivatives. Among these, polymer materials such as polyparaphenylene vinylene derivatives, polythiophene derivatives, and polyfluorene derivatives are preferable.
 (ドーパント材料)
 ドーパント材料としては、たとえばペリレン誘導体、クマリン誘導体、ルブレン誘導体、キナクリドン誘導体、スクアリウム誘導体、ポルフィリン誘導体、スチリル系色素、テトラセン誘導体、ピラゾロン誘導体、デカシクレン、フェノキサゾンなどを挙げることができる。なお、このような発光層の厚さは、通常約2nm~200nmである。
(Dopant material)
Examples of the dopant material include perylene derivatives, coumarin derivatives, rubrene derivatives, quinacridone derivatives, squalium derivatives, porphyrin derivatives, styryl dyes, tetracene derivatives, pyrazolone derivatives, decacyclene, phenoxazone, and the like. Note that the thickness of such a light emitting layer is usually about 2 nm to 200 nm.
 発光層は、たとえば溶液からの成膜によって形成される。発光層は、たとえば発光材料を含む溶液を所定の塗布法によって塗布し、さらにこれを固化することによって形成される。溶液からの成膜に用いる溶媒としては、前述の溶液から正孔注入層を成膜するさいに用いられる溶媒と同様の溶媒を挙げることができる。 The light emitting layer is formed, for example, by film formation from a solution. The light emitting layer is formed, for example, by applying a solution containing a light emitting material by a predetermined application method and further solidifying the solution. Examples of the solvent used for film formation from a solution include the same solvents as those used for forming a hole injection layer from the above solution.
 <電子輸送層>
 電子輸送層を構成する電子輸送材料としては、オキサジアゾール誘導体、アントラキノジメタン若しくはその誘導体、ベンゾキノン若しくはその誘導体、ナフトキノン若しくはその誘導体、アントラキノン若しくはその誘導体、テトラシアノアンスラキノジメタン若しくはその誘導体、フルオレノン誘導体、ジフェニルジシアノエチレン若しくはその誘導体、ジフェノキノン誘導体、又は8-ヒドロキシキノリン若しくはその誘導体の金属錯体、ポリキノリン若しくはその誘導体、ポリキノキサリン若しくはその誘導体、ポリフルオレン若しくはその誘導体などを挙げることができる。
<Electron transport layer>
As an electron transport material constituting the electron transport layer, an oxadiazole derivative, anthraquinodimethane or a derivative thereof, benzoquinone or a derivative thereof, naphthoquinone or a derivative thereof, anthraquinone or a derivative thereof, tetracyanoanthraquinodimethane or a derivative thereof, Fluorenone derivatives, diphenyldicyanoethylene or derivatives thereof, diphenoquinone derivatives, or metal complexes of 8-hydroxyquinoline or derivatives thereof, polyquinoline or derivatives thereof, polyquinoxaline or derivatives thereof, polyfluorene or derivatives thereof, and the like can be given.
 電子輸送層の成膜法としては、たとえば蒸着法および溶液からの成膜法などをあげることができる。なお溶液から成膜する場合には高分子バインダーを併用してもよい。 Examples of the method for forming the electron transport layer include a vapor deposition method and a film formation method from a solution. In the case of forming a film from a solution, a polymer binder may be used in combination.
 電子輸送層の膜厚は、要求される特性および工程の簡易さなどを考慮して適宜設定され、たとえば1nm~1μmであり、好ましくは2nm~500nmであり、さらに好ましくは5nm~200nmである。 The film thickness of the electron transport layer is appropriately set in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 1 nm to 1 μm, preferably 2 nm to 500 nm, and more preferably 5 nm to 200 nm.
 <電子注入層>
 電子注入層はイオン性ポリマーを含んで構成される。電子注入層を構成するイオン性ポリマーとしては、例えば、下記式(1)で表される基及び下記式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基を含む構造単位を有する重合体が挙げられる。イオン性ポリマーの一形態としては、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基を含む構造単位を、全構造単位中、15~100モル%有する重合体が挙げられる。
<Electron injection layer>
The electron injection layer includes an ionic polymer. As an ionic polymer constituting the electron injection layer, for example, a structural unit containing one or more groups selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the following formula (1) and a group represented by the following formula (2) The polymer which has is mentioned. As one form of the ionic polymer, a structural unit containing one or more groups selected from the group consisting of the group represented by the formula (1) and the group represented by the formula (2) Examples thereof include a polymer having 15 to 100 mol%.
-(Qn1-Y(Ma1(Zb1  (1)
(式(1)中、Qは2価の有機基を表し、Yは、-CO 、-SO 、-SO 又は-PO 2-を表し、Mは金属カチオン又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないアンモニウムカチオンを表し、ZはF、Cl、Br、I、OH、RSO 、RCOO、ClO、ClO 、ClO 、ClO 、SCN、CN、NO 、SO 2-、HSO 、PO 3-、HPO 2-、HPO 、BF 又はPF を表し、n1は0以上の整数を表し、a1は1以上の整数を表し、b1は0以上の整数を表し、ただし、a1及びb1は、式(1)で表される基の電荷が0となるように選択され、Rは置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数6~50のアリール基を表し、Q、M及びZのおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
-(Q 1 ) n1 -Y 1 (M 1 ) a1 (Z 1 ) b1 (1)
(In Formula (1), Q 1 represents a divalent organic group, Y 1 represents —CO 2 , —SO 3 , —SO 2 or —PO 3 2− , and M 1 represents a metal cation. Or an ammonium cation with or without a substituent, and Z 1 is F , Cl , Br , I , OH , R a SO 3 , R a COO , ClO , ClO 2 −. , ClO 3 , ClO 4 , SCN , CN , NO 3 , SO 4 2− , HSO 4 , PO 4 3− , HPO 4 2− , H 2 PO 4 , BF 4 or PF 6 - , N1 represents an integer of 0 or more, a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, b1 represents an integer of 0 or more, provided that a1 and b1 are charges of the group represented by the formula (1) Selected to be 0 and R a is the number of carbon atoms with or without substituents Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 30 alkyl groups or an aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms with or without substituents, and when there are a plurality of Q 1 , M 1 and Z 1 , they may be the same or different Good.)
-(Qn2-Y(Ma2(Zb2  (2)
(式(2)中、
 Qは2価の有機基を表し、
 Yはカルボカチオン、アンモニウムカチオン、ホスホニルカチオン又はスルホニルカチオン又はヨードニウムカチオンを表し、MはF、Cl、Br、I、OH、RSO 、RCOO、ClO、ClO 、ClO 、ClO 、SCN、CN、NO 、SO 2-、HSO 、PO 3-、HPO 2-、HPO 、BF 又はPF を表し、Zは金属カチオン又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないアンモニウムカチオンを表し、n2は0以上の整数を表し、a2は1以上の整数を表し、b2は0以上の整数を表し、ただし、a2及びb2は、式(2)で表される基の電荷が0となるように選択され、Rは置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数6~50のアリール基を表し、Q、M及びZのおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
-(Q 2 ) n2 -Y 2 (M 2 ) a2 (Z 2 ) b2 (2)
(In the formula (2),
Q 2 represents a divalent organic group,
Y 2 represents a carbo cation, an ammonium cation, a phosphonyl cation or a sulfonyl cation or an iodonium cation, and M 2 represents F , Cl , Br , I , OH , R b SO 3 , R b COO , ClO , ClO 2 , ClO 3 , ClO 4 , SCN , CN , NO 3 , SO 4 2− , HSO 4 , PO 4 3− , HPO 4 2− , H 2 PO 4 , BF 4 - or PF 6 - represents, Z 2 represents an ammonium cation which does not have or have a metal cation or a substituent, n2 represents an integer of 0 or more, a2 represents an integer of 1 or more, b2 is It represents an integer of 0 or more, provided that, a2 and b2 are selected so that the charge of the group represented by the formula (2) is 0, R b is a carbon source that does not have or have a substituent Represents a number of 1 to 30 alkyl group or a substituted or without aryl group having a carbon number of 6 to 50, each of Q 2, M 2 and Z 2 are when a plurality of, be the same or different Also good. )
 本発明で用いられるイオン性ポリマーの一形態としては、さらに下記式(3)で表される基を有する重合体が挙げられる。イオン性ポリマーが式(3)で表される基を有する場合、式(3)で表される基は、イオン性ポリマーの構造単位中に含まれていてもよく、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる一種以上の基を含む構造単位と同一の構造単位内に含まれていてもよいし、異なる他の構造単位内に含まれていてもよい。さらに、イオン性ポリマーの一形態としては、式(1)で表される基、式(2)で表される基、及び式(3)で表される基のうち少なくとも1種を含む構造単位を、全構造単位中、15~100モル%有する重合体が挙げられる。 As an embodiment of the ionic polymer used in the present invention, a polymer having a group represented by the following formula (3) can be mentioned. When the ionic polymer has a group represented by the formula (3), the group represented by the formula (3) may be contained in the structural unit of the ionic polymer, and is represented by the formula (1). And may be contained in the same structural unit as the structural unit containing one or more groups selected from the group consisting of the group represented by formula (2), or may be contained in another different structural unit. It may be. Furthermore, as one form of the ionic polymer, a structural unit containing at least one of a group represented by the formula (1), a group represented by the formula (2), and a group represented by the formula (3) Is a polymer having 15 to 100 mol% of all structural units.
  -(Qn3-Y   (3)
(式(3)中、
 Qは2価の有機基を表し、Yは-CN又は式(4)~(12)のいずれかで表される基を表し、n3は0以上の整数を表す。
  -O-(R’O)a3-R’’ (4)
-(Q 3 ) n3 -Y 3 (3)
(In Formula (3),
Q 3 represents a divalent organic group, Y 3 represents —CN or a group represented by any one of formulas (4) to (12), and n3 represents an integer of 0 or more.
-O- (R'O) a3 -R '' (4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
  -S-(R’S)a4-R’’ (6)
  -C(=O)-(R’-C(=O))a4-R’’ (7)
  -C(=S)-(R’-C(=S))a4-R’’ (8)
  -N{(R’)a4R’’} (9)
  -C(=O)O-(R’-C(=O)O)a4-R’’ (10)
  -C(=O)O-(R’O)a4-R’’ (11)
  -NHC(=O)-(R’NHC(=O))a4-R’’ (12)
(式(4)~(12)中、R’は置換基を有し又は有さない2価の炭化水素基を表し、R’’は水素原子、置換基を有し若しくは有さない1価の炭化水素基、-COOH、-SOH、-OH、-SH、-NR 、-CN又は-C(=O)NR を表し、R’’’は置換基を有し若しくは有さない3価の炭化水素基を表し、a3は1以上の整数を表し、a4は0以上の整数を表し、Rは置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数6~50のアリール基を表し、R’、R’’及びR’’’のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)) イオン性ポリマーは、式(13)で表される構造単位、式(15)で表される構造単位、式(17)で表される構造単位及び式(20)で表される構造単位からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の構造単位を、全構造単位中、15~100モル%含むことが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
-S- (R'S) a4 -R '' (6)
-C (= O)-(R'-C (= O)) a4 -R '' (7)
-C (= S)-(R'-C (= S)) a4 -R '' (8)
−N {(R ′) a4 R ″} 2 (9)
—C (═O) O— (R′—C (═O) O) a4 —R ″ (10)
—C (═O) O— (R′O) a4 —R ″ (11)
—NHC (═O) — (R′NHC (═O)) a4 —R ″ (12)
(In the formulas (4) to (12), R ′ represents a divalent hydrocarbon group with or without a substituent, and R ″ represents a monovalent with or without a hydrogen atom or a substituent. A hydrocarbon group, —COOH, —SO 3 H, —OH, —SH, —NR c 2 , —CN or —C (═O) NR c 2 , wherein R ′ ″ has a substituent, or Represents a trivalent hydrocarbon group not having, a3 represents an integer of 1 or more, a4 represents an integer of 0 or more, and R c is an alkyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent. An aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a group or substituent, and when there are a plurality of R ′, R ″ and R ′ ″, they may be the same or different. )) The ionic polymer comprises a structural unit represented by formula (13), a structural unit represented by formula (15), a structural unit represented by formula (17), and One or more structural units selected from the group consisting of the structural units (20), in the total structural units, preferably contains 15 to 100 mol%.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
(式(13)中、Rは式(14)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、ArはR以外の置換基を有し又は有さない(2+n4)価の芳香族基を表し、n4は1以上の整数を表し、Rは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
(In Formula (13), R 1 is a monovalent group including a group represented by Formula (14), and Ar 1 has a (2 + n4) -valent fragrance with or without a substituent other than R 1. Represents a group, n4 represents an integer of 1 or more, and when there are a plurality of R 1 s , they may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
(式(14)中、Rは(1+m1+m2)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m1及びm2はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
(In Formula (14), R 2 represents a (1 + m1 + m2) -valent organic group, and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3 have the same meanings as described above. M1 and m2 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, and when Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3 are plural, May be the same or different.))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
(式(15)中、Rは式(16)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、ArはR以外の置換基を有し又は有さない(2+n5)価の芳香族基を表し、n5は1以上の整数を表し、Rは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
(In the formula (15), R 3 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by the formula (16), and Ar 2 has a (2 + n5) -valent fragrance with or without a substituent other than R 3. Represents a group, n5 represents an integer of 1 or more, and when there are a plurality of R 3 s , they may be the same or different.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
(式(16)中、Rは(1+m3+m4)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m3及びm4はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表す。Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
(In Formula (16), R 4 represents a (1 + m3 + m4) -valent organic group, and Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 have the same meaning as described above. M3 and m4 each independently represent an integer greater than or equal to 1. When there are a plurality of Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3, May be the same or different.))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
(式(17)中、Rは式(18)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、Rは式(19)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、ArはR及びR以外の置換基を有し又は有さない(2+n6+n7)価の芳香族基を表し、n6及びn7はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、R及びRのおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 
-R-{(Qn1-Y(Ma1(Zb1m5  (18)
(式(18)中、Rは直接結合又は(1+m5)価の有機基を表し、Q、Y、M、Z、n1、a1及びb1は前述と同じ意味を表し、m5は1以上の整数を表し、Q、Y、M、Z、n1、a1及びb1のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
 
-R-{(Qn3-Ym6  (19)
(式(19)中、Rは単結合又は(1+m6)価の有機基を表し、Y及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m6は1以上の整数を表し、ただし、Rが単結合のときm6は1を表し、Q、Y及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
(In Formula (17), R 5 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by Formula (18), R 6 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by Formula (19), Ar 3 represents a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group having or not having a substituent other than R 5 and R 6 , n6 and n7 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, and each of R 5 and R 6 May be the same or different when there are multiple.

-R 7 -{(Q 1 ) n1 -Y 1 (M 1 ) a1 (Z 1 ) b1 } m5 (18)
(In the formula (18), R 7 represents a direct bond or a (1 + m5) -valent organic group, Q 1 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , n1, a1 and b1 represent the same meaning as described above, and m5 represents Represents an integer of 1 or more, and when there are a plurality of Q 1 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , n 1 , a 1 and b 1 , they may be the same or different.

-R 8 -{(Q 3 ) n3 -Y 3 } m6 (19)
(In Formula (19), R 8 represents a single bond or a (1 + m6) -valent organic group, Y 3 and n3 represent the same meaning as described above, m6 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that R 8 is a single group. M6 represents 1 when bonded, and when there are a plurality of Q 3 , Y 3 and n3, they may be the same or different.))
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
(式(20)中、Rは式(21)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、R10は式(22)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、ArはR及びR10以外の置換基を有し又は有さない(2+n8+n9)価の芳香族基を表し、n8及びn9はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、R及びR10のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
 
-R11-{(Qn2-Y(Ma2(Zb2m7  (21)
(式(21)中、R11は単結合又は(1+m7)価の有機基を表し、Q、Y、M、Z、n2、a2及びb2は前述と同じ意味を表し、m7は1以上の整数を表し、ただし、R11が単結合のときm7は1を表し、Q、Y、M、Z、n2、a2及びb2のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
 
-R12-{(Qn3-Ym8  (22)
(式(22)中、R12は単結合又は(1+m8)価の有機基を表し、Y及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m8は1以上の整数を表し、ただし、R12が単結合のときm8は1を表し、Q、Y及びn3、のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
(In the formula (20), R 9 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by the formula (21), R 10 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by the formula (22), Ar 4 represents a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group having or not having a substituent other than R 9 and R 10 , n8 and n9 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, and each of R 9 and R 10 May be the same or different when there are multiple.

-R 11 -{(Q 2 ) n2 -Y 2 (M 2 ) a2 (Z 2 ) b2 } m7 (21)
(In formula (21), R 11 represents a single bond or a (1 + m7) valent organic group, Q 2 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , n 2 , a 2 and b 2 represent the same meaning as described above, and m 7 represents Represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that when R 11 is a single bond, m7 represents 1, and when there are a plurality of Q 2 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , n 2 , a 2 and b 2 , they are the same or different May be.)

-R 12 -{(Q 3 ) n3 -Y 3 } m8 (22)
(In the formula (22), R 12 represents a single bond or a (1 + m8) -valent organic group, Y 3 and n3 represent the same meaning as described above, m8 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that R 12 is a single group. When bonded, m8 represents 1, and when there are a plurality of Q 3 , Y 3 and n3, they may be the same or different.)
 前記イオン性ポリマー中の構造単位は、式(1)で表される基を2種類以上含んでいてもよく、式(2)で表される基を2種類以上含んでいてもよく、式(3)で表される基を2種類以上含んでいてもよい。 The structural unit in the ionic polymer may contain two or more groups represented by the formula (1), may contain two or more groups represented by the formula (2), Two or more groups represented by 3) may be included.
 -式(1)で表される基-
 式(1)中、Qで表される2価の有機基としては、メチレン基、エチレン基、1,2-プロピレン基、1,3-プロピレン基、1,2-ブチレン基、1,3-ブチレン基、1,4-ブチレン基、1,5-ペンチレン基、1,6-ヘキシレン基、1,9-ノニレン基、1,12-ドデシレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50の2価の飽和炭化水素基;エテニレン基、プロペニレン基、3-ブテニレン基、2-ブテニレン基、2-ペンテニレン基、2-ヘキセニレン基、2-ノネニレン基、2-ドデセニレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数2~50のアルケニレン基、及び、エチニレン基を含む、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数2~50の2価の不飽和炭化水素基;シクロプロピレン基、シクロブチレン基、シクロペンチレン基、シクロへキシレン基、シクロノニレン基、シクロドデシレン基、ノルボニレン基、アダマンチレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数3~50の2価の環状飽和炭化水素基;1,3-フェニレン基、1,4-フェニレン基、1,4-ナフチレン基、1,5-ナフチレン基、2,6-ナフチレン基、ビフェニル-4,4’-ジイル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~50のアリーレン基;メチレンオキシ基、エチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基、ブチレンオキシ基、ペンチレンオキシ基、ヘキシレンオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルキレンオキシ基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するイミノ基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリレン基が挙げられ、イオン性ポリマーの原料となるモノマー(以下、「原料モノマー」と言う。)の合成の容易さの観点からは、2価の飽和炭化水素基、アリーレン基、アルキレンオキシ基が好ましい。
-Group represented by Formula (1)-
In the formula (1), the divalent organic group represented by Q 1 includes a methylene group, an ethylene group, a 1,2-propylene group, a 1,3-propylene group, a 1,2-butylene group, 1,3 -Butylene group, 1,4-butylene group, 1,5-pentylene group, 1,6-hexylene group, 1,9-nonylene group, 1,12-dodecylene group, at least one hydrogen in these groups A divalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, such as a group in which an atom is substituted with a substituent; an ethenylene group, a propenylene group, a 3-butenylene group, a 2-butenylene group , 2-pentenylene group, 2-hexenylene group, 2-nonenylene group, 2-dodecenylene group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, or the like. An alkenylene group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, And a divalent unsaturated hydrocarbon group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, including or not having a substituent, including an ethynylene group; a cyclopropylene group, a cyclobutylene group, a cyclopentylene group, a cyclohexylene group, 3 to 50 carbon atoms having or not having a substituent, such as a cyclononylene group, a cyclododecylene group, a norbornylene group, an adamantylene group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. Divalent cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group; 1,3-phenylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-naphthylene group, 1,5-naphthylene group, 2,6-naphthylene group, biphenyl-4,4 An arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, such as a '-diyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom of these groups is substituted with a substituent; Echi Have a substituent such as a lenoxy group, a propyleneoxy group, a butyleneoxy group, a pentyleneoxy group, a hexyleneoxy group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. An alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms; an imino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom; a silylene group having a substituent containing a carbon atom, and a monomer (hereinafter, “ From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the “raw material monomer”, a divalent saturated hydrocarbon group, an arylene group, and an alkyleneoxy group are preferable.
 前記置換基としては、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アリールチオ基、アリールアルキル基、アリールアルコキシ基、アリールアルキルチオ基、アリールアルケニル基、アリールアルキニル基、アミノ基、置換アミノ基、シリル基、置換シリル基、ハロゲン原子、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、イミン残基、アミド基、酸イミド基、1価の複素環基、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシル基、置換カルボキシル基、シアノ基及びニトロ基等が挙げられ、前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。これらのうち、アミノ基、シリル基、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基及びニトロ基以外の置換基は炭素原子を含む。 Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an arylthio group, an arylalkyl group, an arylalkoxy group, an arylalkylthio group, an arylalkenyl group, an arylalkynyl group, an amino group, and a substituted amino group. Group, silyl group, substituted silyl group, halogen atom, acyl group, acyloxy group, imine residue, amide group, acid imide group, monovalent heterocyclic group, hydroxy group, carboxyl group, substituted carboxyl group, cyano group and nitro Group, etc., and when a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different. Of these, substituents other than amino groups, silyl groups, halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, and nitro groups contain carbon atoms.
 以下、置換基について説明する。なお、「C~C」(m、nはm<nを満たす正の整数である)という用語は、この用語とともに記載された有機基の炭素原子数がm~nであることを表す。例えば、C~Cアルキル基であれば、アルキル基の炭素原子数がm~nであることを表し、C~Cアルキルアリール基であれば、アルキル基の炭素原子数がm~nであることを表し、アリール-C~Cアルキル基であれば、アルキル基の炭素原子数がm~nであることを表す。 Hereinafter, the substituent will be described. The term “C m -C n ” (m, n is a positive integer satisfying m <n) indicates that the organic group described together with this term has m to n carbon atoms. . For example, a C m -C n alkyl group indicates that the alkyl group has m to n carbon atoms, and a C m -C n alkyl aryl group indicates that the alkyl group has m carbon atoms of m to n. n represents an aryl-C m -C n alkyl group, the alkyl group has m to n carbon atoms.
 アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐状でもよく、シクロアルキル基でもよい。アルキル基の炭素原子数は通常1~20であり、1~10が好ましい。アルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基等が挙げられる。前記アルキル基中の水素原子はフッ素原子で置換されていてもよい。該当するフッ素原子置換アルキル基としては、トリフルオロメチル基、ペンタフルオロエチル基、パーフルオロブチル基、パーフルオロヘキシル基、パーフルオロオクチル基等が挙げられる。なお、C~C12アルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、イソアミル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基が挙げられる。 The alkyl group may be linear or branched, and may be a cycloalkyl group. The alkyl group usually has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, t-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, and nonyl group. Decyl group, lauryl group and the like. The hydrogen atom in the alkyl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom. Examples of the fluorine atom-substituted alkyl group include a trifluoromethyl group, a pentafluoroethyl group, a perfluorobutyl group, a perfluorohexyl group, and a perfluorooctyl group. Examples of the C 1 to C 12 alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, a t-butyl group, a pentyl group, an isoamyl group, and a hexyl group. Cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group and lauryl group.
 アルコキシ基は、直鎖状でも分岐状でもよく、シクロアルキルオキシ基であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。アルコキシ基の炭素原子数は通常1~20であり、1~10が好ましい。アルコキシ基としては、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、イソプロピルオキシ基、ブトキシ基、イソブトキシ基、s-ブトキシ基、t-ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基、ヘプチルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、デシルオキシ基、ラウリルオキシ基等が挙げられる。前記アルコキシ基中の水素原子はフッ素原子で置換されていてもよい。該当するフッ素原子置換アルコキシ基としては、トリフルオロメトキシ基、ペンタフルオロエトキシ基、パーフルオロブトキシ基、パーフルオロヘキシルオキシ基、パーフルオロオクチルオキシ基等が挙げられる。また、該アルコキシ基には、メトキシメチルオキシ基、2-メトキシエチルオキシ基も含まれる。なお、C~C12アルコキシ基としては、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、イソプロピルオキシ基、ブトキシ基、イソブトキシ基、s-ブトキシ基、t-ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基、ヘプチルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、2-エチルヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、デシルオキシ基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルオキシ基、ラウリルオキシ基が挙げられる。 The alkoxy group may be linear or branched, may be a cycloalkyloxy group, and may have a substituent. The alkoxy group usually has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, isopropyloxy, butoxy, isobutoxy, s-butoxy, t-butoxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, cyclohexyloxy, heptyloxy Octyloxy group, nonyloxy group, decyloxy group, lauryloxy group and the like. A hydrogen atom in the alkoxy group may be substituted with a fluorine atom. Examples of the fluorine atom-substituted alkoxy group include a trifluoromethoxy group, a pentafluoroethoxy group, a perfluorobutoxy group, a perfluorohexyloxy group, and a perfluorooctyloxy group. The alkoxy group also includes a methoxymethyloxy group and a 2-methoxyethyloxy group. Examples of the C 1 -C 12 alkoxy group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, an isopropyloxy group, a butoxy group, an isobutoxy group, an s-butoxy group, a t-butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, and a hexyloxy group. Group, cyclohexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, 2-ethylhexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, decyloxy group, 3,7-dimethyloctyloxy group, lauryloxy group.
 アルキルチオ基としては、直鎖状でも分岐状でもよく、シクロアルキルチオ基であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。アルキルチオ基の炭素原子数は通常1~20であり、1~10が好ましい。アルキルチオ基としては、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、プロピルチオ基、イソプロピルチオ基、ブチルチオ基、イソブチルチオ基、s-ブチルチオ基、t-ブチルチオ基、ペンチルチオ基、ヘキシルチオ基、シクロヘキシルチオ基、ヘプチルチオ基、オクチルチオ基、ノニルチオ基、デシルチオ基、ラウリルチオ基等が挙げられる。前記アルキルチオ基中の水素原子はフッ素原子で置換されていてもよい。該当するフッ素原子置換アルキルチオ基としては、トリフルオロメチルチオ基等が挙げられる。 The alkylthio group may be linear or branched, may be a cycloalkylthio group, and may have a substituent. The alkylthio group usually has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkylthio group include methylthio group, ethylthio group, propylthio group, isopropylthio group, butylthio group, isobutylthio group, s-butylthio group, t-butylthio group, pentylthio group, hexylthio group, cyclohexylthio group, heptylthio group, octylthio group , Nonylthio group, decylthio group, laurylthio group and the like. A hydrogen atom in the alkylthio group may be substituted with a fluorine atom. Examples of the fluorine atom-substituted alkylthio group include a trifluoromethylthio group.
 アリール基は、芳香族炭化水素から芳香環を構成する炭素原子に結合した水素原子1個を除いた残りの原子団であり、ベンゼン環を持つ基、縮合環を持つ基、独立したベンゼン環又は縮合環2個以上が単結合又は2価の有機基、例えば、ビニレン基等のアルケニレン基を介して結合した基も含まれる。アリール基は、炭素原子数が通常6~60であり、7~48であることが好ましい。アリール基としては、フェニル基、C~C12アルコキシフェニル基、C~C12アルキルフェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基等が挙げられる。前記アリール基中の水素原子はフッ素原子で置換されていてもよい。該当するフッ素原子置換アリール基としては、ペンタフルオロフェニル基等が挙げられる。アリール基の中では、C~C12アルコキシフェニル基、C~C12アルキルフェニル基が好ましい。 An aryl group is a remaining atomic group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom constituting an aromatic ring from an aromatic hydrocarbon, a group having a benzene ring, a group having a condensed ring, an independent benzene ring or A group in which two or more condensed rings are bonded through a single bond or a divalent organic group, for example, an alkenylene group such as a vinylene group is also included. The aryl group usually has 6 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 7 to 48 carbon atoms. The aryl group includes a phenyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, a 2-naphthyl group, a 1-anthracenyl group, a 2-anthracenyl group, and a 9-anthracenyl group. Etc. A hydrogen atom in the aryl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom. Examples of the fluorine atom-substituted aryl group include a pentafluorophenyl group. Among the aryl groups, a C 1 to C 12 alkoxyphenyl group and a C 1 to C 12 alkylphenyl group are preferable.
 前記アリール基のうち、C~C12アルコキシフェニル基としては、メトキシフェニル基、エトキシフェニル基、プロピルオキシフェニル基、イソプロピルオキシフェニル基、ブトキシフェニル基、イソブトキシフェニル基、s-ブトキシフェニル基、t-ブトキシフェニル基、ペンチルオキシフェニル基、ヘキシルオキシフェニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシフェニル基、ヘプチルオキシフェニル基、オクチルオキシフェニル基、2-エチルヘキシルオキシフェニル基、ノニルオキシフェニル基、デシルオキシフェニル基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルオキシフェニル基、ラウリルオキシフェニル基等が挙げられる。 Among the aryl groups, C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl groups include methoxyphenyl group, ethoxyphenyl group, propyloxyphenyl group, isopropyloxyphenyl group, butoxyphenyl group, isobutoxyphenyl group, s-butoxyphenyl group, t-butoxyphenyl group, pentyloxyphenyl group, hexyloxyphenyl group, cyclohexyloxyphenyl group, heptyloxyphenyl group, octyloxyphenyl group, 2-ethylhexyloxyphenyl group, nonyloxyphenyl group, decyloxyphenyl group, 3, Examples include 7-dimethyloctyloxyphenyl group, lauryloxyphenyl group, and the like.
 前記アリール基のうち、C~C12アルキルフェニル基としては、メチルフェニル基、エチルフェニル基、ジメチルフェニル基、プロピルフェニル基、メシチル基、メチルエチルフェニル基、イソプロピルフェニル基、ブチルフェニル基、イソブチルフェニル基、t-ブチルフェニル基、ペンチルフェニル基、イソアミルフェニル基、ヘキシルフェニル基、ヘプチルフェニル基、オクチルフェニル基、ノニルフェニル基、デシルフェニル基、ドデシルフェニル基等が挙げられる。 Among the aryl groups, the C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl group includes methylphenyl group, ethylphenyl group, dimethylphenyl group, propylphenyl group, mesityl group, methylethylphenyl group, isopropylphenyl group, butylphenyl group, isobutyl group. Examples include phenyl group, t-butylphenyl group, pentylphenyl group, isoamylphenyl group, hexylphenyl group, heptylphenyl group, octylphenyl group, nonylphenyl group, decylphenyl group, dodecylphenyl group and the like.
 アリールオキシ基は、炭素原子数が通常6~60であり、7~48であることが好ましい。アリールオキシ基としては、フェノキシ基、C~C12アルコキシフェノキシ基、C~C12アルキルフェノキシ基、1-ナフチルオキシ基、2-ナフチルオキシ基、ペンタフルオロフェニルオキシ基等が挙げられる。アリールオキシ基の中では、C~C12アルコキシフェノキシ基及びC~C12アルキルフェノキシ基が好ましい。 The aryloxy group usually has 6 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 7 to 48 carbon atoms. Examples of the aryloxy group include a phenoxy group, a C 1 to C 12 alkoxyphenoxy group, a C 1 to C 12 alkylphenoxy group, a 1-naphthyloxy group, a 2-naphthyloxy group, and a pentafluorophenyloxy group. Among the aryloxy groups, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenoxy group and a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenoxy group are preferable.
 前記アリールオキシ基のうち、C~C12アルコキシフェノキシ基としては、メトキシフェノキシ基、エトキシフェノキシ基、プロピルオキシフェノキシ基、イソプロピルオキシフェノキシ基、ブトキシフェノキシ基、イソブトキシフェノキシ基、s-ブトキシフェノキシ基、t-ブトキシフェノキシ基、ペンチルオキシフェノキシ基、ヘキシルオキシフェノキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシフェノキシ基、ヘプチルオキシフェノキシ基、オクチルオキシフェノキシ基、2-エチルヘキシルオキシフェノキシ基、ノニルオキシフェノキシ基、デシルオキシフェノキシ基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルオキシフェノキシ基、ラウリルオキシフェノキシ基等が挙げられる。 Among the aryloxy groups, the C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenoxy group includes a methoxyphenoxy group, an ethoxyphenoxy group, a propyloxyphenoxy group, an isopropyloxyphenoxy group, a butoxyphenoxy group, an isobutoxyphenoxy group, and an s-butoxyphenoxy group. T-butoxyphenoxy group, pentyloxyphenoxy group, hexyloxyphenoxy group, cyclohexyloxyphenoxy group, heptyloxyphenoxy group, octyloxyphenoxy group, 2-ethylhexyloxyphenoxy group, nonyloxyphenoxy group, decyloxyphenoxy group, 3 , 7-dimethyloctyloxyphenoxy group, lauryloxyphenoxy group and the like.
 前記アリールオキシ基のうち、C~C12アルキルフェノキシ基としては、メチルフェノキシ基、エチルフェノキシ基、ジメチルフェノキシ基、プロピルフェノキシ基、1,3,5-トリメチルフェノキシ基、メチルエチルフェノキシ基、イソプロピルフェノキシ基、ブチルフェノキシ基、イソブチルフェノキシ基、s-ブチルフェノキシ基、t-ブチルフェノキシ基、ペンチルフェノキシ基、イソアミルフェノキシ基、ヘキシルフェノキシ基、ヘプチルフェノキシ基、オクチルフェノキシ基、ノニルフェノキシ基、デシルフェノキシ基、ドデシルフェノキシ基等が挙げられる。 Among the aryloxy groups, the C 1 -C 12 alkylphenoxy group includes methylphenoxy group, ethylphenoxy group, dimethylphenoxy group, propylphenoxy group, 1,3,5-trimethylphenoxy group, methylethylphenoxy group, isopropyl Phenoxy group, butylphenoxy group, isobutylphenoxy group, s-butylphenoxy group, t-butylphenoxy group, pentylphenoxy group, isoamylphenoxy group, hexylphenoxy group, heptylphenoxy group, octylphenoxy group, nonylphenoxy group, decylphenoxy group And dodecylphenoxy group.
 アリールチオ基は、例えば、前述のアリール基に硫黄元素が結合した基である。アリールチオ基は、前記アリール基の芳香環上に置換基を有していてもよい。アリールチオ基は、炭素原子数が通常6~60であり、6~30であることが好ましい。アリールチオ基としては、フェニルチオ基、C~C12アルコキシフェニルチオ基、C~C12アルキルフェニルチオ基、1-ナフチルチオ基、2-ナフチルチオ基、ペンタフルオロフェニルチオ基等が挙げられる。 The arylthio group is, for example, a group in which a sulfur element is bonded to the aforementioned aryl group. The arylthio group may have a substituent on the aromatic ring of the aryl group. The arylthio group usually has 6 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 6 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples of the arylthio group include a phenylthio group, a C 1 to C 12 alkoxyphenylthio group, a C 1 to C 12 alkylphenylthio group, a 1-naphthylthio group, a 2-naphthylthio group, and a pentafluorophenylthio group.
 アリールアルキル基は、例えば、前述のアリール基に前述のアルキル基が結合した基である。アリールアルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。アリールアルキル基は、炭素原子数が通常7~60であり、7~30であることが好ましい。アリールアルキル基としては、フェニル-C~C12アルキル基、C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキル基、C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキル基、1-ナフチル-C~C12アルキル基、2-ナフチル-C~C12アルキル基等が挙げられる。 The arylalkyl group is, for example, a group in which the above alkyl group is bonded to the above aryl group. The arylalkyl group may have a substituent. The arylalkyl group usually has 7 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms. The arylalkyl group includes a phenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl group, 1- naphthyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl group, 2-naphthyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl group and the like.
 アリールアルコキシ基は、例えば、前述のアリール基に前述のアルコキシ基が結合した基である。アリールアルコキシ基は、置換基を有していてもよい。アリールアルコキシ基は、炭素原子数が通常7~60であり、7~30であることが好ましい。アリールアルコキシ基としては、フェニル-C~C12アルコキシ基、C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルコキシ基、C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルコキシ基、1-ナフチル-C~C12アルコキシ基、2-ナフチル-C~C12アルコキシ基等が挙げられる。 The arylalkoxy group is, for example, a group in which the above alkoxy group is bonded to the above aryl group. The arylalkoxy group may have a substituent. The arylalkoxy group usually has 7 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms. The arylalkoxy group includes a phenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkoxy group, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkoxy group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkoxy group, 1- naphthyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkoxy groups, 2-naphthyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkoxy groups and the like.
 アリールアルキルチオ基は、例えば、前述のアリール基に前述のアルキルチオ基が結合した基である。アリールアルキルチオ基は、置換基を有していてもよい。アリールアルキルチオ基は、炭素原子数が通常7~60であり、7~30であることが好ましい。アリールアルキルチオ基としては、フェニル-C~C12アルキルチオ基、C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキルチオ基、C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキルチオ基、1-ナフチル-C~C12アルキルチオ基、2-ナフチル-C~C12アルキルチオ基等が挙げられる。 The arylalkylthio group is, for example, a group in which the aforementioned alkylthio group is bonded to the aforementioned aryl group. The arylalkylthio group may have a substituent. The arylalkylthio group usually has 7 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms. The arylalkylthio group includes phenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkylthio group, C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkylthio group, C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkylthio group, 1- naphthyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkylthio groups, 2-naphthyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkylthio groups and the like.
 アリールアルケニル基は、例えば、前述のアリール基にアルケニル基が結合した基である。アリールアルケニル基は、炭素原子数が通常8~60であり、8~30であることが好ましい。アリールアルケニル基としては、フェニル-C~C12アルケニル基、C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルケニル基、C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルケニル基、1-ナフチル-C~C12アルケニル基、2-ナフチル-C~C12アルケニル基等が挙げられ、C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルケニル基、C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルケニル基が好ましい。なお、C~C12アルケニル基としては、例えば、ビニル基、1-プロペニル基、2-プロペニル基、1-ブテニル基、2-ブテニル基、1-ペンテニル基、2-ペンテニル基、1-ヘキセニル基、2-ヘキセニル基、1-オクテニル基が挙げられる。 The arylalkenyl group is, for example, a group in which an alkenyl group is bonded to the aforementioned aryl group. The arylalkenyl group usually has 8 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 8 to 30 carbon atoms. The arylalkenyl group includes a phenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, 1- And naphthyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, 2-naphthyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, and the like. C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group, C 2 -C 12 alkylphenyl- C 2 -C 12 alkenyl groups are preferred. Examples of the C 2 -C 12 alkenyl group include a vinyl group, 1-propenyl group, 2-propenyl group, 1-butenyl group, 2-butenyl group, 1-pentenyl group, 2-pentenyl group, and 1-hexenyl. Group, 2-hexenyl group and 1-octenyl group.
 アリールアルキニル基は、例えば、前述のアリール基にアルキニル基が結合した基である。アリールアルキニル基は、炭素原子数が通常8~60であり、8~30であることが好ましい。アリールアルキニル基としては、フェニル-C~C12アルキニル基、C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキニル基、C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキニル基、1-ナフチル-C~C12アルキニル基、2-ナフチル-C~C12アルキニル基等が挙げられ、C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキニル基、C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキニル基が好ましい。なお、C~C12アルキニル基としては、例えば、エチニル基、1-プロピニル基、2-プロピニル基、1-ブチニル基、2-ブチニル基、1-ペンチニル基、2-ペンチニル基、1-ヘキシニル基、2-ヘキシニル基、1-オクチニル基が挙げられる。 The arylalkynyl group is, for example, a group in which an alkynyl group is bonded to the aforementioned aryl group. The arylalkynyl group usually has 8 to 60 carbon atoms, preferably 8 to 30 carbon atoms. The arylalkynyl group includes phenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, 1- And naphthyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, 2-naphthyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, and the like. C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group, C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl- C 2 -C 12 alkynyl groups are preferred. The C 2 -C 12 alkynyl group includes, for example, ethynyl group, 1-propynyl group, 2-propynyl group, 1-butynyl group, 2-butynyl group, 1-pentynyl group, 2-pentynyl group, 1-hexynyl group. Group, 2-hexynyl group and 1-octynyl group.
 置換アミノ基としては、アミノ基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子が、アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基及び1価の複素環基からなる群から選択される1又は2個の基によって置換されたアミノ基が好ましい。該アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基又は1価の複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換アミノ基の炭素原子数は、該アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基又は1価の複素環基が有していてもよい置換基の炭素原子数を含めないで通常1~60であり、2~48が好ましい。置換アミノ基としては、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、エチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、プロピルアミノ基、ジプロピルアミノ基、イソプロピルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、ブチルアミノ基、イソブチルアミノ基、s-ブチルアミノ基、t-ブチルアミノ基、ペンチルアミノ基、ヘキシルアミノ基、シクロヘキシルアミノ基、ヘプチルアミノ基、オクチルアミノ基、2-エチルヘキシルアミノ基、ノニルアミノ基、デシルアミノ基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルアミノ基、ラウリルアミノ基、シクロペンチルアミノ基、ジシクロペンチルアミノ基、シクロヘキシルアミノ基、ジシクロヘキシルアミノ基、ジトリフルオロメチルアミノ基、フェニルアミノ基、ジフェニルアミノ基、(C~C12アルコキシフェニル)アミノ基、ジ(C~C12アルコキシフェニル)アミノ基、ジ(C~C12アルキルフェニル)アミノ基、1-ナフチルアミノ基、2-ナフチルアミノ基、ペンタフルオロフェニルアミノ基、ピリジルアミノ基、ピリダジニルアミノ基、ピリミジルアミノ基、ピラジニルアミノ基、トリアジニルアミノ基、(フェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、(C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、(C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、ジ(C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、ジ(C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、1-ナフチル-C~C12アルキルアミノ基、2-ナフチル-C~C12アルキルアミノ基等が挙げられる。 As the substituted amino group, at least one hydrogen atom in the amino group is substituted with one or two groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group, and a monovalent heterocyclic group. The amino group formed is preferred. The alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent. The number of carbon atoms of the substituted amino group is usually 1 to 60 excluding the number of carbon atoms of the substituent that the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have, 2 to 48 are preferred. Examples of substituted amino groups include methylamino group, dimethylamino group, ethylamino group, diethylamino group, propylamino group, dipropylamino group, isopropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, butylamino group, isobutylamino group, and s-butylamino group. Group, t-butylamino group, pentylamino group, hexylamino group, cyclohexylamino group, heptylamino group, octylamino group, 2-ethylhexylamino group, nonylamino group, decylamino group, 3,7-dimethyloctylamino group, lauryl amino group, cyclopentylamino group, dicyclopentylamino group, cyclohexylamino group, dicyclohexylamino group, ditrifluoromethylamino group, phenylamino group, diphenylamino group, (C 1 ~ C 12 alkoxyphenyl) amino Group, di (C 1 ~ C 12 alkoxyphenyl) amino group, di (C 1 ~ C 12 alkylphenyl) amino groups, 1-naphthylamino group, 2-naphthylamino group, pentafluorophenylamino group, pyridylamino group, Dazinylamino group, pyrimidylamino group, pyrazinylamino group, triazinylamino group, (phenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, (C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, (C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, di (C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, di (C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl) amino groups, 1-naphthyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkylamino groups, 2-naphthyl -C Include ~ C 12 alkylamino groups and the like.
 置換シリル基としては、シリル基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子が、アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基及び1価の複素環基からなる群から選択される1~3個の基によって置換されたシリル基が挙げられる。該アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基又は1価の複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換シリル基の炭素原子数は、該アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基又は1価の複素環基が有していてもよい置換基の炭素原子数を含めないで通常1~60であり、3~48が好ましい。なお、置換シリル基としては、トリメチルシリル基、トリエチルシリル基、トリプロピルシリル基、トリイソプロピルシリル基、イソプロピルジメチルシリル基、イソプロピルジエチルシリル基、t-ブチルジメチルシリル基、ペンチルジメチルシリル基、ヘキシルジメチルシリル基、ヘプチルジメチルシリル基、オクチルジメチルシリル基、2-エチルヘキシルジメチルシリル基、ノニルジメチルシリル基、デシルジメチルシリル基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルジメチルシリル基、ラウリルジメチルシリル基、(フェニル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(1-ナフチル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(2-ナフチル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(フェニル-C~C12アルキル)ジメチルシリル基、トリフェニルシリル基、トリ(p-キシリル)シリル基、トリベンジルシリル基、ジフェニルメチルシリル基、t-ブチルジフェニルシリル基、ジメチルフェニルシリル基等が挙げられる。 As the substituted silyl group, at least one hydrogen atom in the silyl group is substituted with 1 to 3 groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group and a monovalent heterocyclic group Silyl group formed. The alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent. The number of carbon atoms of the substituted silyl group is usually 1 to 60 without including the number of carbon atoms of the substituent that the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have, 3 to 48 are preferred. The substituted silyl group includes trimethylsilyl group, triethylsilyl group, tripropylsilyl group, triisopropylsilyl group, isopropyldimethylsilyl group, isopropyldiethylsilyl group, t-butyldimethylsilyl group, pentyldimethylsilyl group, hexyldimethylsilyl group. Group, heptyldimethylsilyl group, octyldimethylsilyl group, 2-ethylhexyldimethylsilyl group, nonyldimethylsilyl group, decyldimethylsilyl group, 3,7-dimethyloctyldimethylsilyl group, lauryldimethylsilyl group, (phenyl-C 1- (C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (1-naphthyl- C 1 C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (2-naphthyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (phenyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl) dimethyl silyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, tri (p- xylyl) silyl group, Examples thereof include a tribenzylsilyl group, a diphenylmethylsilyl group, a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group, and a dimethylphenylsilyl group.
 ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子及びヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
 アシル基は、炭素原子数が通常2~20であり、2~18であることが好ましい。アシル基としては、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブチリル基、イソブチリル基、ピバロイル基、ベンゾイル基、トリフルオロアセチル基、ペンタフルオロベンゾイル基等が挙げられる。 The acyl group usually has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms. Examples of the acyl group include an acetyl group, a propionyl group, a butyryl group, an isobutyryl group, a pivaloyl group, a benzoyl group, a trifluoroacetyl group, and a pentafluorobenzoyl group.
 アシルオキシ基は、炭素原子数が通常2~20であり、2~18であることが好ましい。アシルオキシ基としては、アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基、ブチリルオキシ基、イソブチリルオキシ基、ピバロイルオキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基、トリフルオロアセチルオキシ基、ペンタフルオロベンゾイルオキシ基等が挙げられる。 The acyloxy group usually has 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms. Examples of the acyloxy group include an acetoxy group, a propionyloxy group, a butyryloxy group, an isobutyryloxy group, a pivaloyloxy group, a benzoyloxy group, a trifluoroacetyloxy group, and a pentafluorobenzoyloxy group.
 イミン残基は、式:H-N=C<及び式:-N=CH-の少なくとも一方で表される構造を有するイミン化合物から、この構造中の水素原子1個を除いた残基を意味する。このようなイミン化合物としては、例えば、アルジミン、ケチミン及びアルジミン中の窒素原子に結合した水素原子がアルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基、アリールアルケニル基、アリールアルキニル基等で置換された化合物が挙げられる。イミン残基の炭素原子数は、通常2~20であり、2~18が好ましい。イミン残基としては、例えば、一般式:-CRβ=N-Rγ又は一般式:-N=C(Rγ(式中、Rβは水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基、アリールアルケニル基、又はアリールアルキニル基を表し、Rγは独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基、アリールアルケニル基、又はアリールアルキニル基を表し、ただし、Rγが2個存在する場合、2個のRγは相互に結合し一体となって2価の基、例えば、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、テトラメチレン基、ペンタメチレン基、ヘキサメチレン基等の炭素原子数2~18のアルキレン基として環を形成してもよい。)で表される基が挙げられる。イミン残基としては、以下の基が挙げられる。 The imine residue means a residue obtained by removing one hydrogen atom in this structure from an imine compound having a structure represented by at least one of the formula: HN═C <and the formula: —N═CH—. To do. Examples of such imine compounds include compounds in which a hydrogen atom bonded to a nitrogen atom in aldimine, ketimine, and aldimine is substituted with an alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group, arylalkenyl group, arylalkynyl group, or the like. It is done. The number of carbon atoms in the imine residue is usually 2-20, and preferably 2-18. Examples of the imine residue include a general formula: —CR β ═N—R γ or a general formula: —N═C (R γ ) 2 (where R β is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl) A group, an arylalkenyl group, or an arylalkynyl group, and R γ independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group, an arylalkenyl group, or an arylalkynyl group, provided that two R γ are present. Two are bonded to each other to form a divalent group, for example, an alkylene group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms such as an ethylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethylene group, pentamethylene group, hexamethylene group, etc. As a ring may be formed.). Examples of the imine residue include the following groups.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(式中、Meはメチル基を示し、以下、同様である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
(In the formula, Me represents a methyl group, and the same shall apply hereinafter.)
 アミド基は、炭素原子数が通常1~20であり、2~18であることが好ましい。アミド基としては、ホルムアミド基、アセトアミド基、プロピオアミド基、ブチロアミド基、ベンズアミド基、トリフルオロアセトアミド基、ペンタフルオロベンズアミド基、ジホルムアミド基、ジアセトアミド基、ジプロピオアミド基、ジブチロアミド基、ジベンズアミド基、ジトリフルオロアセトアミド基、ジペンタフルオロベンズアミド基等が挙げられる。 The amide group usually has 1 to 20 carbon atoms and preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms. As the amide group, formamide group, acetamide group, propioamide group, butyroamide group, benzamide group, trifluoroacetamide group, pentafluorobenzamide group, diformamide group, diacetamide group, dipropioamide group, dibutyroamide group, dibenzamide group, ditrifluoro Examples include an acetamide group and a dipentafluorobenzamide group.
 酸イミド基は、酸イミドからその窒素原子に結合した水素原子を除いて得られる残基であり、炭素原子数が通常4~20であり、4~18であることが好ましい。酸イミド基としては、以下の基が挙げられる。 The acid imide group is a residue obtained by removing a hydrogen atom bonded to the nitrogen atom from an acid imide, and usually has 4 to 20 carbon atoms and preferably 4 to 18 carbon atoms. Examples of the acid imide group include the following groups.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 1価の複素環基とは、複素環式化合物から水素原子1個を除いた残りの原子団をいう。ここで、複素環式化合物とは、環式構造をもつ有機化合物のうち、環を構成する元素として、炭素原子だけでなく、酸素原子、硫黄原子、窒素原子、リン原子、ホウ素原子、ケイ素原子、セレン原子、テルル原子、ヒ素原子等のヘテロ原子を含む有機化合物をいう。1価の複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。1価の複素環基は、炭素原子数が通常3~60であり、3~20が好ましい。なお、1価の複素環基の炭素原子数には、置換基の炭素原子数は含まないものとする。このような1価の複素環基としては、例えば、チエニル基、C~C12アルキルチエニル基、ピロリル基、フリル基、ピリジル基、C~C12アルキルピリジル基、ピリダジニル基、ピリミジル基、ピラジニル基、トリアジニル基、ピロリジル基、ピペリジル基、キノリル基、イソキノリル基が挙げられ、中でも、チエニル基、C~C12アルキルチエニル基、ピリジル基及びC~C12アルキルピリジル基が好ましい。なお、1価の複素環基としては、1価の芳香族複素環基が好ましい。 The monovalent heterocyclic group refers to the remaining atomic group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a heterocyclic compound. Here, the heterocyclic compound is not only a carbon atom but also an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, a phosphorus atom, a boron atom, a silicon atom as an element constituting a ring among organic compounds having a cyclic structure. , An organic compound containing a heteroatom such as a selenium atom, a tellurium atom or an arsenic atom. The monovalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent. The monovalent heterocyclic group usually has 3 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms of the monovalent heterocyclic group does not include the number of carbon atoms of the substituent. Examples of such a monovalent heterocyclic group include a thienyl group, a C 1 to C 12 alkyl thienyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a furyl group, a pyridyl group, a C 1 to C 12 alkyl pyridyl group, a pyridazinyl group, a pyrimidyl group, Examples include a pyrazinyl group, a triazinyl group, a pyrrolidyl group, a piperidyl group, a quinolyl group, and an isoquinolyl group, and among them, a thienyl group, a C 1 to C 12 alkylthienyl group, a pyridyl group, and a C 1 to C 12 alkylpyridyl group are preferable. The monovalent heterocyclic group is preferably a monovalent aromatic heterocyclic group.
 置換カルボキシル基とは、カルボキシル基中の水素原子が、アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基又は1価の複素環基で置換された基、すなわち、式:-C(=O)OR(式中、Rはアルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基又は1価の複素環基)で表される基である。置換オキシカルボニル基は、炭素原子数が通常2~60であり、2~48であることが好ましい。前記アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基又は1価の複素環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。なお、上記炭素原子数には、前記アルキル基、アリール基、アリールアルキル基又は1価の複素環基が有していてもよい置換基の炭素原子数は含まないものとする。置換カルボキシル基としては、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、プロポキシカルボニル基、イソプロポキシカルボニル基、ブトキシカルボニル基、イソブトキシカルボニル基、s-ブトキシカルボニル基、t-ブトキシカルボニル基、ペンチルオキシカルボニル基、ヘキシロキシカルボニル基、シクロヘキシロキシカルボニル基、ヘプチルオキシカルボニル基、オクチルオキシカルボニル基、2-エチルヘキシロキシカルボニル基、ノニルオキシカルボニル基、デシロキシカルボニル基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルオキシカルボニル基、ドデシルオキシカルボニル基、トリフルオロメトキシカルボニル基、ペンタフルオロエトキシカルボニル基、パーフルオロブトキシカルボニル基、パーフルオロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基、パーフルオロオクチルオキシカルボニル基、フェノキシカルボニル基、ナフトキシカルボニル基、ピリジルオキシカルボニル基等が挙げられる。 The substituted carboxyl group is a group in which a hydrogen atom in a carboxyl group is substituted with an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group or a monovalent heterocyclic group, that is, a formula: —C (═O) OR * (formula R * is a group represented by an alkyl group, an aryl group, an arylalkyl group or a monovalent heterocyclic group. The substituted oxycarbonyl group usually has 2 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 2 to 48 carbon atoms. The alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group or monovalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Note that the number of carbon atoms does not include the number of carbon atoms of the substituent that the alkyl group, aryl group, arylalkyl group, or monovalent heterocyclic group may have. Examples of the substituted carboxyl group include methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, propoxycarbonyl group, isopropoxycarbonyl group, butoxycarbonyl group, isobutoxycarbonyl group, s-butoxycarbonyl group, t-butoxycarbonyl group, pentyloxycarbonyl group, hexyl group. Siloxycarbonyl group, cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, heptyloxycarbonyl group, octyloxycarbonyl group, 2-ethylhexyloxycarbonyl group, nonyloxycarbonyl group, decyloxycarbonyl group, 3,7-dimethyloctyloxycarbonyl group, dodecyloxycarbonyl Group, trifluoromethoxycarbonyl group, pentafluoroethoxycarbonyl group, perfluorobutoxycarbonyl group, perfluorohexyloxycarbonyl group Perfluorooctyl group, phenoxycarbonyl group, naphthoxycarbonyl group, pyridyloxycarbonyl group and the like.
 式(1)中、Yは、-CO 、-SO 、-SO 、-PO 、又は-B(R 等の1価の基を表し、Yとしては、イオン性ポリマーの酸性度の観点からは-CO 、-SO 、-PO が好ましく、-CO がより好ましく、イオン性ポリマーの安定性の観点からは、-CO 、-SO 、-SO 又は-PO が好ましい。 In Formula (1), Y 1 represents a monovalent group such as —CO 2 , —SO 3 , —SO 2 , —PO 3 , or —B (R a ) 3 , and Y 1 the, -CO 2 from the viewpoint of the acidity of the ionic polymer -, -SO 2 -, -PO 3 - is more preferred, from the viewpoint of the stability of the ionic polymer, - preferably, -CO 2 - CO 2 , —SO 3 , —SO 2 or —PO 3 is preferred.
 式(1)中、Mは金属カチオン又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないアンモニウムカチオンを表す。金属カチオンとしては、1価、2価又は3価のイオンが好ましく、Li、Na、K、Cs、Be、Mg、Ca、Ba、Ag、Al、Bi、Cu、Fe、Ga、Mn、Pb、Sn、Ti、V、W、Y、Yb、Zn、Zr等のイオンが挙げられ、Li、Na、K、Cs、Ag、Mg2+、Ca2+が好ましい。また、アンモニウムイオンが有していてもよい置換基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、i-ブチル基、t-ブチル基等の炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基が挙げられる。 In formula (1), M 1 represents a metal cation or an ammonium cation with or without a substituent. As the metal cation, monovalent, divalent or trivalent ions are preferable, and Li, Na, K, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca, Ba, Ag, Al, Bi, Cu, Fe, Ga, Mn, Pb, Examples thereof include ions such as Sn, Ti, V, W, Y, Yb, Zn, and Zr, and Li + , Na + , K + , Cs + , Ag + , Mg 2+ , and Ca 2+ are preferable. In addition, examples of the substituent that the ammonium ion may have include 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, i-butyl group, and t-butyl group. Of the alkyl group.
 式(1)中、ZはF、Cl、Br、I、OH、RSO 、RCOO、ClO、ClO 、ClO 、ClO 、SCN、CN、NO 、SO 2-、HSO 、PO 3-、HPO 2-、HPO 、BF 又はPF を表す。 In the formula (1), Z 1 represents F , Cl , Br , I , OH , R a SO 3 , R a COO , ClO , ClO 2 , ClO 3 , ClO 4 , SCN , CN , NO 3 , SO 4 2− , HSO 4 , PO 4 3− , HPO 4 2− , H 2 PO 4 , BF 4 or PF 6 are represented.
 式(1)中、n1は0以上の整数を表し、原料モノマーの合成の観点から、好ましくは0から8の整数であり、より好ましくは0から2の整数である。 In the formula (1), n1 represents an integer of 0 or more, and is preferably an integer of 0 to 8, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, from the viewpoint of synthesis of raw material monomers.
式(1)中、a1は1以上の整数を表し、b1は0以上の整数を表す。 In formula (1), a1 represents an integer of 1 or more, and b1 represents an integer of 0 or more.
 a1及びb1は、式(1)で表される基の電荷が0となるように選択される。例えば、Yが-CO 、-SO 、-SO 、-PO 、又は-B(R であり、Mが1価の金属カチオン又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないアンモニウムカチオンであり、ZがF、Cl、Br、I、OH、RSO 、RCOO、ClO、ClO 、ClO 、ClO 、SCN、CN、NO 、HSO 、HPO 、BF 又はPF である場合は、a1=b1+1を満たすように選択される。Yが-CO 、-SO 、-SO 、-PO 、又は-B(R --であり、Mが2価の金属カチオンであり、ZがF、Cl、Br、I、OH、RSO 、RCOO、ClO、ClO 、ClO 、ClO 、SCN、CN、NO 、HSO 、HPO 、BF 又はPF である場合は、b1=2×a1-1を満たすように選択される。Yが-CO 、-SO 、-SO 、-PO 、又は-B(R であり、Mが3価の金属カチオンであり、ZがF、Cl、Br、I、OH、RSO 、RCOO、ClO、ClO 、ClO 、ClO 、SCN、CN、NO 、HSO 、HPO 、BF 又はPF である場合は、b1=3×a1-1を満たすように選択される。Yが-CO 、-SO 、-SO 、-PO 、又は-B(R であり、Mが1価の金属カチオン又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないアンモニウムカチオンであり、ZがSO 2-又はHPO 2-である場合には、a1=2×b1+1を満たすように選択される。a1とb1との関係を表す上記のいずれの数式においても、a1は好ましくは1から5の整数であり、より好ましくは1又は2である。 a1 and b1 are selected such that the charge of the group represented by the formula (1) is zero. For example, Y 1 is —CO 2 , —SO 3 , —SO 2 , —PO 3 , or —B (R a ) 3 , and M 1 has a monovalent metal cation or substituent. An ammonium cation with or without Z 1 being F , Cl , Br , I , OH , R a SO 3 , R a COO , ClO , ClO 2 , ClO 3 , When ClO 4 , SCN , CN , NO 3 , HSO 4 , H 2 PO 4 , BF 4 or PF 6 is selected, it is selected to satisfy a1 = b1 + 1. Y 1 is —CO 2 , —SO 3 , —SO 2 , —PO 3 , or —B (R a ) 3 —— , M 1 is a divalent metal cation, and Z 1 is F , Cl , Br , I , OH , R a SO 3 , R a COO , ClO , ClO 2 , ClO 3 , ClO 4 , SCN , CN , NO 3 , HSO 4 , H 2 PO 4 , BF 4 or PF 6 , it is selected so as to satisfy b1 = 2 × a1-1. Y 1 is —CO 2 , —SO 3 , —SO 2 , —PO 3 , or —B (R a ) 3 , M 1 is a trivalent metal cation, and Z 1 is F , Cl , Br , I , OH , R a SO 3 , R a COO , ClO , ClO 2 , ClO 3 , ClO 4 , SCN , CN , NO 3 , In the case of HSO 4 , H 2 PO 4 , BF 4 or PF 6 , it is selected so as to satisfy b1 = 3 × a1-1. Y 1 is —CO 2 , —SO 3 , —SO 2 , —PO 3 , or —B (R a ) 3 , and M 1 has a monovalent metal cation or substituent, or If it is an ammonium cation that does not have it and Z 1 is SO 4 2− or HPO 4 2−, it is selected to satisfy a1 = 2 × b1 + 1. In any of the above mathematical expressions representing the relationship between a1 and b1, a1 is preferably an integer of 1 to 5, more preferably 1 or 2.
 Rは置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数6~50のアリール基を表すが、これらの基が有していてもよい置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。Rとしては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基等の炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基、フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基等の炭素原子数6~30のアリール基等が挙げられる。 Ra represents an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, or an aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent. Examples of the substituent which may be included include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description regarding Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different. As R a , methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, t-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group Carbon number such as alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as decyl group, lauryl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9-anthracenyl group, etc. Examples thereof include 6 to 30 aryl groups.
 前記式(1)で表される基としては、例えば、以下の基が挙げられる。 Examples of the group represented by the formula (1) include the following groups.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 -式(2)で表される基-
 式(2)中、Qで表される2価の有機基としては、前述のQで表される2価の有機基について例示したものと同様の基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、2価の飽和炭化水素基、アリーレン基、アルキレンオキシ基が好ましい。
-Group represented by Formula (2)-
In the formula (2), the divalent organic group represented by Q 2, include the same groups as those exemplified for the divalent organic group represented by Q 1 described above, the raw material monomers for synthesis From the viewpoint of ease, a divalent saturated hydrocarbon group, an arylene group, and an alkyleneoxy group are preferable.
 前記Qで表される2価の有機基の例として挙げた基は置換基を有していてもよく、当該置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 The group exemplified as an example of the divalent organic group represented by Q 2 may have a substituent, and the substituent is the same as the substituent exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. A substituent is mentioned. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(2)中、Yはカルボカチオン、アンモニウムカチオン、ホスホニルカチオン、スルホニルカチオン、又はヨードニウムカチオンを表す。
 カルボカチオンとしては、例えば、
-C
(式中、Rは、同一又は相異なり、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。)で表される基が挙げられる。
 アンモニウムカチオンとしては、例えば、
-N
(式中、Rは、同一又は相異なり、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。)で表される基が挙げられる。
 ホスホニルカチオンとしては、例えば、
-P
(式中、Rは、同一又は相異なり、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。)で表される基が挙げられる。
 スルホニルカチオンとしては、例えば、
-S
(式中、Rは、同一又は相異なり、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。)で表される基が挙げられる。
 ヨードニウムカチオンとしては、例えば、
-I
(式中、Rは、同一又は相異なり、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。)で表される基が挙げられる。
 式(2)中、Yは、原料モノマーの合成の容易さ並びに原料モノマー及びイオン性ポリマーの空気、湿気又は熱に対する安定性の観点からは、カルボカチオン、アンモニウムカチオン、ホスホニルカチオン、スルホニルカチオンが好ましく、アンモニウムカチオンがより好ましい。
In formula (2), Y 2 represents a carbocation, an ammonium cation, a phosphonyl cation, a sulfonyl cation, or an iodonium cation.
As the carbocation, for example,
-C + R 2
(Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
Examples of ammonium cations include:
-N + R 3
(Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
Examples of phosphonyl cations include:
-P + R 3
(Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
Examples of the sulfonyl cation include:
-S + R 2
(Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
As an iodonium cation, for example,
-I + R 2
(Wherein, R is the same or different and represents an alkyl group or an aryl group).
In the formula (2), Y 2 represents a carbocation, an ammonium cation, a phosphonyl cation, a sulfonyl cation from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer and stability of the raw material monomer and the ionic polymer against air, moisture or heat. Are preferred, and ammonium cations are more preferred.
 式(2)中、Zは金属カチオン又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないアンモニウムカチオンを表す。金属カチオンとしては、1価、2価又は3価のイオンが好ましく、Li、Na、K、Cs、Be、Mg、Ca、Ba、Ag、Al、Bi、Cu、Fe、Ga、Mn、Pb、Sn、Ti、V、W、Y、Yb、Zn、Zr等のイオンが挙げられる。また、アンモニウムカチオンが有していてもよい置換基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、t-ブチル基等の炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基が挙げられる。 In formula (2), Z 2 represents a metal cation or an ammonium cation with or without a substituent. As the metal cation, monovalent, divalent or trivalent ions are preferable, and Li, Na, K, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca, Ba, Ag, Al, Bi, Cu, Fe, Ga, Mn, Pb, Examples thereof include ions such as Sn, Ti, V, W, Y, Yb, Zn, and Zr. Examples of the substituent that the ammonium cation may have include alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, isobutyl group, and t-butyl group. Groups.
 式(2)中、MはF、Cl、Br、I、OH、RSO 、RCOO、ClO、ClO 、ClO 、ClO 、SCN、CN、NO 、SO 2-、HSO 、PO 3-、HPO 2-、HPO 、BF 又はPF を表す。 In the formula (2), M 2 represents F , Cl , Br , I , OH , R b SO 3 , R b COO , ClO , ClO 2 , ClO 3 , ClO 4 , SCN , CN , NO 3 , SO 4 2− , HSO 4 , PO 4 3− , HPO 4 2− , H 2 PO 4 , BF 4 or PF 6 are represented.
 式(2)中、n2は0以上の整数を表し、好ましくは0から6の整数であり、より好ましくは0から2の整数である。 In formula (2), n2 represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 2.
 式(2)中、a2は1以上の整数を表し、b2は、0以上の整数を表す。 In the formula (2), a2 represents an integer of 1 or more, and b2 represents an integer of 0 or more.
 a2及びb2は、式(2)で表される基の電荷が0となるように選択される。例えば、MがF、Cl、Br、I、OH、RSO 、RCOO、ClO、ClO 、ClO 、ClO 、SCN、CN、NO 、HSO 、HPO 、BF 又はPF である場合、Zが1価の金属イオン又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないアンモニウムイオンであれば、a2=b2+1を満たすように選択され、Zが2価の金属イオンであれば、a2=2×b2+1を満たすように選択され、Zが3価の金属イオンであれば、a2=3×b2+1を満たすように選択される。MがSO 2-、HPO 2-である場合、Zが1価の金属イオン又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないアンモニウムイオンであれば、b2=2×a2-1を満たすように選択され、Zが3価の金属イオンであれば、2×a2=3×b2+1の関係を満たすように選択される。a2とb2との関係を表す上記のいずれの数式においても、a2は好ましくは1から3の整数であり、より好ましくは1又は2である。 a2 and b2 are selected such that the charge of the group represented by the formula (2) is zero. For example, M 2 is F , Cl , Br , I , OH , R b SO 3 , R b COO , ClO , ClO 2 , ClO 3 , ClO 4 , SCN , CN -, nO 3 -, HSO 4 -, H 2 PO 4 -, BF 4 - or PF 6 - if it is, if an ammonium ion Z 2 has no or have a monovalent metal ion or a substituent , are selected so as to satisfy a2 = b2 + 1, if Z 2 is a divalent metal ion, it is selected so as to satisfy a2 = 2 × b2 + 1, if Z 2 is a trivalent metal ion, a2 = 3 Xb2 + 1 is selected to satisfy. When M 2 is SO 4 2− or HPO 4 2− , if Z 2 is a monovalent metal ion or an ammonium ion with or without a substituent, b2 = 2 × a2-1 is satisfied. If Z 2 is a trivalent metal ion, it is selected so as to satisfy the relationship of 2 × a2 = 3 × b2 + 1. In any of the above formulas representing the relationship between a2 and b2, a2 is preferably an integer from 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2.
 Rは置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さない炭素原子数6~50のアリール基を表すが、これらの基が有していてもよい置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。Rとしては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基等の炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基、フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基等の炭素原子数6~30のアリール基等が挙げられる。 R b represents an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent or an aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, and these groups have Examples of the substituent which may be included include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description regarding Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different. R b is methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl Carbon number such as alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as decyl group, lauryl group, phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9-anthracenyl group, etc. Examples thereof include 6 to 30 aryl groups.
 前記式(2)で表される基としては、例えば、以下の基が挙げられる。 Examples of the group represented by the formula (2) include the following groups.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 -式(3)で表される基-
 式(3)中、Qで表される2価の有機基としては、前述のQで表される2価の有機基について例示したものと同様の基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、2価の飽和炭化水素基、アリーレン基、アルキレンオキシ基が好ましい。
-Group represented by Formula (3)-
In the formula (3), examples of the divalent organic group represented by Q 3 include the same groups as those exemplified for the divalent organic group represented by Q 1 described above. From the viewpoint of ease, a divalent saturated hydrocarbon group, an arylene group, and an alkyleneoxy group are preferable.
 前記Qで表される2価の有機基の例として挙げた基は置換基を有していてもよく、当該置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 The group mentioned as an example of the divalent organic group represented by Q 3 may have a substituent, and the substituent is the same as the substituent exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. A substituent is mentioned. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 前記Qで表される2価の有機基としては、-(CH)-で表される基であることが好ましい。 The divalent organic group represented by Q 3 is preferably a group represented by — (CH 2 ) —.
 n3は0以上の整数を表し、好ましくは0から20の整数であり、より好ましくは0から8の整数である。 N3 represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 8.
 式(3)中、Yは-CN又は式(4)~(12)のいずれかで表される基を表す。 In Formula (3), Y 3 represents —CN or a group represented by any one of Formulas (4) to (12).
 式(4)~(12)中、R’で表される2価の炭化水素基としては、メチレン基、エチレン基、1,2-プロピレン基、1,3-プロピレン基、1,2-ブチレン基、1,3-ブチレン基、1,4-ブチレン基、1,5-ペンチレン基、1,6-ヘキシレン基、1,9-ノニレン基、1,12-ドデシレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50の2価の飽和炭化水素基;エテニレン基、プロペニレン基、3-ブテニレン基、2-ブテニレン基、2-ペンテニレン基、2-ヘキセニレン基、2-ノネニレン基、2-ドデセニレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数2~50のアルケニレン基、及び、エチニレン基を含む、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数2~50の2価の不飽和炭化水素基;シクロプロピレン基、シクロブチレン基、シクロペンチレン基、シクロへキシレン基、シクロノニレン基、シクロドデシレン基、ノルボニレン基、アダマンチレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数3~50の2価の環状飽和炭化水素基;1,3-フェニレン基、1,4-フェニレン基、1,4-ナフチレン基、1,5-ナフチレン基、2,6-ナフチレン基、ビフェニル-4,4’-ジイル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~50のアリーレン基;メチレンオキシ基、エチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基、ブチレンオキシ基、ペンチレンオキシ基、ヘキシレンオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルキレンオキシ基等が挙げられる。 In the formulas (4) to (12), the divalent hydrocarbon group represented by R ′ includes a methylene group, an ethylene group, a 1,2-propylene group, a 1,3-propylene group, and a 1,2-butylene. Group, 1,3-butylene group, 1,4-butylene group, 1,5-pentylene group, 1,6-hexylene group, 1,9-nonylene group, 1,12-dodecylene group, among these groups A divalent saturated hydrocarbon group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a substituent; an ethenylene group, a propenylene group, a 3-butenylene group; Substituents such as 2-butenylene group, 2-pentenylene group, 2-hexenylene group, 2-nonenylene group, 2-dodecenylene group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc. 2 to 50 carbon atoms with or without A divalent unsaturated hydrocarbon group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, including or not having a substituent, including a lukenylene group and an ethynylene group; a cyclopropylene group, a cyclobutylene group, a cyclopentylene group, a cyclohexane Number of carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a xylene group, cyclononylene group, cyclododecylene group, norbornylene group, adamantylene group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. 3 to 50 divalent cyclic saturated hydrocarbon groups; 1,3-phenylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-naphthylene group, 1,5-naphthylene group, 2,6-naphthylene group, biphenyl- An arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, such as a 4,4′-diyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent; A substituent such as a nonoxy group, an ethyleneoxy group, a propyleneoxy group, a butyleneoxy group, a pentyleneoxy group, a hexyleneoxy group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. And an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms which may or may not be included.
 前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(4)~(12)中、R’’で表される1価の炭化水素基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基等が挙げられる。イオン性ポリマーの溶解性の観点からは、メチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基が好ましい。前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the formulas (4) to (12), the monovalent hydrocarbon group represented by R ″ is methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, t -Butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, lauryl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like, An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9-anthracenyl group, and these groups; And an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a substituent. From the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, and a 2-naphthyl group are preferable. Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(5)中、R’’’で表される3価の炭化水素基としては、メタントリイル基、エタントリイル基、1,2,3-プロパントリイル基、1,2,4-ブタントリイル基、1,2,5-ペンタントリイル基、1,3,5-ペンタントリイル基、1,2,6-ヘキサントリイル基、1,3,6-ヘキサントリイル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキルトリイル基;1,2,3-ベンゼントリイル基、1,2,4-ベンゼントリイル基、1,3,5-ベンゼントリイル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基等が挙げられる。イオン性ポリマーの溶解性の観点からは、メタントリイル基、エタントリイル基、1,2,4-ベンゼントリイル基、1,3,5-ベンゼントリイル基が好ましい。前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the formula (5), the trivalent hydrocarbon group represented by R ′ ″ includes a methanetriyl group, an ethanetriyl group, a 1,2,3-propanetriyl group, a 1,2,4-butanetriyl group, 1 , 2,5-pentanetriyl group, 1,3,5-pentanetriyl group, 1,2,6-hexanetriyl group, 1,3,6-hexanetriyl group, at least of these groups An alkyltriyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group in which one hydrogen atom is substituted with a substituent; 1,2,3-benzenetriyl group, 1,2 , 4-benzenetriyl group, 1,3,5-benzenetriyl group, or a group obtained by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of these groups with a substituent. Examples thereof include aryl groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. From the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer, a methanetriyl group, an ethanetriyl group, a 1,2,4-benzenetriyl group, and a 1,3,5-benzenetriyl group are preferable. Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(4)~(12)中、Rとしては、イオン性ポリマーの溶解性の観点からは、メチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基が好ましい In formulas (4) to (12), R c is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group or a 2-naphthyl group from the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer.
 式(4)及び式(5)中、a3は1以上の整数を表し、3~10の整数が好ましい。式(6)~(12)中、a4は0以上の整数を表す。式(6)においては、a4は、0~30の整数が好ましく、3~20の整数がより好ましい。式(7)~(10)においては、a4は、0~10の整数が好ましく、0~5の整数がより好ましい。式(11)においては、a4は、0~20の整数が好ましく、3~20の整数がより好ましい。式(12)においては、a4は、0~20の整数が好ましく、0~10の整数がより好ましい。 In the formulas (4) and (5), a3 represents an integer of 1 or more, and an integer of 3 to 10 is preferable. In the formulas (6) to (12), a4 represents an integer of 0 or more. In the formula (6), a4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 30, and more preferably an integer of 3 to 20. In the formulas (7) to (10), a4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 10, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 5. In the formula (11), a4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 3 to 20. In the formula (12), a4 is preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 10.
 Yとしては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、-CN、式(4)で表される基、式(6)で表される基、式(10)で表される基、式(11)で表される基が好ましく、式(4)で表される基、式(6)で表される基、式(11)で表される基がより好ましく、以下の基が特に好ましい。 Y 3 represents —CN, a group represented by the formula (4), a group represented by the formula (6), a group represented by the formula (10), from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer. A group represented by the formula (11) is preferable, a group represented by the formula (4), a group represented by the formula (6), a group represented by the formula (11) are more preferable, and the following groups are particularly preferable: preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 -イオン性ポリマー中の構造単位-
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーは、前記式(13)で表される構造単位、前記式(15)で表される構造単位、前記式(17)で表される構造単位、前記式(20)で表される構造単位を有することが好ましく、前記構造単位を全構造単位中、15~100モル%有するイオン性ポリマーであることがより好ましい。
-Structural units in ionic polymers-
The ionic polymer used in the present invention includes a structural unit represented by the formula (13), a structural unit represented by the formula (15), a structural unit represented by the formula (17), and the formula (20). ), And more preferably an ionic polymer having 15 to 100 mol% of the structural units in all the structural units.
 ・式(13)で表される構造単位
 式(13)中、Rは式(14)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、ArはR以外の置換基を有し又は有さない(2+n4)価の芳香族基を表し、n4は1以上の整数を表す。
Structural unit represented by formula (13) In formula (13), R 1 is a monovalent group including a group represented by formula (14), and Ar 1 has a substituent other than R 1. Or it represents the (2 + n4) valent aromatic group which does not have, and n4 represents an integer greater than or equal to 1.
 式(14)で表される基は、Arに直接結合していてもよく、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、ノニレン基、ドデシレン基、シクロプロピレン基、シクロブチレン基、シクロペンチレン基、シクロへキシレン基、シクロノニレン基、シクロドデシレン基、ノルボニレン基、アダマンチレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルキレン基;オキシメチレン基、オキシエチレン基、オキシプロピレン基、オキシブチレン基、オキシペンチレン基、オキシヘキシレン基、オキシノニレン基、オキシドデシレン基、シクロプロピレンオキシ基、シクロブチレンオキシ基、シクロペンチレンオキシ基、シクロへキシレンオキシ基、シクロノニレンオキシ基、シクロドデシレンオキシ基、ノルボニレンオキシ基、アダマンチレンオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のオキシアルキレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないイミノ基;置換基を有し又は有さないシリレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないエテニレン基;エチニレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないメタントリイル基;酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を介してArに結合していてもよい。 The group represented by the formula (14) may be directly bonded to Ar 1, and includes a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, a nonylene group, a dodecylene group, a cyclopropylene group, Substitution, such as a cyclobutylene group, a cyclopentylene group, a cyclohexylene group, a cyclononylene group, a cyclododecylene group, a norbornylene group, an adamantylene group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent Alkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a group; oxymethylene group, oxyethylene group, oxypropylene group, oxybutylene group, oxypentylene group, oxyhexylene group, oxynonylene group, oxiddecylene Group, cyclopropyleneoxy group, cyclobutyleneoxy group, cyclopentyleneoxy group, Chlohexyleneoxy group, cyclononyleneoxy group, cyclododecyleneoxy group, norbornyleneoxy group, adamantyleneoxy group, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc. An oxyalkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; an imino group with or without a substituent; a silylene group with or without a substituent; with a substituent An ethynylene group; an ethynylene group; a methanetriyl group with or without a substituent; and an Ar 1 through a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom.
 前記ArはR以外の置換基を有していてもよい。当該置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Ar 1 may have a substituent other than R 1 . Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 前記Arが有するR以外の置換基としては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点から、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、カルボキシル基又は置換カルボキシル基であることが好ましい。 The substituent other than R 1 possessed by Ar 1 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a carboxyl group, or a substituted carboxyl group from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer.
 式(13)中、n4は1以上の整数を表し、好ましくは1から4の整数であり、より好ましくは1から3の整数である。 In the formula (13), n4 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
 式(13)中のArで表される(2+n4)価の芳香族基としては、(2+n4)価の芳香族炭化水素基、(2+n4)価の芳香族複素環基が挙げられ、炭素原子のみ、又は、炭素原子と、水素原子、窒素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選ばれる1つ以上の原子とからなる(2+n4)価の芳香族基が好ましい。該(2+n4)価の芳香族基としては、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、1,2-ジアジン環、1,3-ジアジン環、1,4-ジアジン環、1,3,5-トリアジン環、フラン環、ピロール環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、アザジアゾール環等の単環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n4)個除いた(2+n4)価の基;該単環式芳香環からなる群から選ばれる二つ以上の環が縮合した縮合多環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n4)個除いた(2+n4)価の基;該単環式芳香環及び該縮合多環式芳香環からなる群より選ばれる二つ以上の芳香環を、単結合、エテニレン基又はエチニレン基で連結してなる芳香環集合から水素原子を(2+n4)個除いた(2+n4)価の基;該縮合多環式芳香環又は該芳香環集合の隣り合う2つの芳香環をメチレン基、エチレン基、カルボニル基等の2価の基で橋かけした架橋を有する有橋多環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n4)個除いた(2+n4)価の基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the (2 + n4) -valent aromatic group represented by Ar 1 in the formula (13) include a (2 + n4) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a (2 + n4) -valent aromatic heterocyclic group. Or a (2 + n4) -valent aromatic group consisting of carbon atoms and one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms. Examples of the (2 + n4) -valent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a 1,3,5-triazine ring, and a furan ring. , A (2 + n4) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms from a monocyclic aromatic ring such as pyrrole ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, azadiazole ring, etc .; selected from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring A (2 + n4) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms from a condensed polycyclic aromatic ring in which two or more rings are condensed; from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring and the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring A (2 + n4) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms from an aromatic ring assembly formed by connecting two or more selected aromatic rings with a single bond, an ethenylene group or an ethynylene group; the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring Or two adjacent aromatic ring assemblies A (2 + n4) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms from a bridged polycyclic aromatic ring having a bridge in which the aromatic ring is bridged by a divalent group such as a methylene group, an ethylene group, or a carbonyl group. Can be mentioned.
 単環式芳香環としては、例えば、以下の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 縮合多環式芳香環としては、例えば、以下の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 芳香環集合としては、例えば、以下の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include the following rings.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 有橋多環式芳香環としては、例えば、以下の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the Aribashi polycyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 前記(2+n4)価の芳香族基としては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点から、式1~14、26~29、37~39又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n4)個除いた基が好ましく、式1~6、8、13、26、27、37又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n4)個除いた基がより好ましく、式1、37又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n4)個除いた基がさらに好ましい。 The (2 + n4) -valent aromatic group includes (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by the formulas 1 to 14, 26 to 29, 37 to 39, or 41 from the viewpoint of easy synthesis of the raw material monomer. A group obtained by removing (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by the formulas 1 to 6, 8, 13, 26, 27, 37, or 41 is more preferred, and the group represented by the formula 1, 37, or 41 is preferred. More preferred is a group in which (2 + n4) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the ring formed.
 式(14)中、Rで表される(1+m1+m2)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m1+m2)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m1+m2)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m1+m2)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m1+m2)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m1+m2)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m1+m2)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m1+m2)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m1+m2)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (14), examples of the (1 + m1 + m2) -valent organic group represented by R 2 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m1 + m2) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl An aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent A group in which (m1 + m2) hydrogen atoms are removed; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, A cyclopentyloxy group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like, A group obtained by removing (m1 + m2) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; (m1 + m2) hydrogen atoms from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Excluded group: a group obtained by removing (m1 + m2) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, a group in which (m1 + m2) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group, a group in which (m1 + m2) hydrogen atoms are removed from an aryl group, and an alkoxy group (m1 + m2) Groups in which one hydrogen atom has been removed are preferred.
 前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 ・式(15)で表される構造単位
 式(15)中、Rは式(16)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、ArはR以外の置換基を有し又は有さない(2+n5)価の芳香族基を表し、n5は1以上の整数を表す。
Structural unit represented by formula (15) In formula (15), R 3 is a monovalent group containing a group represented by formula (16), and Ar 2 has a substituent other than R 3. Alternatively, it represents a (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group not present, and n5 represents an integer of 1 or more.
 式(16)で表される基は、Arに直接結合していてもよく、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、ノニレン基、ドデシレン基、シクロプロピレン基、シクロブチレン基、シクロペンチレン基、シクロへキシレン基、シクロノニレン基、シクロドデシレン基、ノルボニレン基、アダマンチレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルキレン基;オキシメチレン基、オキシエチレン基、オキシプロピレン基、オキシブチレン基、オキシペンチレン基、オキシヘキシレン基、オキシノニレン基、オキシドデシレン基、シクロプロピレンオキシ基、シクロブチレンオキシ基、シクロペンチレンオキシ基、シクロへキシレンオキシ基、シクロノニレンオキシ基、シクロドデシレンオキシ基、ノルボニレンオキシ基、アダマンチレンオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のオキシアルキレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないイミノ基;置換基を有し又は有さないシリレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないエテニレン基;エチニレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないメタントリイル基;酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を介してArに結合していてもよい。 The group represented by the formula (16) may be directly bonded to Ar 2, and includes a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, a nonylene group, a dodecylene group, a cyclopropylene group, Substitution, such as a cyclobutylene group, a cyclopentylene group, a cyclohexylene group, a cyclononylene group, a cyclododecylene group, a norbornylene group, an adamantylene group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent Alkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a group; oxymethylene group, oxyethylene group, oxypropylene group, oxybutylene group, oxypentylene group, oxyhexylene group, oxynonylene group, oxiddecylene Group, cyclopropyleneoxy group, cyclobutyleneoxy group, cyclopentyleneoxy group, Chlohexyleneoxy group, cyclononyleneoxy group, cyclododecyleneoxy group, norbornyleneoxy group, adamantyleneoxy group, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc. An oxyalkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; an imino group with or without a substituent; a silylene group with or without a substituent; with a substituent An ethynylene group; an ethynylene group; a methanetriyl group with or without a substituent; and an Ar 2 through a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom.
 前記ArはR以外の置換基を有していてもよい。当該置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Ar 2 may have a substituent other than R 3 . Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 前記Arが有するR以外の置換基としては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点から、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、カルボキシル基又は置換カルボキシル基であることが好ましい。 The substituent other than R 3 possessed by Ar 2 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a carboxyl group or a substituted carboxyl group from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer.
 式(15)中、n5は1以上の整数を表し、好ましくは1から4の整数であり、より好ましくは1から3の整数である。 In the formula (15), n5 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
 式(15)中のArで表される(2+n5)価の芳香族基としては、(2+n5)価の芳香族炭化水素基、(2+n5)価の芳香族複素環基が挙げられ、炭素原子のみ、又は、炭素原子と、水素原子、窒素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選ばれる1つ以上の原子とからなる(2+n5)価の芳香族基が好ましい。該(2+n5)価の芳香族基としては、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、1,2-ジアジン環、1,3-ジアジン環、1,4-ジアジン環、1,3,5-トリアジン環、フラン環、ピロール環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、アザジアゾール環等の単環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n5)個除いた(2+n5)価の基;該単環式芳香環からなる群から選ばれる二つ以上の環が縮合した縮合多環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n5)個除いた(2+n5)価の基;該単環式芳香環及び該縮合多環式芳香環からなる群より選ばれる二つ以上の芳香環を、単結合、エテニレン基又はエチニレン基で連結してなる芳香環集合から水素原子を(2+n5)個除いた(2+n5)価の基;該縮合多環式芳香環又は該芳香環集合の隣り合う2つの芳香環をメチレン基、エチレン基、カルボニル基等の2価の基で橋かけした架橋を有する有橋多環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n5)個除いた(2+n5)価の基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group represented by Ar 2 in the formula (15) include a (2 + n5) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a (2 + n5) -valent aromatic heterocyclic group. Or a (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group consisting of carbon atoms and one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms. Examples of the (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a 1,3,5-triazine ring, and a furan ring. , A (2 + n5) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms from a monocyclic aromatic ring such as pyrrole ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, azadiazole ring, etc .; selected from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring A (2 + n5) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms from a condensed polycyclic aromatic ring in which two or more rings are condensed; from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring and the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring A (2 + n5) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms from an aromatic ring assembly formed by connecting two or more selected aromatic rings with a single bond, an ethenylene group or an ethynylene group; the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring Or two adjacent aromatic ring assemblies A (2 + n5) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms from a bridged polycyclic aromatic ring having a bridge in which the aromatic ring is bridged by a divalent group such as a methylene group, an ethylene group, or a carbonyl group. Can be mentioned.
 単環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式1~12で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by formulas 1 to 12 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
 縮合多環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式13~27で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by formulas 13 to 27 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
 芳香環集合としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式28~36で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include rings represented by formulas 28 to 36 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
 有橋多環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式37~44で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the bridged polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by Formulas 37 to 44 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
 前記(2+n5)価の芳香族基としては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点から、式1~14、26~29、37~39又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n5)個除いた基が好ましく、式1~6、8、13、26、27、37又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n5)個除いた基がより好ましく、式1、37又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n5)個除いた基がさらに好ましい。 The (2 + n5) -valent aromatic group includes (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by the formulas 1 to 14, 26 to 29, 37 to 39, or 41 from the viewpoint of easy synthesis of the raw material monomer. A group obtained by removing (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by formulas 1 to 6, 8, 13, 26, 27, 37, or 41 is more preferred, and a group represented by formula 1, 37, or 41 is preferred. And more preferably a group in which (2 + n5) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the ring.
 式(16)中、m3及びm4はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表す。 In formula (16), m3 and m4 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more.
 式(16)中、Rで表される(1+m3+m4)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m3+m4)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m3+m4)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m3+m4)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m3+m4)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m3+m4)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m3+m4)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m3+m4)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m3+m4)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (16), examples of the (1 + m3 + m4) -valent organic group represented by R 4 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m3 + m4) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl An aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent A group in which (m3 + m4) hydrogen atoms are removed; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, A cyclopentyloxy group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like, A group obtained by removing (m3 + m4) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; (m3 + m4) hydrogen atoms from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom; Excluded group: a group obtained by removing (m3 + m4) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, a group in which (m3 + m4) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group, a group in which (m3 + m4) hydrogen atoms are removed from an aryl group, and an alkoxy group (m3 + m4) Groups in which one hydrogen atom has been removed are preferred.
 前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 ・式(17)で表される構造単位
 式(17)中、Rは式(18)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、Rは式(19)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、ArはR及びR以外の置換基を有し又は有さない(2+n6+n7)価の芳香族基を表し、n6及びn7はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表す。
Structural unit represented by formula (17) In formula (17), R 5 is a monovalent group including a group represented by formula (18), and R 6 is a group represented by formula (19). Ar 3 represents a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group having or not having a substituent other than R 5 and R 6 , and n6 and n7 are each independently an integer of 1 or more Represents.
 式(18)で表される基及び式(19)で表される基は、Arに直接結合していてもよく、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、ノニレン基、ドデシレン基、シクロプロピレン基、シクロブチレン基、シクロペンチレン基、シクロへキシレン基、シクロノニレン基、シクロドデシレン基、ノルボニレン基、アダマンチレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルキレン基;オキシメチレン基、オキシエチレン基、オキシプロピレン基、オキシブチレン基、オキシペンチレン基、オキシヘキシレン基、オキシノニレン基、オキシドデシレン基、シクロプロピレンオキシ基、シクロブチレンオキシ基、シクロペンチレンオキシ基、シクロへキシレンオキシ基、シクロノニレンオキシ基、シクロドデシレンオキシ基、ノルボニレンオキシ基、アダマンチレンオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のオキシアルキレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないイミノ基;置換基を有し又は有さないシリレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないエテニレン基;エチニレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないメタントリイル基;酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を介してArに結合していてもよい。 The group represented by the formula (18) and the group represented by the formula (19) may be directly bonded to Ar 3, and include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, Nonylene group, dodecylene group, cyclopropylene group, cyclobutylene group, cyclopentylene group, cyclohexylene group, cyclononylene group, cyclododecylene group, norbornylene group, adamantylene group, and at least one hydrogen atom in these groups An alkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group substituted with a substituent; an oxymethylene group, an oxyethylene group, an oxypropylene group, an oxybutylene group, an oxypentylene group, an oxy Hexylene, oxynonylene, oxide decylene, cyclopropyleneoxy, cyclobutyleneoxy, Clopentyleneoxy group, cyclohexyleneoxy group, cyclononyleneoxy group, cyclododecyleneoxy group, norbornyleneoxy group, adamantyleneoxy group, and at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted An oxyalkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group substituted with a group; an imino group with or without a substituent; a silylene with or without a substituent An ethenylene group with or without a substituent; an ethynylene group; a methanetriyl group with or without a substituent; and bonded to Ar 3 through a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom. May be.
 前記ArはR及びR以外の置換基を有していてもよい。当該置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Ar 3 may have a substituent other than R 5 and R 6 . Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 前記Arが有するR及びR以外の置換基としては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点から、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、カルボキシル基又は置換カルボキシル基であることが好ましい。 The substituent other than R 5 and R 6 possessed by Ar 3 is an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a carboxyl group, or a substituted carboxyl group from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer. Is preferred.
 式(17)中、n6は1以上の整数を表し、好ましくは1から4の整数であり、より好ましくは1から3の整数である。 In formula (17), n6 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
 式(17)中、n7は1以上の整数を表し、好ましくは1から4の整数であり、より好ましくは1から3の整数である。 In formula (17), n7 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
 式(17)中のArで表される(2+n6+n7)価の芳香族基としては、(2+n6+n7)価の芳香族炭化水素基、(2+n6+n7)価の芳香族複素環基が挙げられ、炭素原子のみ、又は、炭素原子と、水素原子、窒素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選ばれる1つ以上の原子とからなる(2+n6+n7)価の芳香族基が好ましい。該(2+n6+n7)価の芳香族基としては、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、1,2-ジアジン環、1,3-ジアジン環、1,4-ジアジン環、フラン環、ピロール環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環等の単環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n6+n7)個除いた(2+n6+n7)価の基;該単環式芳香環からなる群から選ばれる二つ以上の環が縮合した縮合多環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n6+n7)個除いた(2+n6+n7)価の基;該単環式芳香環及び該縮合多環式芳香環からなる群より選ばれる二つ以上の芳香環を、単結合、エテニレン基又はエチニレン基で連結してなる芳香環集合から水素原子を(2+n6+n7)個除いた(2+n6+n7)価の基;該縮合多環式芳香環又は該芳香環集合の隣り合う2つの芳香環をメチレン基、エチレン基、カルボニル基等の2価の基で橋かけした架橋を有する有橋多環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n6+n7)個除いた(2+n6+n7)価の基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group represented by Ar 3 in the formula (17) include a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic heterocyclic group, and a carbon atom. Or a (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group consisting of carbon atoms and one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms. Examples of the (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, and an imidazole ring. A (2 + n6 + n7) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from a monocyclic aromatic ring such as an oxazole ring; a condensed polycycle in which two or more rings selected from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic rings are condensed A (2 + n6 + n7) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from the formula aromatic ring; two or more aromatic rings selected from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring and the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring, , A (2 + n6 + n7) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from an aromatic ring assembly linked by an ethenylene group or an ethynylene group; the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring or two adjacent aromatic ring assemblies (2 + n6 + n7) -valent groups obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from a bridged polycyclic aromatic ring having a bridge formed by bridging an aromatic ring with a divalent group such as a methylene group, an ethylene group, or a carbonyl group. It is done.
 単環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式1~5、式7~10で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by Formulas 1 to 5 and Formulas 7 to 10 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
 縮合多環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式13~27で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by formulas 13 to 27 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
 芳香環集合としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式28~36で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include rings represented by formulas 28 to 36 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
 有橋多環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式37~44で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the bridged polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by Formulas 37 to 44 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
 前記(2+n6+n7)価の芳香族基としては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点から、式1~5、7~10、13、14、26~29、37~39又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n6+n7)個除いた基が好ましく、式1、37又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n6+n7)個除いた基がより好ましく、式1、38又は42で表される環から水素原子を(2+n6+n7)個除いた基がさらに好ましい。 The (2 + n6 + n7) -valent aromatic group is a ring represented by the formula 1 to 5, 7 to 10, 13, 14, 26 to 29, 37 to 39 or 41 from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer. A group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from the ring is preferred, and a group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by formula 1, 37 or 41 is more preferred, represented by formula 1, 38 or 42 A group obtained by removing (2 + n6 + n7) hydrogen atoms from the ring is more preferable.
 式(18)中、Rは単結合又は(1+m5)価の有機基を表し、(1+m5)価の有機基であることが好ましい。 In Formula (18), R 7 represents a single bond or a (1 + m5) -valent organic group, and is preferably a (1 + m5) -valent organic group.
 式(18)中、Rで表される(1+m5)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基からm5個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基からm5個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基からm5個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基からm5個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基からm5個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基からm5個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基からm5個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基からm5個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (18), examples of the (1 + m5) -valent organic group represented by R 7 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which an m5 hydrogen atom is removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, M5-hydrogen from an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, such as a 9-anthracenyl group or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. original Groups other than the above: methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group A group having a substituent, such as a group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing m5 hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms; a group obtained by removing m5 hydrogen atoms from an amino group having a substituent containing carbon atoms; a substituent containing carbon atoms; And a group obtained by removing m5 hydrogen atoms from the silyl group possessed, and from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, an alkyl group Et m5 groups excluding the hydrogen atom, a group remaining after removing m5 hydrogen atoms from an aryl group, a group obtained by removing m5 hydrogen atoms from an amino group.
 前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(18)中、m5は1以上の整数を表し、ただし、Rが単結合のときm5は1を表す。 In formula (18), m5 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that m5 represents 1 when R 7 is a single bond.
 式(19)中、Rは単結合又は(1+m6)価の有機基を表し、(1+m6)価の有機基であることが好ましい。 In Formula (19), R 8 represents a single bond or a (1 + m6) -valent organic group, and is preferably a (1 + m6) -valent organic group.
 式(19)中、Rで表される(1+m6)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基からm6個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基からm6個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基からm6個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基からm6個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基からm6個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基からm6個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基からm6個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基からm6個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (19), examples of the (1 + m6) -valent organic group represented by R 8 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which an m6 hydrogen atom is removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, M6-hydrogen from an aryl group having 6-30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a 9-anthracenyl group or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent original Groups other than the above: methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group A group having a substituent, such as a group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing m6 hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms; a group obtained by removing m6 hydrogen atoms from an amino group having a substituent containing carbon atoms; a substituent containing carbon atoms; And a group obtained by removing m6 hydrogen atoms from the silyl group possessed, and from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, an alkyl group Et m6 groups excluding the hydrogen atom, a group remaining after removing m6 hydrogen atoms from an aryl group, a group obtained by removing m6 hydrogen atoms from an amino group.
 前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(19)中、m6は1以上の整数を表し、ただし、Rが単結合のときm6は1を表す。 In Formula (19), m6 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that m6 represents 1 when R 8 is a single bond.
 ・式(20)で表される構造単位
 式(20)中、Rは式(21)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、R10は式(22)で表される基を含む1価の基であり、ArはR及びR10以外の置換基を有し又は有さない(2+n8+n9)価の芳香族基を表し、n8及びn9はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表す。
Structural unit represented by formula (20) In formula (20), R 9 is a monovalent group including a group represented by formula (21), and R 10 is a group represented by formula (22). Ar 4 represents a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group having or not having a substituent other than R 9 and R 10 , and n8 and n9 are each independently an integer of 1 or more Represents.
 式(21)で表される基及び式(22)で表される基は、Arに直接結合していてもよく、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、ノニレン基、ドデシレン基、シクロプロピレン基、シクロブチレン基、シクロペンチレン基、シクロへキシレン基、シクロノニレン基、シクロドデシレン基、ノルボニレン基、アダマンチレン基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルキレン基;オキシメチレン基、オキシエチレン基、オキシプロピレン基、オキシブチレン基、オキシペンチレン基、オキシヘキシレン基、オキシノニレン基、オキシドデシレン基、シクロプロピレンオキシ基、シクロブチレンオキシ基、シクロペンチレンオキシ基、シクロへキシレンオキシ基、シクロノニレンオキシ基、シクロドデシレンオキシ基、ノルボニレンオキシ基、アダマンチレンオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のオキシアルキレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないイミノ基;置換基を有し又は有さないシリレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないエテニレン基;エチニレン基;置換基を有し又は有さないメタントリイル基;酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を介してArに結合していてもよい。 The group represented by the formula (21) and the group represented by the formula (22) may be directly bonded to Ar 4, and include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, Nonylene group, dodecylene group, cyclopropylene group, cyclobutylene group, cyclopentylene group, cyclohexylene group, cyclononylene group, cyclododecylene group, norbornylene group, adamantylene group, and at least one hydrogen atom in these groups An alkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group substituted with a substituent; an oxymethylene group, an oxyethylene group, an oxypropylene group, an oxybutylene group, an oxypentylene group, an oxy Hexylene, oxynonylene, oxide decylene, cyclopropyleneoxy, cyclobutyleneoxy, Clopentyleneoxy group, cyclohexyleneoxy group, cyclononyleneoxy group, cyclododecyleneoxy group, norbornyleneoxy group, adamantyleneoxy group, and at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted An oxyalkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group substituted with a group; an imino group with or without a substituent; a silylene with or without a substituent An ethenylene group with or without a substituent; an ethynylene group; a methanetriyl group with or without a substituent; and bonded to Ar 4 through a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom. May be.
 前記ArはR及びR10以外の置換基を有していてもよい。当該置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Ar 4 may have a substituent other than R 9 and R 10 . Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 前記Arが有するR及びR10以外の置換基としては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点から、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、カルボキシル基又は置換カルボキシル基であることが好ましい。 The substituent other than R 9 and R 10 of Ar 4 is an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a carboxyl group, or a substituted carboxyl group from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer. Is preferred.
 式(20)中、n8は1以上の整数を表し、好ましくは1から4の整数であり、より好ましくは1から3の整数である。 In formula (20), n8 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
 式(20)中、n9は1以上の整数を表し、好ましくは1から4の整数であり、より好ましくは1から3の整数である。 In formula (20), n9 represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
 式(20)中のArで表される(2+n8+n9)価の芳香族基としては、(2+n8+n9)価の芳香族炭化水素基、(2+n8+n9)価の芳香族複素環基が挙げられ、炭素原子のみ、又は、炭素原子と、水素原子、窒素原子及び酸素原子からなる群から選ばれる1つ以上の原子とからなる(2+n8+n9)価の芳香族基が好ましい。該(2+n8+n9)価の芳香族基としては、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、1,2-ジアジン環、1,3-ジアジン環、1,4-ジアジン環、フラン環、ピロール環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環等の単環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n8+n9)個除いた(2+n8+n9)価の基;該単環式芳香環からなる群から選ばれる二つ以上の環が縮合した縮合多環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n8+n9)個除いた(2+n8+n9)価の基;該単環式芳香環及び該縮合多環式芳香環からなる群より選ばれる二つ以上の芳香環を、単結合、エテニレン基又はエチニレン基で連結してなる芳香環集合から水素原子を(2+n8+n9)個除いた(2+n8+n9)価の基;該縮合多環式芳香環又は該芳香環集合の隣り合う2つの芳香環をメチレン基、エチレン基、カルボニル基等の2価の基で橋かけした架橋を有する有橋多環式芳香環から水素原子を(2+n8+n9)個除いた(2+n8+n9)価の基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group represented by Ar 4 in the formula (20) include a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic heterocyclic group. Or a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group consisting of carbon atoms and one or more atoms selected from the group consisting of hydrogen atoms, nitrogen atoms and oxygen atoms. Examples of the (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, and an imidazole ring. A (2 + n8 + n9) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n8 + n9) hydrogen atoms from a monocyclic aromatic ring such as a condensed polycyclic aromatic ring in which two or more rings selected from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic rings are condensed A (2 + n8 + n9) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n8 + n9) hydrogen atoms from the above; two or more aromatic rings selected from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring and the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring are bonded to a single bond or an ethenylene group Or a (2 + n8 + n9) -valent group obtained by removing (2 + n8 + n9) hydrogen atoms from an aromatic ring assembly connected by an ethynylene group; the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring or two adjacent aromatic rings in the aromatic ring assembly are methylated. Group, an ethylene group, and a divalent hydrogen atoms from a bridged polycyclic aromatic ring having a bridged crosslinked with groups (2 + n8 + n9) pieces remaining after removing (2 + n8 + n9) valent group such as a carbonyl group.
 単環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式1~5、式7~10で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by Formulas 1 to 5 and Formulas 7 to 10 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
 縮合多環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式13~27で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by formulas 13 to 27 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
 芳香環集合としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式28~36で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include rings represented by formulas 28 to 36 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by formula (13).
 有橋多環式芳香環としては、例えば、式(13)で表される構造単位に関する説明中で例示した式37~44で表される環が挙げられる。 Examples of the bridged polycyclic aromatic ring include rings represented by Formulas 37 to 44 exemplified in the description of the structural unit represented by Formula (13).
 前記(2+n8+n9)価の芳香族基としては、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点から、式1~5、7~10、13、14、26~29、37~39又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n8+n9)個除いた基が好ましく、式1~6、8、14、27、28、38又は42で表される環から水素原子を(2+n8+n9)個除いた基がより好ましく、式1、37又は41で表される環から水素原子を(2+n8+n9)個除いた基がさらに好ましい。 The (2 + n8 + n9) -valent aromatic group is a ring represented by the formula 1 to 5, 7 to 10, 13, 14, 26 to 29, 37 to 39 or 41 from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer. Is preferably a group in which (2 + n8 + n9) hydrogen atoms are removed from, more preferably a group in which (2 + n8 + n9) hydrogen atoms are removed from the ring represented by the formulas 1 to 6, 8, 14, 27, 28, 38 or 42, A group obtained by removing (2 + n8 + n9) hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by formula 1, 37 or 41 is more preferable.
 式(21)中、R11は単結合又は(1+m7)価の有機基を表し、(1+m7)価の有機基であることが好ましい。 In Formula (21), R 11 represents a single bond or a (1 + m7) -valent organic group, and is preferably a (1 + m7) -valent organic group.
 式(21)中、R11で表される(1+m7)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基からm7個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基からm7個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基からm7個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基からm7個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基からm7個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基からm7個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基からm7個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基からm7個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (21), examples of the (1 + m7) -valent organic group represented by R 11 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which an m7 hydrogen atom is removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, M7 hydrogen from an aryl group having 6-30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a 9-anthracenyl group or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent Groups excluding atoms: methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group A group having a substituent, such as a group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing m7 hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms; a group obtained by removing m7 hydrogen atoms from an amino group having a substituent containing carbon atoms; a substituent containing carbon atoms; Examples include groups in which m7 hydrogen atoms are removed from the silyl group possessed. From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, alkyl A group remaining after removing m7 hydrogen atoms from a group remaining after removing m7 hydrogen atoms from an aryl group, a group obtained by removing m7 hydrogen atoms from an amino group.
 前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(21)中、m7は1以上の整数を表し、ただし、R11が単結合のときm7は1を表す。 In formula (21), m7 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that when R 11 is a single bond, m7 represents 1.
 式(22)中、R12は単結合又は(1+m8)価の有機基を表し、(1+m8)価の有機基であることが好ましい。 In Formula (22), R 12 represents a single bond or a (1 + m8) valent organic group, and is preferably a (1 + m8) valent organic group.
 式(22)中、R12で表される(1+m8)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基からm8個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基からm8個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基からm8個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基からm8個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基からm8個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基からm8個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基からm8個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基からm8個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (22), examples of the (1 + m8) -valent organic group represented by R 12 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which an m8 hydrogen atom is removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, which may or may not have; phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, M8 hydrogen from an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, or the like Groups excluding atoms: methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group A group having a substituent, such as a group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing m8 hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms; a group obtained by removing m8 hydrogen atoms from an amino group having a substituent containing carbon atoms; a substituent containing carbon atoms; And a group obtained by removing m8 hydrogen atoms from the silyl group possessed. From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, alkyl A group remaining after removing m8 hydrogen atoms from a group remaining after removing m8 hydrogen atoms from an aryl group, a group obtained by removing m8 hydrogen atoms from an amino group.
 前記置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。前記置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of the substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(22)中、m8は1以上の整数を表し、ただし、R12が単結合のときm8は1を表す。 In formula (22), m8 represents an integer of 1 or more, provided that m8 represents 1 when R 12 is a single bond.
 式(13)で表される構造単位の例
 式(13)で表される構造単位としては、得られるイオン性ポリマーの電子輸送性の観点からは、式(23)で表される構造単位、式(24)で表される構造単位が好ましく、式(24)で表される構造単位がより好ましい。
Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (13) As the structural unit represented by the formula (13), from the viewpoint of the electron transport property of the obtained ionic polymer, the structural unit represented by the formula (23), The structural unit represented by Formula (24) is preferable, and the structural unit represented by Formula (24) is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
(式(23)中、R13は(1+m9+m10)価の有機基を表し、R14は1価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m9及びm10はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
(In formula (23), R 13 represents a (1 + m9 + m10) -valent organic group, R 14 represents a monovalent organic group, and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1 , A1, b1 and n3 represent the same meaning as described above, m9 and m10 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, When there are a plurality of b1 and n3, they may be the same or different.)
 式(23)中、R13で表される(1+m9+m10)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m9+m10)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m9+m10)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m9+m10)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m9+m10)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m9+m10)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m9+m10)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m9+m10)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m9+m10)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (23), examples of the (1 + m9 + m10) -valent organic group represented by R 13 include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, and t-butyl. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m9 + m10) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl An aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent A group in which (m9 + m10) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the group; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc. A group obtained by removing (m9 + m10) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; (m9 + m10) hydrogens from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom A group excluding atoms; (m9 + m10) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom; From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, a group obtained by removing (m9 + m10) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group, a group obtained by removing (m9 + m10) hydrogen atoms from an aryl group, an alkoxy group To (m9 + m10) hydrogen atoms are preferred.
 式(23)中、R14で表される1価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から1個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から1個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から1個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から1個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から1個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から1個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から1個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から1個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (23), examples of the monovalent organic group represented by R 14 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, a t-butyl group, It has a substituent such as a pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, lauryl group, or a group obtained by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of these groups with a substituent. Or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, which is not present; phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9- One hydrogen atom from an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, such as an anthracenyl group or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. Excluded group Methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group, cyclononyloxy Group, cyclododecyloxy group, norbornyloxy group, adamantyloxy group, or the number of carbon atoms having or not having a substituent, such as a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent A group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from 1 to 50 alkoxy groups; a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom; a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom; From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, one hydrogen atom from the alkyl group is exemplified. Except groups, groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an aryl group, a group derived by removing one hydrogen atom from an amino group.
 式(23)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (23) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(式(24)中、R13は(1+m11+m12)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m11及びm12はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、R13、m11、m12、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
(In the formula (24), R 13 represents a (1 + m11 + m12) -valent organic group, and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3 have the same meaning as described above. M11 and m12 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, and R 13 , m11, m12, Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1 and n3 (If there are several, each may be the same or different.)
 式(24)中、R13で表される(1+m11+m12)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m11+m12)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m11+m12)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m11+m12)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m11+m12)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m11+m12)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m11+m12)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m11+m12)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m11+m12)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (24), examples of the (1 + m11 + m12) -valent organic group represented by R 13 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m11 + m12) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl A group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m11 + m12) hydrogen atoms from a reel group; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc. A group obtained by removing (m11 + m12) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; (m11 + m12) hydrogens from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Groups excluding atoms; (m11 + m12) silyl groups having substituents containing carbon atoms From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, a group in which (m11 + m12) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the alkyl group, and (m11 + m12) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the aryl group. A group obtained by removing (m11 + m12) hydrogen atoms from a group or alkoxy group is preferred.
 式(24)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (24) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式(13)で表される構造単位としては、得られるイオン性ポリマーの耐久性の観点からは、式(25)で表される構造単位が好ましい。 As the structural unit represented by the formula (13), the structural unit represented by the formula (25) is preferable from the viewpoint of durability of the obtained ionic polymer.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
(式(25)中、R15は(1+m13+m14)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m13、m14及びm15はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、R15、m13、m14、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
(In the formula (25), R 15 represents a (1 + m13 + m14) -valent organic group, and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3 have the same meaning as described above. M13, m14 and m15 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, R 15 , m13, m14, Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1 and If there are multiple n3s, they may be the same or different.)
 式(25)中、R15で表される(1+m13+m14)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m13+m14)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m13+m14)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m13+m14)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m13+m14)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m13+m14)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m13+m14)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m13+m14)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m13+m14)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (25), examples of the (1 + m13 + m14) -valent organic group represented by R 15 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m13 + m14) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl A group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m13 + m14) hydrogen atoms from a reel group; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy A group, a cyclopentyloxy group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group obtained by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of these groups with a substituent, etc. A group obtained by removing (m13 + m14) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; (m13 + m14) hydrogens from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Groups excluding atoms; (m13 + m14) silyl groups having substituents containing carbon atoms From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, a group in which (m13 + m14) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the alkyl group, and (m13 + m14) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the aryl group. A group obtained by removing (m13 + m14) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group is preferred.
 式(25)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (25) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(15)で表される構造単位の例
 式(15)で表される構造単位としては、得られるイオン性ポリマーの電子輸送性の観点からは、式(26)で表される構造単位、式(27)で表される構造単位が好ましく、式(27)で表される構造単位がより好ましい。
Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (15) As the structural unit represented by the formula (15), from the viewpoint of the electron transport property of the obtained ionic polymer, the structural unit represented by the formula (26), The structural unit represented by Formula (27) is preferable, and the structural unit represented by Formula (27) is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
(式(26)中、R16は(1+m16+m17)価の有機基を表し、R17は1価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m16及び、m17はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
(In the formula (26), R 16 represents a (1 + m16 + m17) valent organic group, R 17 represents a monovalent organic group, Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n2 , a2, b2 and n3 represent the same as defined above, m16 and represent an integer of 1 or more, respectively m17 independently, Q 2, Q 3, Y 2, M 2, Z 2, Y 3, n2, a2 , B2 and n3 may be the same or different when there is a plurality.
 式(26)中、R16で表される(1+m16+m17)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (26), examples of the (1 + m16 + m17) -valent organic group represented by R 16 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl A group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from a reel group; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc. A group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; (m16 + m17) hydrogens from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Groups excluding atoms; (m16 + m17) silyl groups having substituents containing carbon atoms From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, a group in which (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the alkyl group, and (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the aryl group. A group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group is preferred.
 式(26)中、R17で表される1価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から1個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から1個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から1個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から1個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から1個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から1個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から1個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から1個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (26), examples of the monovalent organic group represented by R 17 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, a t-butyl group, It has a substituent such as a pentyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, lauryl group, or a group obtained by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of these groups with a substituent. Or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, which is not present; phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9- One hydrogen atom from an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, which may or may not have a substituent, such as an anthracenyl group or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. Excluded group Methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group, cyclononyloxy Group, cyclododecyloxy group, norbornyloxy group, adamantyloxy group, or the number of carbon atoms having or not having a substituent, such as a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent A group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from 1 to 50 alkoxy groups; a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom; a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom; From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, one hydrogen atom from the alkyl group is exemplified. Except groups, groups obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from an aryl group, a group derived by removing one hydrogen atom from an amino group.
 式(26)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (26) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
(式(27)中、R16は(1+m16+m17)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m16及び、m17はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、R16、m16、m17、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
(In the formula (27), R 16 represents a (1 + m16 + m17) valent organic group, and Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 have the same meaning as described above. the stands, m16 and represent an integer of 1 or more each independently m17, R 16, m16, m17 , Q 2, Q 3, Y 2, M 2, Z 2, Y 3, n2, a2, b2 , and n3 If there are multiple of each, they may be the same or different.)
 式(27)中、R16で表される(1+m16+m17)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m16+m17)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (27), examples of the (1 + m16 + m17) -valent organic group represented by R 16 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl A group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from a reel group; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc. A group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; (m16 + m17) hydrogens from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Groups excluding atoms; (m16 + m17) silyl groups having substituents containing carbon atoms From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, a group in which (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the alkyl group, and (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the aryl group. A group obtained by removing (m16 + m17) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group is preferred.
 式(27)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (27) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 式(15)で表される構造単位としては、得られるイオン性ポリマーの耐久性の観点からは、式(28)で表される構造単位が好ましい。 As the structural unit represented by the formula (15), the structural unit represented by the formula (28) is preferable from the viewpoint of durability of the obtained ionic polymer.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
(式(28)中、R18は(1+m18+m19)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m18、m19及びm20はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、R18、m18、m19、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
(In the formula (28), R 18 represents a (1 + m18 + m19) valent organic group, and Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 have the same meaning as described above. M18, m19 and m20 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, and R 18 , m18, m19, Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n2, a2, b2 and If there are multiple n3s, they may be the same or different.)
 式(28)中、R18で表される(1+m18+m19)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m18+m19)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m18+m19)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m18+m19)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m18+m19)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m18+m19)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m18+m19)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m18+m19)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m18+m19)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (28), examples of the (1 + m18 + m19) -valent organic group represented by R 18 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m18 + m19) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without; phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl A group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m18 + m19) hydrogen atoms from a reel group; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy Groups, cyclopentyloxy groups, cyclohexyloxy groups, cyclononyloxy groups, cyclododecyloxy groups, norbornyloxy groups, adamantyloxy groups, groups in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, etc. A group obtained by removing (m18 + m19) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without a substituent; (m18 + m19) hydrogens from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Groups excluding atoms; (m18 + m19) silyl groups having substituents containing carbon atoms From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis of the raw material monomer, a group in which (m18 + m19) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the alkyl group, and (m18 + m19) hydrogen atoms have been removed from the aryl group. A group obtained by removing (m18 + m19) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group is preferred.
 式(28)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (28) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 式(17)で表される構造単位の例
 式(17)で表される構造単位としては、得られるイオン性ポリマーの電子輸送性の観点からは、式(29)で表される構造単位が好ましい。
Example of Structural Unit Represented by Formula (17) As the structural unit represented by Formula (17), from the viewpoint of electron transport properties of the obtained ionic polymer, the structural unit represented by Formula (29) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
(式(29)中、R19は単結合又は(1+m21)価の有機基を表し、R20は単結合又は(1+m22)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m21及びm22はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、ただし、R19が単結合のときm21は1を表し、R20が単結合のときm22は1を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
(In Formula (29), R 19 represents a single bond or a (1 + m21) -valent organic group, R 20 represents a single bond or a (1 + m22) -valent organic group, and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1, Y 3, n1 , a1, b1 and n3 represent the same as defined above, represents an integer of 1 or more, respectively m21 and m22 independently, provided that when R 19 is a single bond m21 represents 1 , R 20 is a single bond, m22 represents 1 , and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1 and n3 each have the same or different May be.)
 式(29)中、R19で表される(1+m21)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m21)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m21)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m21)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m21)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m21)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m21)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m21)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m21)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (29), examples of the (1 + m21) -valent organic group represented by R 19 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m21) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl From an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent (m 21) Groups excluding one hydrogen atom; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy Substituents such as a group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like A group obtained by removing (m21) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without having; and (m21) hydrogen atoms removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Group: a group obtained by removing (m21) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom. From the viewpoint of easiness, (m21) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkyl group, (m21) hydrogen atoms are removed from the aryl group, and (m21) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkoxy group. The groups are preferred.
 式(29)中、R20で表される(1+m22)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m22)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m22)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m22)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m22)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m22)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m22)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m22)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m22)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。
 式(29)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。
In the formula (29), examples of the (1 + m22) -valent organic group represented by R 20 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m22) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl From an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent (m 22) Groups excluding one hydrogen atom; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy Substituents such as a group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like A group obtained by removing (m22) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without having; and (m22) hydrogen atoms removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Group: a group obtained by removing (m22) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom. From the viewpoint of easiness, a group obtained by removing (m22) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group, a group obtained by removing (m22) hydrogen atoms from an aryl group, and (m22) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group Are preferred.
Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (29) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
式(17)で表される構造単位としては、得られるイオン性ポリマーの耐久性の観点からは、式(30)で表される構造単位が好ましい。 The structural unit represented by the formula (17) is preferably the structural unit represented by the formula (30) from the viewpoint of durability of the obtained ionic polymer.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
(式(30)中、R21は単結合又は(1+m23)価の有機基を表し、R22は単結合又は(1+m24)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m23及びm24はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、ただし、R21が単結合のときm23は1を表し、R22が単結合のときm24は1を表し、m25及びm26はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、m23、m24、R21、R22、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n1、a1、b1及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
(In formula (30), R 21 represents a single bond or a (1 + m23) -valent organic group, R 22 represents a single bond or a (1 + m24) -valent organic group, and Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , Z 1, Y 3, n1 , a1, b1 and n3 represent the same as defined above, represents an integer of 1 or more, respectively m23 and m24 independently, provided that when R 21 is a single bond m23 represents 1 , R 22 is a single bond, m24 represents 1, m25 and m26 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, and m23, m24, R 21 , R 22 , Q 1 , Q 3 , Y 1 , M 1 , When there are a plurality of Z 1 , Y 3 , n1, a1, b1, and n3, they may be the same or different.)
 式(30)中、R21で表される(1+m23)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m23)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m23)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m23)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m23)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m23)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m23)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m23)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m23)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (30), examples of the (1 + m23) -valent organic group represented by R 21 include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, s-butyl, and t-butyl. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m23) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl From an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent (m 23) Groups excluding one hydrogen atom; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy Substituents such as a group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like A group obtained by removing (m23) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without having; and (m23) hydrogen atoms removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Group: a group obtained by removing (m23) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom. From the viewpoint of easiness, a group in which (m23) hydrogen atoms have been removed from an alkyl group, a group in which (m23) hydrogen atoms have been removed from an aryl group, and (m23) hydrogen atoms have been removed from an alkoxy group The groups are preferred.
 式(30)中、R22で表される(1+m24)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m24)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m24)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m24)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m24)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m24)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m24)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m24)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m24)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (30), examples of the (1 + m24) -valent organic group represented by R 22 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m24) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl From an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent (m 24) Groups excluding one hydrogen atom; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy Substituents such as a group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like A group obtained by removing (m24) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without having; and (m24) hydrogen atoms removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Group: a group obtained by removing (m24) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom. From the viewpoint of easiness, (m24) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkyl group, (m24) hydrogen atoms are removed from the aryl group, and (m24) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkoxy group. The groups are preferred.
 式(30)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (30) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 式(20)で表される構造単位の例
 式(20)で表される構造単位としては、得られる電子輸送性の観点からは、式(31)で表される構造単位が好ましい。
Example of Structural Unit Represented by Formula (20) As the structural unit represented by Formula (20), the structural unit represented by Formula (31) is preferable from the viewpoint of the obtained electron transport property.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
(式(31)中、R23は単結合又は(1+m27)価の有機基を表し、R24は単結合又は(1+m28)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m27及びm28はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、ただし、R23が単結合のときm27は1を表し、R24が単結合のときm28は1を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
(In formula (31), R 23 represents a single bond or a (1 + m27) -valent organic group, R 24 represents a single bond or a (1 + m28) -valent organic group, and Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 represent the same meaning as described above, m 27 and m 28 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, provided that m 27 represents 1 when R 23 is a single bond. , When R 24 is a single bond, m28 represents 1, and when Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 are plural, they are the same or different May be.)
 式(31)中、R23で表される(1+m27)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m27)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m27)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m27)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m27)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m27)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m27)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m27)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m27)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (31), examples of the (1 + m27) -valent organic group represented by R 23 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m27) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl From an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent (m 27) Groups excluding one hydrogen atom; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy Substituents such as a group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like A group obtained by removing (m27) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without having; and (m27) hydrogen atoms removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Group: a group obtained by removing (m27) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom. From the viewpoint of easiness, a group in which (m27) hydrogen atoms have been removed from an alkyl group, a group in which (m27) hydrogen atoms have been removed from an aryl group, and (m27) hydrogen atoms have been removed from an alkoxy group The groups are preferred.
 式(31)中、R24で表される(1+m28)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m28)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m28)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m28)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m28)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m28)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m28)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m28)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m28)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (31), examples of the (1 + m28) -valent organic group represented by R 24 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group obtained by removing (m28) hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without; phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl From an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent (m 28) Groups excluding one hydrogen atom; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy Substituents such as a group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like A group obtained by removing (m28) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without having; and (m28) hydrogen atoms removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Group: a group obtained by removing (m28) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom. From the viewpoint of easiness, (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkyl group, (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the aryl group, and (m28) hydrogen atoms are removed from the alkoxy group. Are preferred.
 式(31)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (31) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 式(20)で表される構造単位としては、得られるイオン性ポリマーの耐久性の観点からは、式(32)で表される構造単位が好ましい。 As the structural unit represented by the formula (20), the structural unit represented by the formula (32) is preferable from the viewpoint of durability of the obtained ionic polymer.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
(式(32)中、R25は単結合又は(1+m29)価の有機基を表し、R26は単結合又は(1+m30)価の有機基を表し、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3は前述と同じ意味を表し、m29及びm30はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、ただし、R25が単結合のときm29は1を表し、R26が単結合のときm30は1を表し、m31及びm32はそれぞれ独立に1以上の整数を表し、m29、m30、R25、R26、Q、Q、Y、M、Z、Y、n2、a2、b2及びn3のおのおのは複数個ある場合、同一でも異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
(In Formula (32), R 25 represents a single bond or a (1 + m29) -valent organic group, R 26 represents a single bond or a (1 + m30) -valent organic group, Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3 represent the same meaning as described above, m 29 and m 30 each independently represent an integer of 1 or more, provided that m 29 represents 1 when R 25 is a single bond. , R 26 is a single bond, m30 represents 1, m31 and m32 each independently represents an integer of 1 or more, m29, m30, R 25 , R 26 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Y 2 , M 2 , When there are a plurality of Z 2 , Y 3 , n 2, a 2, b 2 and n 3, they may be the same or different.)
 式(32)中、R25で表される(1+m29)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m29)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m29)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m29)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m29)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m29)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m29)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m29)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m29)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (32), examples of the (1 + m29) -valent organic group represented by R 25 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m29) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl From an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent (m 29) groups excluding one hydrogen atom; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy Substituents such as a group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like A group obtained by removing (m29) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without having; and (m29) hydrogen atoms removed from an amino group having a substituent containing a carbon atom Group: a group obtained by removing (m29) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom. From the viewpoint of easiness, a group in which (m29) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group, a group in which (m29) hydrogen atoms are removed from an aryl group, and (m29) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkoxy group Are preferred.
 式(32)中、R26で表される(1+m30)価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基から(m30)個の水素原子を除いた基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基から(m30)個の水素原子を除いた基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロプロピルオキシ基、シクロブチルオキシ基、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロへキシルオキシ基、シクロノニルオキシ基、シクロドデシルオキシ基、ノルボニルオキシ基、アダマンチルオキシ基、これらの基の中の少なくとも1個の水素原子を置換基で置換した基等の、置換基を有し又は有さない炭素原子数1~50のアルコキシ基から(m30)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するアミノ基から(m30)個の水素原子を除いた基;炭素原子を含む置換基を有するシリル基から(m30)個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられ、原料モノマーの合成の容易さの観点からは、アルキル基から(m30)個の水素原子を除いた基、アリール基から(m30)個の水素原子を除いた基、アルコキシ基から(m30)個の水素原子を除いた基が好ましい。 In the formula (32), examples of the (1 + m30) -valent organic group represented by R 26 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl group. A substituent such as a group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, a lauryl group, or a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent. A group in which (m30) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms with or without: phenyl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl From an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms with or without a substituent, such as a group, a 9-anthracenyl group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent (m 30) groups excluding one hydrogen atom; methoxy group, ethoxy group, propoxy group, butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, dodecyloxy group, cyclopropyloxy group, cyclobutyloxy group, cyclopentyloxy Substituents such as a group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a cyclononyloxy group, a cyclododecyloxy group, a norbornyloxy group, an adamantyloxy group, a group in which at least one hydrogen atom in these groups is substituted with a substituent, and the like A group obtained by removing (m30) hydrogen atoms from an alkoxy group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms with or without having; and (m30) hydrogen atoms removed from an amino group having a substituent containing carbon atoms Group: a group obtained by removing (m30) hydrogen atoms from a silyl group having a substituent containing a carbon atom. From the viewpoint of easiness, a group in which (m30) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkyl group, a group in which (m30) hydrogen atoms are removed from an aryl group, and (m30) hydrogen atoms are removed from an alkoxy group Are preferred.
 式(32)で表される構造単位としては、以下の構造単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the structural unit represented by the formula (32) include the following structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 ・その他の構造単位
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーは、さらに式(33)で表される1種以上の構造単位を有していてもよい。
-Other structural unit The ionic polymer used for this invention may have 1 or more types of structural units further represented by Formula (33).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(式(33)中、Arは置換基を有し若しくは有さない2価の芳香族基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さない2価の芳香族アミン残基を表し、X’は置換基を有し若しくは有さないイミノ基、置換基を有し若しくは有さないシリレン基、置換基を有し若しくは有さないエテニレン基又はエチニレン基を表し、m33及びm34はそれぞれ独立に0又は1を表し、m33及びm34の少なくとも1つは1である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(In Formula (33), Ar 5 represents a divalent aromatic group having or not having a substituent, or a divalent aromatic amine residue having or not having a substituent, and X ′ represents a substituted group. Represents an imino group with or without a group, a silylene group with or without a substituent, an ethenylene group with or without a substituent, or an ethynylene group, and m33 and m34 are each independently 0 or 1 And at least one of m33 and m34 is 1.)
 式(33)中のArで表される2価の芳香族基としては、2価の芳香族炭化水素基、2価の芳香族複素環基が挙げられる。該2価の芳香族基としては、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、1,2-ジアジン環、1,3-ジアジン環、1,4-ジアジン環、1,3,5-トリアジン環、フラン環、ピロール環、チオフェン環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、オキサゾール環、オキサジアゾール環、アザジアゾール環等の単環式芳香環から水素原子を2個除いた2価の基;該単環式芳香環からなる群から選ばれる二つ以上が縮合した縮合多環式芳香環から水素原子を2個除いた2価の基;該単環式芳香環及び該縮合多環式芳香環からなる群より選ばれる2つ以上の芳香環を、単結合、エテニレン基又はエチニレン基で連結してなる芳香環集合から水素原子を2個除いた2価の基;該縮合多環式芳香環又は該芳香環集合の隣り合う2つの芳香環をメチレン基、エチレン基、カルボニル基、イミノ基等の2価の基で橋かけした架橋を有する有橋多環式芳香環から水素原子を2個除いた2価の基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the divalent aromatic group represented by Ar 5 in formula (33) include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group. Examples of the divalent aromatic group include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a 1,2-diazine ring, a 1,3-diazine ring, a 1,4-diazine ring, a 1,3,5-triazine ring, a furan ring, and a pyrrole. A divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a monocyclic aromatic ring such as a ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, oxazole ring, oxadiazole ring, azadiazole ring; the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring A divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a condensed polycyclic aromatic ring condensed with two or more selected from: two selected from the group consisting of the monocyclic aromatic ring and the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring A divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an aromatic ring assembly formed by connecting the above aromatic rings with a single bond, an ethenylene group or an ethynylene group; the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring or the aromatic ring assembly adjacent to each other. Two aromatic rings are methylene, ethylene and cal Group, and a divalent group in which two hydrogen atoms are removed from a bridged polycyclic aromatic ring having a bridged crosslinked with divalent group such as an imino group.
 前記縮合多環式芳香環において、縮合する単環式芳香環の数は、イオン性ポリマーの溶解性の観点からは、2~4が好ましく、2~3がより好ましく、2がさらに好ましい。前記芳香環集合において、連結される芳香環の数は、溶解性の観点からは、2~4が好ましく、2~3がより好ましく、2がさらに好ましい。前記有橋多環式芳香環において、橋かけされる芳香環の数は、イオン性ポリマーの溶解性の観点からは、2~4が好ましく、2~3がより好ましく、2がさらに好ましい。 In the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring, the number of monocyclic aromatic rings to be condensed is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2 to 3, and further preferably 2 from the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer. In the aromatic ring assembly, the number of aromatic rings to be connected is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2 to 3, and even more preferably 2 from the viewpoint of solubility. In the bridged polycyclic aromatic ring, the number of aromatic rings to be bridged is preferably 2 to 4, more preferably 2 to 3, and further preferably 2 from the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer.
 前記単環式芳香環としては、例えば、以下の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the monocyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 前記縮合多環式芳香環としては、例えば、以下の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the condensed polycyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 前記芳香環集合としては、例えば、以下の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic ring assembly include the following rings.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 前記有橋多環式芳香環としては、例えば、以下の環が挙げられる。 Examples of the Aribashi polycyclic aromatic ring include the following rings.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 前記イオン性ポリマーの電子受容性及び正孔受容性のいずれか一方又は両方の観点からは、Arで表される2価の芳香族基は式45~60、61~71、77~80、91、92、93又は96で表される環から水素原子を2個除いた2価の基が好ましく、式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92又は96で表される環から水素原子を2個除いた2価の基がより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of either or both of the electron accepting property and the hole accepting property of the ionic polymer, the divalent aromatic group represented by Ar 5 is represented by the formulas 45 to 60, 61 to 71, 77 to 80, A divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the ring represented by 91, 92, 93 or 96 is preferred, and the ring represented by the formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92 or 96 A divalent group in which two hydrogen atoms are removed from is more preferable.
 上記の2価の芳香族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。当該置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。 The above divalent aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above.
 式(33)中のArで表される2価の芳香族アミン残基としては、式(34)で表される基が挙げられる。 Examples of the divalent aromatic amine residue represented by Ar 5 in Formula (33) include a group represented by Formula (34).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
(式(34)中、Ar、Ar、Ar及びArは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有し若しくは有さないアリーレン基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さない2価の複素環基を表し、Ar10、Ar11及びAr12は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有し若しくは有さないアリール基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さない1価の複素環基を表し、n10及びm35は、それぞれ独立に、0又は1を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
(In the formula (34), Ar 6 , Ar 7 , Ar 8 and Ar 9 are each independently an arylene group with or without a substituent or a divalent heterocyclic ring with or without a substituent. Ar 10 , Ar 11 and Ar 12 each independently represent an aryl group with or without a substituent or a monovalent heterocyclic group with or without a substituent, and n10 and m35 independently represents 0 or 1.)
 前記アリーレン基、アリール基、2価の複素環基、1価の複素環基が有していてもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルキルオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アリールチオ基、アリールアルキル基、アリールアルキルオキシ基、アリールアルキルチオ基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリールアルケニル基、アリールアルキニル基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アミド基、酸イミド基、イミン残基、置換アミノ基、置換シリル基、置換シリルオキシ基、置換シリルチオ基、置換シリルアミノ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、1価の複素環基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アリールアルキルオキシカルボニル基、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基及びカルボキシル基等が挙げられる。該置換基は、ビニル基、アセチレン基、ブテニル基、アクリル基、アクリレート基、アクリルアミド基、メタクリル基、メタクリレート基、メタクリルアミド基、ビニルエーテル基、ビニルアミノ基、シラノール基、小員環(シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、エポキシ基、オキセタン基、ジケテン基、エピスルフィド基等)を有する基、ラクトン基、ラクタム基、又はシロキサン誘導体の構造を含有する基等の架橋基であってもよい。 Examples of the substituent that the arylene group, aryl group, divalent heterocyclic group, and monovalent heterocyclic group may have include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkyloxy group, an alkylthio group, an aryl group, and an aryloxy group. Group, arylthio group, arylalkyl group, arylalkyloxy group, arylalkylthio group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, arylalkenyl group, arylalkynyl group, acyl group, acyloxy group, amide group, acid imide group, imine residue, substitution Amino group, substituted silyl group, substituted silyloxy group, substituted silylthio group, substituted silylamino group, cyano group, nitro group, monovalent heterocyclic group, heteroaryloxy group, heteroarylthio group, alkyloxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl Group, arylalkyloxycarbonyl group, Lower aryloxy carbonyl group and a carboxyl group and the like. The substituent is vinyl group, acetylene group, butenyl group, acrylic group, acrylate group, acrylamide group, methacryl group, methacrylate group, methacrylamide group, vinyl ether group, vinylamino group, silanol group, small ring (cyclopropyl group) , A group having a cyclobutyl group, an epoxy group, an oxetane group, a diketene group, an episulfide group, etc.), a lactone group, a lactam group, or a group containing a structure of a siloxane derivative.
 n10が0の場合、Ar中の炭素原子とAr中の炭素原子とが直接結合してもよく、-O-、-S-等の2価の基を介して結合していてもよい。 When n10 is 0, the carbon atom in Ar 6 and the carbon atom in Ar 8 may be directly bonded, or may be bonded through a divalent group such as —O— or —S—. .
 Ar10、Ar11、Ar12で表されるアリール基、1価の複素環基としては、前記で置換基として説明し例示したアリール基、1価の複素環基と同様である。 The aryl group and monovalent heterocyclic group represented by Ar 10 , Ar 11 , and Ar 12 are the same as the aryl group and monovalent heterocyclic group described and exemplified above as the substituent.
 Ar、Ar、Ar、Arで表されるアリーレン基としては、芳香族炭化水素から芳香環を構成する炭素原子に結合した水素原子2個を除いた残りの原子団が挙げられ、ベンゼン環を持つ基、縮合環を持つ基、独立したベンゼン環又は縮合環2個以上が単結合又は2価の有機基、例えば、ビニレン基等のアルケニレン基を介して結合した基などが挙げられる。アリーレン基は、炭素原子数が通常6~60であり、7~48であることが好ましい。アリーレン基の具体例としては、フェニレン基、ビフェニレン基、C~C17アルコキシフェニレン基、C~C17アルキルフェニレン基、1-ナフチレン基、2-ナフチレン基、1-アントラセニレン基、2-アントラセニレン基、9-アントラセニレン基が挙げられる。前記アリール基中の水素原子はフッ素原子で置換されていてもよい。該当するフッ素原子置換アリール基としては、テトラフルオロフェニレン基等が挙げられる。アリール基の中では、フェニレン基、ビフェニレン基、C~C12アルコキシフェニレン基、C~C12アルキルフェニレン基が好ましい。 Examples of the arylene group represented by Ar 6 , Ar 7 , Ar 8 , Ar 9 include the remaining atomic groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom constituting an aromatic ring from an aromatic hydrocarbon, Examples thereof include a group having a benzene ring, a group having a condensed ring, a group in which two or more independent benzene rings or condensed rings are bonded through a single bond or a divalent organic group, for example, an alkenylene group such as a vinylene group. . The arylene group usually has 6 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 7 to 48 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the arylene group include a phenylene group, a biphenylene group, a C 1 to C 17 alkoxyphenylene group, a C 1 to C 17 alkylphenylene group, a 1-naphthylene group, a 2-naphthylene group, a 1-anthracenylene group, and a 2-anthracenylene group. Group, 9-anthracenylene group. A hydrogen atom in the aryl group may be substituted with a fluorine atom. Examples of the fluorine atom-substituted aryl group include a tetrafluorophenylene group. Among the aryl groups, a phenylene group, a biphenylene group, a C 1 to C 12 alkoxyphenylene group, and a C 1 to C 12 alkylphenylene group are preferable.
 Ar、Ar、Ar、Arで表される2価の複素環基としては、複素環式化合物から水素原子2個を除いた残りの原子団が挙げられる。ここで、複素環式化合物とは、環式構造をもつ有機化合物のうち、環を構成する元素として、炭素原子だけでなく、酸素原子、硫黄原子、窒素原子、リン原子、ホウ素原子、ケイ素原子、セレン原子、テルル原子、ヒ素原子等のヘテロ原子を含む有機化合物をいう。2価の複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。2価の複素環基は、炭素原子数が通常4~60であり、4~20が好ましい。なお、2価の複素環基の炭素原子数には、置換基の炭素原子数は含まないものとする。このような2価の複素環基としては、例えば、チオフェンジイル基、C~C12アルキルチオフェンジイル基、ピロールジイル基、フランジイル基、ピリジンジイル基、C~C12アルキルピリジンジイル基、ピリダジンジイル基、ピリミジンジイル基、ピラジンジイル基、トリアジンジイル基、ピロリジンジイル基、ピペリジンジイル基、キノリンジイル基、イソキノリンジイル基が挙げられ、中でも、チオフェンジイル基、C~C12アルキルチオフェンジイル基、ピリジンジイル基及びC~C12アルキルピリジンジイル基がより好ましい。 Examples of the divalent heterocyclic group represented by Ar 6 , Ar 7 , Ar 8 , Ar 9 include the remaining atomic groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from a heterocyclic compound. Here, the heterocyclic compound is not only a carbon atom but also an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, a phosphorus atom, a boron atom, a silicon atom as an element constituting a ring among organic compounds having a cyclic structure. , An organic compound containing a heteroatom such as a selenium atom, a tellurium atom or an arsenic atom. The divalent heterocyclic group may have a substituent. The divalent heterocyclic group usually has 4 to 60 carbon atoms, and preferably 4 to 20 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms of the divalent heterocyclic group does not include the number of carbon atoms of the substituent. Examples of such a divalent heterocyclic group include a thiophene diyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylthiophene diyl group, a pyrrole diyl group, a furandiyl group, a pyridinediyl group, a C 1 -C 12 alkylpyridine diyl group, and a pyridazine. diyl group, a pyrimidine-diyl group, a pyrazinediyl group, a triazine-diyl group, pyrrolidinediyl group, piperidine-diyl group, quinolinediyl group, and isoquinoline-diyl group, among others, a thiophene-diyl group, C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl thiophenediyl group, pyridinediyl More preferred are groups and C 1 -C 12 alkylpyridinediyl groups.
 構造単位として2価の芳香族アミン残基を含むイオン性ポリマーは、さらに他の構造単位を有していてもよい。他の構造単位としては、フェニレン基、フルオレンジイル基等のアリーレン基等が挙げられる。なお、これらのイオン性ポリマーの中では、架橋基を含んでいるものが好ましい。 The ionic polymer containing a divalent aromatic amine residue as a structural unit may further have another structural unit. Examples of other structural units include arylene groups such as a phenylene group and a fluorenediyl group. Of these ionic polymers, those containing a crosslinking group are preferred.
 また、式(34)で表される2価の芳香族アミン残基としては、下記式101~110で表される芳香族アミンから水素原子を2個除いた基が例示される。 Further, examples of the divalent aromatic amine residue represented by the formula (34) include groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the aromatic amine represented by the following formulas 101 to 110.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 式101~110で表される芳香族アミンは2価の芳香族アミン残基を生成しうる範囲で置換基を有していてもよく、該置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられ、置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 The aromatic amines represented by the formulas 101 to 110 may have a substituent within a range capable of forming a divalent aromatic amine residue, and as the substituent, in the description of Q 1 described above, Examples of the substituent are the same as the exemplified substituents, and when a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 式(33)中、X’は置換基を有し若しくは有さないイミノ基、置換基を有し若しくは有さないシリレン基、置換基を有し若しくは有さないエテニレン基又はエチニレン基を表す。イミノ基、シリル基若しくはエテニレン基が有していてもよい置換基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、ノニル基、デシル基、3,7-ジメチルオクチル基、ラウリル基等の炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基;フェニル基、1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アントラセニル基、2-アントラセニル基、9-アントラセニル基等の炭素原子数6~30のアリール基等が挙げられ、置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In formula (33), X ′ represents an imino group with or without a substituent, a silylene group with or without a substituent, an ethenylene group with or without a substituent, or an ethynylene group. Examples of the substituent that the imino group, silyl group or ethenylene group may have include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a s-butyl group, a t-butyl group, and a pentyl group. Alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, 3,7-dimethyloctyl group, lauryl group; phenyl group, 1 An aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms such as -naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, 1-anthracenyl group, 2-anthracenyl group, 9-anthracenyl group, etc., and when there are a plurality of substituents, They may be the same or different.
 前記イオン性ポリマーの空気、湿気又は熱に対する安定性の観点からは、X’はイミノ基、エテニレン基、エチニレン基が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of stability of the ionic polymer against air, moisture or heat, X ′ is preferably an imino group, an ethenylene group or an ethynylene group.
 前記イオン性ポリマーの電子受容性、正孔受容性の観点からは、m33が1であり、m34が0であることが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of electron acceptability and hole acceptability of the ionic polymer, m33 is preferably 1 and m34 is preferably 0.
 式(33)で表される構造単位としては、前記イオン性ポリマーの電子受容性の観点からは、式(35)で表される構造単位が好ましい。 As the structural unit represented by the formula (33), the structural unit represented by the formula (35) is preferable from the viewpoint of electron acceptability of the ionic polymer.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
(式(35)中、Ar13は、置換基を有し若しくは有さないピリジンジイル基、置換基を有し若しくは有さないピラジンジイル基、置換基を有し若しくは有さないピリミジンジイル基、置換基を有し若しくは有さないピリダジンジイル基又は置換基を有し若しくは有さないトリアジンジイル基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
(In the formula (35), Ar 13 is a pyridinediyl group with or without a substituent, a pyrazinediyl group with or without a substituent, a pyrimidinediyl group with or without a substituent, Represents a pyridazinediyl group with or without a group or a triazinediyl group with or without a substituent.
 ピリジンジイル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 ピラジンジイル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 ピリミジンジイル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 ピリダジンジイル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 トリアジンジイル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、前述のQに関する説明中で例示した置換基と同様の置換基が挙げられる。置換基が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
Examples of the substituent that the pyridinediyl group may have include the same substituents as the substituents exemplified in the description regarding Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
Examples of the substituent that the pyrazinediyl group may have include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
Examples of the substituent that the pyrimidinediyl group may have include the same substituents as the substituents exemplified in the description regarding Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
Examples of the substituent that the pyridazinediyl group may have include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
Examples of the substituent that the triazinediyl group may have include the same substituents as those exemplified in the description of Q 1 described above. When a plurality of substituents are present, they may be the same or different.
 ・構造単位の割合
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーに含まれる式(13)で表される構造単位、式(15)で表される構造単位、式(17)で表される構造単位、及び式(20)で表される構造単位の合計の割合は、有機EL素子の発光効率の観点からは、末端の構造単位を除く該イオン性ポリマーに含まれる全構造単位中、30~100モル%であることがより好ましい。
-Ratio of structural unit Structural unit represented by formula (13), structural unit represented by formula (15), structural unit represented by formula (17), and ionic polymer used in the present invention, From the viewpoint of the luminous efficiency of the organic EL device, the total proportion of the structural units represented by the formula (20) is 30 to 100 mol% in all the structural units contained in the ionic polymer excluding the terminal structural unit. It is more preferable that
 ・末端の構造単位
 なお、本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーの末端の構造単位(末端基)としては、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、イソアミル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、ノニル基、デシル基、ラウリル基メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、イソプロピルオキシ基、ブトキシ基、イソブトキシ基、s-ブトキシ基、t-ブトキシ基、ペンチルオキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基、ヘプチルオキシ基、オクチルオキシ基、2-エチルヘキシルオキシ基、ノニルオキシ基、デシルオキシ基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルオキシ基、ラウリルオキシ基、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、プロピルチオ基、イソプロピルチオ基、ブチルチオ基、イソブチルチオ基、s-ブチルチオ基、t-ブチルチオ基、ペンチルチオ基、ヘキシルチオ基、シクロヘキシルチオ基、ヘプチルチオ基、オクチルチオ基、ノニルチオ基、デシルチオ基、ラウリルチオ基、メトキシフェニル基、エトキシフェニル基、プロピルオキシフェニル基、イソプロピルオキシフェニル基、ブトキシフェニル基、イソブトキシフェニル基、s-ブトキシフェニル基、t-ブトキシフェニル基、ペンチルオキシフェニル基、ヘキシルオキシフェニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシフェニル基、ヘプチルオキシフェニル基、オクチルオキシフェニル基、2-エチルヘキシルオキシフェニル基、ノニルオキシフェニル基、デシルオキシフェニル基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルオキシフェニル基、ラウリルオキシフェニル基、メチルフェニル基、エチルフェニル基、ジメチルフェニル基、プロピルフェニル基、メシチル基、メチルエチルフェニル基、イソプロピルフェニル基、ブチルフェニル基、イソブチルフェニル基、t-ブチルフェニル基、ペンチルフェニル基、イソアミルフェニル基、ヘキシルフェニル基、ヘプチルフェニル基、オクチルフェニル基、ノニルフェニル基、デシルフェニル基、ドデシルフェニル基、メチルアミノ基、ジメチルアミノ基、エチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、プロピルアミノ基、ジプロピルアミノ基、イソプロピルアミノ基、ジイソプロピルアミノ基、ブチルアミノ基、イソブチルアミノ基、s-ブチルアミノ基、t-ブチルアミノ基、ペンチルアミノ基、ヘキシルアミノ基、シクロヘキシルアミノ基、ヘプチルアミノ基、オクチルアミノ基、2-エチルヘキシルアミノ基、ノニルアミノ基、デシルアミノ基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルアミノ基、ラウリルアミノ基、シクロペンチルアミノ基、ジシクロペンチルアミノ基、シクロヘキシルアミノ基、ジシクロヘキシルアミノ基、ジトリフルオロメチルアミノ基、フェニルアミノ基、ジフェニルアミノ基、(C~C12アルコキシフェニル)アミノ基、ジ(C~C12アルコキシフェニル)アミノ基、ジ(C~C12アルキルフェニル)アミノ基、1-ナフチルアミノ基、2-ナフチルアミノ基、ペンタフルオロフェニルアミノ基、ピリジルアミノ基、ピリダジニルアミノ基、ピリミジルアミノ基、ピラジニルアミノ基、トリアジニルアミノ基、(フェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、(C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、(C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、ジ(C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、ジ(C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキル)アミノ基、1-ナフチル-C~C12アルキルアミノ基、2-ナフチル-C~C12アルキルアミノ基、トリメチルシリル基、トリエチルシリル基、トリプロピルシリル基、トリイソプロピルシリル基、イソプロピルジメチルシリル基、イソプロピルジエチルシリル基、t-ブチルジメチルシリル基、ペンチルジメチルシリル基、ヘキシルジメチルシリル基、ヘプチルジメチルシリル基、オクチルジメチルシリル基、2-エチルヘキシルジメチルシリル基、ノニルジメチルシリル基、デシルジメチルシリル基、3,7-ジメチルオクチルジメチルシリル基、ラウリルジメチルシリル基、(フェニル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(C~C12アルコキシフェニル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(C~C12アルキルフェニル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(1-ナフチル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(2-ナフチル-C~C12アルキル)シリル基、(フェニル-C~C12アルキル)ジメチルシリル基、トリフェニルシリル基、トリ(p-キシリル)シリル基、トリベンジルシリル基、ジフェニルメチルシリル基、t-ブチルジフェニルシリル基、ジメチルフェニルシリル基、チエニル基、C~C12アルキルチエニル基、ピロリル基、フリル基、ピリジル基、C~C12アルキルピリジル基、ピリダジニル基、ピリミジル基、ピラジニル基、トリアジニル基、ピロリジル基、ピペリジル基、キノリル基、イソキノリル基、ヒドロキシ基、メルカプト基、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子及びヨウ素原子等が挙げられる。前記末端の構造単位が複数個存在する場合には、それらは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
-Terminal structural unit The terminal structural unit (terminal group) of the ionic polymer used in the present invention includes a hydrogen atom, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s- Butyl group, t-butyl group, pentyl group, isoamyl group, hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group, decyl group, lauryl group methoxy group, ethoxy group, propyloxy group, isopropyloxy group, butoxy group , Isobutoxy group, s-butoxy group, t-butoxy group, pentyloxy group, hexyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group, heptyloxy group, octyloxy group, 2-ethylhexyloxy group, nonyloxy group, decyloxy group, 3,7- Dimethyloctyloxy group, lauryloxy group, methylthio group, ethylthio O, propylthio, isopropylthio, butylthio, isobutylthio, s-butylthio, t-butylthio, pentylthio, hexylthio, cyclohexylthio, heptylthio, octylthio, nonylthio, decylthio, laurylthio Group, methoxyphenyl group, ethoxyphenyl group, propyloxyphenyl group, isopropyloxyphenyl group, butoxyphenyl group, isobutoxyphenyl group, s-butoxyphenyl group, t-butoxyphenyl group, pentyloxyphenyl group, hexyloxyphenyl group Cyclohexyloxyphenyl group, heptyloxyphenyl group, octyloxyphenyl group, 2-ethylhexyloxyphenyl group, nonyloxyphenyl group, decyloxyphenyl group, 3,7-dimethyloxy Tyloxyphenyl group, lauryloxyphenyl group, methylphenyl group, ethylphenyl group, dimethylphenyl group, propylphenyl group, mesityl group, methylethylphenyl group, isopropylphenyl group, butylphenyl group, isobutylphenyl group, t-butylphenyl Group, pentylphenyl group, isoamylphenyl group, hexylphenyl group, heptylphenyl group, octylphenyl group, nonylphenyl group, decylphenyl group, dodecylphenyl group, methylamino group, dimethylamino group, ethylamino group, diethylamino group, propyl Amino group, dipropylamino group, isopropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, butylamino group, isobutylamino group, s-butylamino group, t-butylamino group, pentylamino group, hexylamino Cyclohexylamino group, heptylamino group, octylamino group, 2-ethylhexylamino group, nonylamino group, decylamino group, 3,7-dimethyloctylamino group, laurylamino group, cyclopentylamino group, dicyclopentylamino group, cyclohexylamino group , Dicyclohexylamino group, ditrifluoromethylamino group, phenylamino group, diphenylamino group, (C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl) amino group, di (C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl) amino group, di (C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl) amino group, 1-naphthylamino group, 2-naphthylamino group, pentafluorophenylamino group, pyridylamino group, pyridazinylamino group, pyrimidylamino group, pyrazinylamino group, triazinylamino group, Nyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, (C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, (C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, Di (C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, di (C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) amino group, 1-naphthyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl group Amino group, 2-naphthyl-C 1 -C 12 alkylamino group, trimethylsilyl group, triethylsilyl group, tripropylsilyl group, triisopropylsilyl group, isopropyldimethylsilyl group, isopropyldiethylsilyl group, t-butyldimethylsilyl group, Pentyldimethylsilyl group, hexyldimethylsilyl group, heptyldimethylsilyl group, Chi le dimethylsilyl group, 2-ethylhexyl-dimethylsilyl group, nonyldimethylsilyl group, decyldimethylsilyl group, a 3,7-dimethyl silyl group, lauryl dimethyl silyl group, (phenyl -C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (C 1 -C 12 alkoxyphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (C 1 -C 12 alkylphenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (1-naphthyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) Silyl group, (2-naphthyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) silyl group, (phenyl-C 1 -C 12 alkyl) dimethylsilyl group, triphenylsilyl group, tri (p-xylyl) silyl group, tribenzylsilyl group , Diphenylmethylsilyl group, t-butyldiphenylsilyl group, dimethylphenylsilyl Group, a thienyl group, C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl thienyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a furyl group, a pyridyl group, C 1 ~ C 12 alkyl pyridyl group, pyridazinyl group, pyrimidyl group, pyrazinyl group, triazinyl group, pyrrolidyl group, piperidyl group, Examples include quinolyl group, isoquinolyl group, hydroxy group, mercapto group, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom and iodine atom. When a plurality of the terminal structural units are present, they may be the same or different.
 -イオン性ポリマーの特性-
 本発明で用いられるイオン性ポリマーは、好ましくは共役化合物である。本発明で用いられるイオン性ポリマーが共役化合物であるとは、該イオン性ポリマーが主鎖中に、多重結合(例えば、二重結合、三重結合)又は窒素原子、酸素原子等が有する非共有電子対が1つの単結合を挟んで連なっている領域を含むことを意味する。該イオン性ポリマーは、共役化合物である場合、共役化合物の電子輸送性の観点から、下記数式(A)で計算される比が50%以上であることが好ましく、60%以上であることがより好ましく、70%以上であることがより好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、90%以上であることがさらに好ましい。
 {(多重結合又は窒素原子、酸素原子等が有する非共有電子対が1つの単結合を挟んで連なっている領域に含まれる主鎖上の原子の数)/(主鎖上の全原子の数)}×100%   式(A)
-Characteristics of ionic polymers-
The ionic polymer used in the present invention is preferably a conjugated compound. The ionic polymer used in the present invention is a conjugated compound when the ionic polymer has a multiple bond (for example, double bond, triple bond) or a nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, etc. in the main chain. It means that the pair includes a region that is continuous with one single bond. When the ionic polymer is a conjugated compound, the ratio calculated by the following mathematical formula (A) is preferably 50% or more and more preferably 60% or more from the viewpoint of electron transport properties of the conjugated compound. Preferably, it is 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and further preferably 90% or more.
{(The number of atoms on the main chain contained in a region where multiple bonds or unshared electron pairs of nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, etc. are connected across one single bond) / (the number of all atoms on the main chain) )} × 100% Formula (A)
 また、本発明で用いられるイオン性ポリマーは、好ましくは高分子化合物であり、より好ましくは共役高分子化合物である。ここで、高分子化合物とは、ポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量が1×10以上である化合物をいう。また、本発明で用いられるイオン性ポリマーが共役高分子化合物であるとは、該イオン性ポリマーが共役化合物かつ高分子化合物であることを意味する。 The ionic polymer used in the present invention is preferably a polymer compound, more preferably a conjugated polymer compound. Here, the polymer compound means a compound having a polystyrene-equivalent number average molecular weight of 1 × 10 3 or more. Moreover, the ionic polymer used in the present invention being a conjugated polymer compound means that the ionic polymer is a conjugated compound and a polymer compound.
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーの塗布による成膜性の観点から、該イオン性ポリマーのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量が1×10~1×10であることが好ましく、2×10~1×10であることがより好ましく、3×10~1×10であることがより好ましく、5×10~1×10であることがさらに好ましい。また、イオン性ポリマーの純度の観点から、ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量が1×10~5×10であることが好ましく、1×10~1×10であることがより好ましく、1×10~5×10であることがさらに好ましい。また、イオン性ポリマーの溶解性の観点から、ポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は1×10~5×10であることが好ましく、1×10~5×10であることがより好ましく、1×10~3×10であることがさらに好ましい。本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量及び重量平均分子量は、例えば、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)を用いて、求めることができる。 From the viewpoint of film formability by application of the ionic polymer used in the present invention, the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the ionic polymer is preferably 1 × 10 3 to 1 × 10 8 , and preferably 2 × 10 3 to 1 × 10 7 is more preferable, 3 × 10 3 to 1 × 10 7 is more preferable, and 5 × 10 3 to 1 × 10 7 is even more preferable. From the viewpoint of the purity of the ionic polymer, the weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene is preferably 1 × 10 3 to 5 × 10 7 , more preferably 1 × 10 3 to 1 × 10 7. More preferably, it is × 10 3 to 5 × 10 6 . Further, from the viewpoint of solubility of the ionic polymer, it is preferred that the number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene is 1 × 10 3 ~ 5 × 10 5, more preferably 1 × 10 3 ~ 5 × 10 4, More preferably, it is 1 × 10 3 to 3 × 10 3 . The polystyrene-equivalent number average molecular weight and weight average molecular weight of the ionic polymer used in the present invention can be determined using, for example, gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーの純度の観点から、末端構造単位を除く該イオン性ポリマー中に含まれる全構造単位の数(即ち、重合度)は1以上20以下であることが好ましく、1以上10以下であることがより好ましく、1以上5以下であることがさらに好ましい。 From the viewpoint of the purity of the ionic polymer used in the present invention, the number of all structural units (ie, the degree of polymerization) contained in the ionic polymer excluding the terminal structural unit is preferably 1 or more and 20 or less. It is more preferably 10 or less and more preferably 1 or more and 5 or less.
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーの電子受容性、正孔受容性の観点からは、該イオン性ポリマーの最低非占有分子軌道(LUMO)の軌道エネルギーが、-5.0eV以上-2.0eV以下であることが好ましく、-4.5eV以上-2.0eV以下がより好ましい。また、同様の観点から、該イオン性ポリマーの最高占有分子軌道(HOMO)の軌道エネルギーが、-6.0eV以上-3.0eV以下であることが好ましく、-5.5eV以上-3.0eV以下がより好ましい。ただし、HOMOの軌道エネルギーはLUMOの軌道エネルギーよりも低い。なお、イオン性ポリマーの最高占有分子軌道(HOMO)の軌道エネルギーは、イオン性ポリマーのイオン化ポテンシャルを測定し、得られたイオン化ポテンシャルを該軌道エネルギーとすることにより求める。一方、イオン性ポリマーの最低非占有分子軌道(LUMO)の軌道エネルギーは、HOMOとLUMOとのエネルギー差を求め、その値と前記で測定したイオン化ポテンシャルとの和を該軌道エネルギーとすることにより求める。イオン化ポテンシャルの測定には光電子分光装置を用いる。また、HOMOとLUMOのエネルギー差は紫外・可視・近赤外分光光度計を用いてイオン性ポリマーの吸収スペクトルを測定し、その吸収末端より求める。 From the viewpoint of electron acceptability and hole acceptability of the ionic polymer used in the present invention, the orbital energy of the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) of the ionic polymer is −5.0 eV or more and −2.0 eV or less. It is preferable that it is -4.5 eV or more and -2.0 eV or less. From the same viewpoint, the orbital energy of the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) of the ionic polymer is preferably from -6.0 eV to -3.0 eV, more preferably from -5.5 eV to -3.0 eV. Is more preferable. However, the orbital energy of HOMO is lower than that of LUMO. The orbital energy of the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) of the ionic polymer is obtained by measuring the ionization potential of the ionic polymer and using the obtained ionization potential as the orbital energy. On the other hand, the orbital energy of the lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) of the ionic polymer is obtained by calculating the energy difference between HOMO and LUMO and using the sum of the value and the ionization potential measured above as the orbital energy. . A photoelectron spectrometer is used to measure the ionization potential. Further, the energy difference between HOMO and LUMO is obtained from the absorption terminal by measuring the absorption spectrum of the ionic polymer using an ultraviolet / visible / near infrared spectrophotometer.
 なお、本発明に用いられる重合体は、電界発光素子で用いられた場合、実質的に非発光性であることが好ましい。ここで、ある重合体が実質的に非発光性であるとは、以下のとおりの意味である。まず、ある重合体を含む層を有する電界発光素子Aを作製する。一方、重合体を含む層を有さない電界発光素子2を作製する。電界発光素子Aは重合体を含む層を有するが、電界発光素子2は重合体を含む層を有さない点でのみ、電界発光素子Aと電界発光素子2とは異なる。次に、電界発光素子A及び電界発光素子2に10Vの順方向電圧を印加して発光スペクトルを測定する。電界発光素子2について得られた発光スペクトルにおいて最大ピークを与える波長λを求める。波長λにおける発光強度を1として、電界発光素子2について得られた発光スペクトルを規格化し、波長について積分して規格化発光量Sを計算する。一方、波長λにおける発光強度を1として、電界発光素子Aについて得られた発光スペクトルも規格化し、波長について積分して規格化発光量Sを計算する。(S-S)/S×100%で計算される値が30%以下である場合、即ち、重合体を含む層を有さない電界発光素子2の規格化発光量に比べ、重合体を含む層を有する電界発光素子Aの規格化発光量の増加分が30%以下である場合に、用いた重合体は実質的に非発光性であるものとし、(S-S)/S×100で計算される値が15%以下であることが好ましく、10%以下であることがより好ましい。 The polymer used in the present invention is preferably substantially non-luminescent when used in an electroluminescent device. Here, the fact that a certain polymer is substantially non-luminous means as follows. First, an electroluminescent element A having a layer containing a certain polymer is produced. On the other hand, the electroluminescent element 2 which does not have the layer containing a polymer is produced. Although the electroluminescent element A has a layer containing a polymer, the electroluminescent element 2 is different from the electroluminescent element 2 only in that it does not have a layer containing a polymer. Next, a forward voltage of 10 V is applied to the electroluminescent element A and the electroluminescent element 2 to measure an emission spectrum. The wavelength λ that gives the maximum peak in the emission spectrum obtained for the electroluminescent element 2 is obtained. The emission spectrum at the wavelength λ is set to 1, the emission spectrum obtained for the electroluminescent element 2 is normalized, and the normalized emission amount S 0 is calculated by integrating with respect to the wavelength. On the other hand, assuming that the emission intensity at the wavelength λ is 1, the emission spectrum obtained for the electroluminescent element A is also normalized, and the normalized emission amount S is calculated by integrating the wavelength. When the value calculated by (S−S 0 ) / S 0 × 100% is 30% or less, that is, compared with the normalized luminescence amount of the electroluminescent device 2 having no polymer-containing layer, the polymer When the increase in the normalized luminescence amount of the electroluminescent element A having a layer containing is 30% or less, the polymer used is substantially non-luminous, and (S−S 0 ) / S The value calculated by 0 × 100 is preferably 15% or less, and more preferably 10% or less.
 前記式(1)で表される基及び前記式(3)で表される基を含むイオン性ポリマーとしては、式(23)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(23)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマー、式(24)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(24)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマー、式(25)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(25)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマー、式(29)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(29)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマー、式(30)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(30)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマーが挙げられる。 As the ionic polymer containing the group represented by the formula (1) and the group represented by the formula (3), an ionic polymer consisting only of the group represented by the formula (23), a formula (23) One or more selected from the group consisting of groups represented by formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, and 101 to 110, wherein two hydrogen atoms are removed. An ionic polymer comprising only the group represented by formula (24), a group represented by formula (24) and the formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92 96, 101 to 110, an ionic polymer comprising one or more groups selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, an ion comprising only the group represented by formula (25) Polymer, group represented by formula (25) and formula 4 An ionic polymer comprising one or more groups selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the groups represented by ˜50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, 101 to 110 An ionic polymer consisting only of a group represented by formula (29), a group represented by formula (29) and formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, 101 to 110 An ionic polymer comprising at least one group selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the represented group, an ionic polymer comprising only the group represented by formula (30), formula (30) And one selected from the group consisting of groups represented by formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, and 101 to 110, in which two hydrogen atoms are removed. Examples include ionic polymers consisting of the above groups That.
 前記式(1)で表される基及び前記式(3)で表される基を含むイオン性ポリマーとしては、以下の高分子化合物が挙げられる。これらのうち、2種の構造単位がスラッシュ「/」で区切られている式で表される高分子化合物では、左側の構造単位の割合がpモル%、右側の構造単位の割合が(100-p)モル%であり、これらの構造単位はランダムに配列している。なお、以下の式中、nは重合度を表す。 Examples of the ionic polymer containing the group represented by the formula (1) and the group represented by the formula (3) include the following polymer compounds. Among these, in the polymer compound represented by the formula in which two types of structural units are separated by a slash “/”, the proportion of the structural unit on the left is p mol% and the proportion of the structural unit on the right is (100− p) mol%, and these structural units are randomly arranged. In the following formula, n represents the degree of polymerization.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
(式中、pは15~100の数を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
(In the formula, p represents a number of 15 to 100.)
 前記式(2)で表される基及び前記式(3)で表される基を含むイオン性ポリマーとしては、式(26)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(26)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマー、式(27)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(27)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマー、式(28)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(28)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマー、式(31)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(31)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマー、式(32)で表される基のみからなるイオン性ポリマー、式(32)で表される基および式45~50、59、60、77、80、91、92、96、101~110で表される基から水素原子を2個除いた基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基からなるイオン性ポリマーが挙げられる。 As an ionic polymer containing the group represented by the formula (2) and the group represented by the formula (3), an ionic polymer consisting only of the group represented by the formula (26), the formula (26) One or more selected from the group consisting of groups represented by formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, and 101 to 110, wherein two hydrogen atoms are removed. An ionic polymer comprising only the group represented by the formula (27), a group represented by the formula (27) and the formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92 96, 101 to 110, an ionic polymer comprising one or more groups selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms, ions comprising only groups represented by formula (28) Polymer, group represented by formula (28) and formula 4 An ionic polymer comprising one or more groups selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the groups represented by ˜50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, 101 to 110 An ionic polymer comprising only a group represented by formula (31), a group represented by formula (31), and formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, and 101 to 110 An ionic polymer comprising at least one group selected from the group consisting of groups obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the represented group, an ionic polymer comprising only the group represented by formula (32), formula (32) And one selected from the group consisting of groups represented by formulas 45 to 50, 59, 60, 77, 80, 91, 92, 96, and 101 to 110, in which two hydrogen atoms are removed. Examples include ionic polymers consisting of the above groups That.
 前記式(2)で表される基及び前記式(3)で表される基を含むイオン性ポリマーとしては、以下の高分子化合物が挙げられる。これらのうち、2種の構造単位がスラッシュ「/」で区切られている式で表される高分子化合物では、左側の構造単位の割合がpモル%、右側の構造単位の割合が(100-p)モル%であり、これらの構造単位はランダムに配列している。なお、以下の式中、nは重合度を表す。 Examples of the ionic polymer containing the group represented by the formula (2) and the group represented by the formula (3) include the following polymer compounds. Among these, in the polymer compound represented by the formula in which two types of structural units are separated by a slash “/”, the proportion of the structural unit on the left is p mol% and the proportion of the structural unit on the right is (100− p) mol%, and these structural units are randomly arranged. In the following formula, n represents the degree of polymerization.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
(式中、pは15~100の数を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
(In the formula, p represents a number of 15 to 100.)
 -イオン性ポリマーの製造方法-
 次に、本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーを製造する方法について説明する。本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーを製造するための好適な方法としては、例えば、下記一般式(36)で表される化合物を原料の1つとして選択して用い、中でも、該一般式(36)中の-A-が式(13)で表される構造単位である化合物、該-A-が式(15)で表される構造単位である化合物、該-A-が式(17)で表される構造単位である化合物及び該-A-が式(20)で表される構造単位である化合物の少なくとも1種を必須の原料として含有させて、これを縮合重合させる方法を挙げることができる。
 
  Y-A-Y   (36)
(式(36)中、Aは式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位を表し、Y及びYは、それぞれ独立に、縮合重合に関与する基を示す。)
-Production method of ionic polymer-
Next, a method for producing the ionic polymer used in the present invention will be described. As a suitable method for producing the ionic polymer used in the present invention, for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (36) is selected and used as one of the raw materials. ) in -A a - compound is a structural unit represented by the formula (13), said -A a - compound is a structural unit represented by the formula (15), said -A a - is the formula ( 17) A method in which at least one of a compound that is a structural unit represented by formula (17) and a compound in which -A a -is a structural unit represented by formula (20) is contained as an essential raw material, and this is subjected to condensation polymerization Can be mentioned.

Y 4 -A a -Y 5 (36)
(In formula (36), A a is represented by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) and 1 represented by formula (3). A repeating unit containing a group of at least species is represented, and Y 4 and Y 5 each independently represent a group involved in condensation polymerization.)
 また、本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマー中に上記式(36)中の-A-で表される構造単位とともに、前記-A-以外の他の構造単位を含有させる場合には、前記-A-以外の他の構造単位となる、2個の縮合重合に関与する置換基を有する化合物を用い、これを前記式(36)で表される化合物とともに共存させて縮合重合させればよい。 When the ionic polymer used in the present invention contains a structural unit represented by -A a- in the above formula (36) and another structural unit other than -A a- , When a compound having two substituents involved in condensation polymerization, which is another structural unit other than —A a —, is used together with the compound represented by the formula (36), the condensation polymerization is performed. Good.
 このような他の構造単位を含有させるために用いられる2個の縮合重合可能な置換基を有する化合物としては、式(37)で表される化合物が例示される。このようにして、前記Y-A-Yで表される化合物に加えて、式(37)で表される化合物を縮合重合させることで、-A-で表される構造単位を更に有する本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーを製造することができる。
 
  Y-A-Y    (37)
(式(37)中、Aは前記一般式(33)で表される構造単位又は一般式(35)で表される構造単位であり、Y及びYは、それぞれ独立に、縮合重合に関与する基を示す。)
Examples of the compound having two condensation-polymerizable substituents used to contain such other structural units include compounds represented by the formula (37). In this manner, in addition to the compound represented by Y 4 -A a -Y 5 , the structural unit represented by -A b- is obtained by condensation polymerization of the compound represented by Formula (37). Furthermore, the ionic polymer used in the present invention can be produced.

Y 6 -A b -Y 7 (37)
(In the formula (37), Ab is a structural unit represented by the general formula (33) or a structural unit represented by the general formula (35), and Y 6 and Y 7 are each independently a condensation polymerization. Represents a group involved in
 このような縮合重合に関与する基(Y、Y、Y及びY)としては、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキルスルホネート基、アリールスルホネート基、アリールアルキルスルホネート基、ホウ酸エステル残基、スルホニウムメチル基、ホスホニウムメチル基、ホスホネートメチル基、モノハロゲン化メチル基、-B(OH)、ホルミル基、シアノ基、ビニル基等が挙げられる。 Examples of groups (Y 4 , Y 5 , Y 6 and Y 7 ) involved in such condensation polymerization include a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl sulfonate group, an aryl sulfonate group, an arylalkyl sulfonate group, a borate ester residue, Examples thereof include a sulfonium methyl group, a phosphonium methyl group, a phosphonate methyl group, a monohalogenated methyl group, —B (OH) 2 , a formyl group, a cyano group, and a vinyl group.
 このような縮合重合に関与する基として選択され得るハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子及びヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 Examples of the halogen atom that can be selected as a group involved in such condensation polymerization include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
 また、前記縮合重合に関与する基として選択され得るアルキルスルホネート基としては、メタンスルホネート基、エタンスルホネート基、トリフルオロメタンスルホネート基が例示され、アリールスルホネート基としては、ベンゼンスルホネート基、p-トルエンスルホネート基が例示される。 Examples of the alkyl sulfonate group that can be selected as the group involved in the condensation polymerization include a methane sulfonate group, an ethane sulfonate group, and a trifluoromethane sulfonate group. Examples of the aryl sulfonate group include a benzene sulfonate group and a p-toluene sulfonate group. Is exemplified.
 前記縮合重合に関与する基として選択され得るアリールアルキルスルホネート基としては、ベンジルスルホネート基が例示される。 Examples of the arylalkyl sulfonate group that can be selected as a group involved in the condensation polymerization include a benzyl sulfonate group.
 また、前記縮合重合に関与する基として選択され得るホウ酸エステル残基としては、下記式で表される基が例示される。 Further, examples of the boric acid ester residue that can be selected as a group involved in the condensation polymerization include groups represented by the following formulae.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
 さらに、前記縮合重合に関与する基として選択され得るスルホニウムメチル基としては、下記式:
  -CHMe、又は、-CHPh
(式中、Eはハロゲン原子を示す。Phはフェニル基を示し、以下、同じである。)で表される基が例示される。
Furthermore, the sulfonium methyl group that can be selected as a group involved in the condensation polymerization includes the following formula:
—CH 2 S + Me 2 E or —CH 2 S + Ph 2 E
(Wherein E represents a halogen atom, Ph represents a phenyl group, and the same shall apply hereinafter).
 また、前記縮合重合に関与する基として選択され得るホスホニウムメチル基としては、下記式:
  -CHPh
(式中、Eはハロゲン原子を示す。)で表される基が例示される。
Examples of the phosphonium methyl group that can be selected as the group involved in the condensation polymerization include the following formula:
-CH 2 P + Ph 3 E -
(Wherein E represents a halogen atom).
 また、前記縮合重合に関与する基として選択され得るホスホネートメチル基としては、下記式:
  -CHPO(OR
 (式中、Rはアルキル基、アリール基、又はアリールアルキル基を示す。)で表される基が例示される。
The phosphonate methyl group that can be selected as the group involved in the condensation polymerization is represented by the following formula:
—CH 2 PO (OR d ) 2
(Wherein, R d represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an arylalkyl group).
 さらに、前記縮合重合に関与する基として選択され得るモノハロゲン化メチル基としては、フッ化メチル基、塩化メチル基、臭化メチル基、ヨウ化メチル基が例示される。 Furthermore, examples of the monohalogenated methyl group that can be selected as the group involved in the condensation polymerization include a methyl fluoride group, a methyl chloride group, a methyl bromide group, and a methyl iodide group.
 さらに、縮合重合に関与する基として好適な基は、重合反応の種類によって異なるが、例えば、Yamamotoカップリング反応等の0価ニッケル錯体を用いる場合には、ハロゲン原子、アルキルスルホネート基、アリールスルホネート基、アリールアルキルスルホネート基が挙げられる。また、Suzukiカップリング反応等のニッケル触媒又はパラジウム触媒を用いる場合には、アルキルスルホネート基、ハロゲン原子、ホウ酸エステル残基、-B(OH)等が挙げられ、酸化剤又は電気化学的に酸化重合する場合には、水素原子が挙げられる。 Further, a group suitable as a group involved in condensation polymerization varies depending on the type of polymerization reaction. For example, when a zerovalent nickel complex such as a Yamamoto coupling reaction is used, a halogen atom, an alkyl sulfonate group, an aryl sulfonate group And arylalkyl sulfonate groups. In the case of using a nickel catalyst or palladium catalyst such as a Suzuki coupling reaction, an alkyl sulfonate group, a halogen atom, a borate ester residue, —B (OH) 2 and the like can be mentioned. In the case of oxidative polymerization, a hydrogen atom is exemplified.
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーを製造する際には、例えば、縮合重合に関与する基を複数有する前記一般式(36)又は(37)で表される化合物(モノマー)を、必要に応じて有機溶媒に溶解し、アルカリや適当な触媒を用いて、有機溶媒の融点以上沸点以下の温度で反応させる重合方法を採用してもよい。このような重合方法としては、例えば、”オルガニック リアクションズ(Organic Reactions)”,第14巻,270-490頁,ジョンワイリー アンド サンズ(John Wiley&Sons,Inc.),1965年、”オルガニック シンセシス(Organic Syntheses)”,コレクティブ第6巻(Collective Volume VI),407-411頁,ジョンワイリー アンド サンズ(John Wiley&Sons,Inc.),1988年、ケミカル レビュー(Chem.Rev.),第95巻,2457頁(1995年)、ジャーナル オブ オルガノメタリック ケミストリー(J.Organomet.Chem.),第576巻,147頁(1999年)、マクロモレキュラー ケミストリー マクロモレキュラー シンポジウム(Macromol.Chem.,Macromol.Symp.),第12巻,229頁(1987年)に記載の公知の方法を採用することができる。 When producing the ionic polymer used in the present invention, for example, if necessary, the compound (monomer) represented by the general formula (36) or (37) having a plurality of groups involved in condensation polymerization may be used. You may employ | adopt the polymerization method which melt | dissolves in an organic solvent, and makes it react at the temperature below the melting | fusing point of an organic solvent below a boiling point using an alkali and a suitable catalyst. Such polymerization methods include, for example, “Organic Reactions”, Vol. 14, pages 270-490, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1965, “Organic Synthesis”. Syntheses ”, Collective Volume 6 (Collective Volume VI), 407-411, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1988, Chemical Review, Vol. 95, 2457 ( 1995), Journal of Organometallic Chemistry, Vol. 576, 147 (1999), Kuromorekyura Chemistry Macromolecular Symposium (Macromol.Chem., Macromol.Symp.), Vol. 12, it is possible to employ a known method described in page 229 (1987).
 また、本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーを製造する際には、縮合重合に関与する基に応じて、既知の縮合重合反応を採用してもよい。このような重合方法としては、該当するモノマーを、Suzukiカップリング反応により重合する方法、Grignard反応により重合する方法、Ni(0)錯体により重合する方法、FeCl等の酸化剤により重合する方法、電気化学的に酸化重合する方法、適当な脱離基を有する中間体高分子の分解による方法等が挙げられる。このような重合反応の中でも、Suzukiカップリング反応により重合する方法、Grignard反応により重合する方法、及びニッケルゼロ価錯体により重合する方法が、得られるイオン性ポリマーの構造制御がし易いので好ましい。 Moreover, when manufacturing the ionic polymer used for this invention, you may employ | adopt a known condensation polymerization reaction according to the group which participates in condensation polymerization. Examples of such a polymerization method include a method of polymerizing a corresponding monomer by a Suzuki coupling reaction, a method of polymerizing by a Grignard reaction, a method of polymerizing by a Ni (0) complex, a method of polymerizing by an oxidizing agent such as FeCl 3 , Examples thereof include a method of electrochemically oxidative polymerization and a method of decomposing an intermediate polymer having an appropriate leaving group. Among such polymerization reactions, a polymerization method using a Suzuki coupling reaction, a polymerization method using a Grignard reaction, and a polymerization method using a nickel zero-valent complex are preferable because the structure of the resulting ionic polymer can be easily controlled.
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーの好ましい製造方法の1つの態様は、縮合重合に関与する基として、ハロゲン原子、アルキルスルホネート基、アリールスルホネート基及びアリールアルキルスルホネート基からなる群から選択される基を有する原料モノマーを用いて、ニッケルゼロ価錯体の存在下で縮合重合して、イオン性ポリマーを製造する方法である。このような方法に使用する原料モノマーとしては、例えば、ジハロゲン化化合物、ビス(アルキルスルホネート)化合物、ビス(アリールスルホネート)化合物、ビス(アリールアルキルスルホネート)化合物、ハロゲン-アルキルスルホネート化合物、ハロゲン-アリールスルホネート化合物、ハロゲン-アリールアルキルスルホネート化合物、アルキルスルホネート-アリールスルホネート化合物、アルキルスルホネート-アリールアルキルスルホネート化合物及びアリールスルホネート-アリールアルキルスルホネート化合物が挙げられる。 One aspect of a preferred method for producing the ionic polymer used in the present invention is a group selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, an alkyl sulfonate group, an aryl sulfonate group, and an aryl alkyl sulfonate group as a group involved in condensation polymerization. This is a method for producing an ionic polymer by condensation polymerization in the presence of a nickel zero-valent complex using a starting material monomer. Examples of the raw material monomer used in such a method include dihalogenated compounds, bis (alkyl sulfonate) compounds, bis (aryl sulfonate) compounds, bis (aryl alkyl sulfonate) compounds, halogen-alkyl sulfonate compounds, and halogen-aryl sulfonates. Compounds, halogen-aryl alkyl sulfonate compounds, alkyl sulfonate-aryl sulfonate compounds, alkyl sulfonate-aryl alkyl sulfonate compounds and aryl sulfonate-aryl alkyl sulfonate compounds.
 前記イオン性ポリマーの好ましい製造方法の他の態様は、縮合重合に関与する基として、ハロゲン原子、アルキルスルホネート基、アリールスルホネート基、アリールアルキルスルホネート基、-B(OH)、及びホウ酸エステル残基からなる群から選ばれる基を有し、全原料モノマーが有する、ハロゲン原子、アルキルスルホネート基、アリールスルホネート基及びアリールアルキルスルホネート基のモル数の合計(J)と、-B(OH)及びホウ酸エステル残基のモル数の合計(K)の比が実質的に1(通常 K/J は0.7~1.2の範囲)である原料モノマーを用いて、ニッケル触媒又はパラジウム触媒の存在下で縮合重合して、イオン性ポリマーを製造する方法である。 In another aspect of the preferred production method of the ionic polymer, a group involved in condensation polymerization includes a halogen atom, an alkyl sulfonate group, an aryl sulfonate group, an aryl alkyl sulfonate group, —B (OH) 2 , and a boric acid ester residue. The total number of moles of halogen atoms, alkyl sulfonate groups, aryl sulfonate groups and arylalkyl sulfonate groups (J), and —B (OH) 2 and Using a raw material monomer in which the ratio of the total number of moles of boric acid ester residues (K) is substantially 1 (usually K / J is in the range of 0.7 to 1.2), the nickel catalyst or palladium catalyst It is a method for producing an ionic polymer by condensation polymerization in the presence.
 前記有機溶媒としては、用いる化合物や反応によっても異なるが、一般に副反応を抑制するために十分に脱酸素処理を施した有機溶媒を用いることが好ましい。イオン性ポリマーを製造する際には、このような有機溶媒を用いて不活性雰囲気下で反応を進行させることが好ましい。また、前記有機溶媒においては、前記脱酸素処理と同様に脱水処理を行うことが好ましい。但し、Suzukiカップリング反応等の水との2相系での反応の場合にはその限りではない。 As the organic solvent, although it varies depending on the compound and reaction used, it is generally preferable to use an organic solvent that has been sufficiently deoxygenated to suppress side reactions. When manufacturing an ionic polymer, it is preferable to advance reaction in inert atmosphere using such an organic solvent. In the organic solvent, it is preferable to perform a dehydration process in the same manner as the deoxygenation process. However, this is not the case in the case of reaction in a two-phase system with water such as Suzuki coupling reaction.
 このような有機溶媒としては、ペンタン、ヘキサン、ヘプタン、オクタン、シクロヘキサン等の飽和炭化水素、ベンゼン、トルエン、エチルベンゼン、キシレン等の不飽和炭化水素、四塩化炭素、クロロホルム、ジクロロメタン、クロロブタン、ブロモブタン、クロロペンタン、ブロモペンタン、クロロヘキサン、ブロモヘキサン、クロロシクロヘキサン、ブロモシクロヘキサン等のハロゲン化飽和炭化水素、クロロベンゼン、ジクロロベンゼン、トリクロロベンゼン等のハロゲン化不飽和炭化水素、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、イソプロパノール、ブタノール、t-ブチルアルコール等のアルコール類、蟻酸、酢酸、プロピオン酸等のカルボン酸類、ジメチルエーテル、ジエチルエーテル、メチル-t-ブチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、テトラヒドロピラン、ジオキサン等のエーテル類、トリメチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、N,N,N’,N’-テトラメチルエチレンジアミン、ピリジン等のアミン類、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N,N-ジエチルアセトアミド、N-メチルモルホリンオキシド等のアミド類が例示される。これらの有機溶媒は1種を単独で、又は2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。また、このような有機溶媒の中でも、反応性の観点からはエーテル類がより好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン、ジエチルエーテルが更に好ましく、反応速度の観点からはトルエン、キシレンが好ましい。 Examples of such organic solvents include saturated hydrocarbons such as pentane, hexane, heptane, octane and cyclohexane, unsaturated hydrocarbons such as benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene and xylene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, dichloromethane, chlorobutane, bromobutane, chloro Halogenated saturated hydrocarbons such as pentane, bromopentane, chlorohexane, bromohexane, chlorocyclohexane and bromocyclohexane, halogenated unsaturated hydrocarbons such as chlorobenzene, dichlorobenzene and trichlorobenzene, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, alcohols such as t-butyl alcohol, carboxylic acids such as formic acid, acetic acid and propionic acid, dimethyl ether, diethyl ether, methyl-t-butyl ether, Ethers such as lahydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, dioxane, trimethylamine, triethylamine, amines such as N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethylethylenediamine, pyridine, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N And amides such as N-diethylacetamide and N-methylmorpholine oxide. These organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among these organic solvents, ethers are more preferable from the viewpoint of reactivity, tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether are more preferable, and toluene and xylene are preferable from the viewpoint of reaction rate.
 前記イオン性ポリマーを製造する際においては、原料モノマーを反応させるために、アルカリや適当な触媒を添加することが好ましい。このようなアルカリ又は触媒は、採用する重合方法等に応じて選択すればよい。このようなアルカリ又は触媒としては、反応に用いる溶媒に十分に溶解するものが好ましい。また、前記アルカリ又は触媒を混合する方法としては、反応液をアルゴンや窒素等の不活性雰囲気下で攪拌しながらゆっくりとアルカリ又は触媒の溶液を添加するか、アルカリ又は触媒の溶液に反応液をゆっくりと添加する方法が例示される。 In producing the ionic polymer, it is preferable to add an alkali or a suitable catalyst in order to react the raw material monomers. What is necessary is just to select such an alkali or a catalyst according to the superposition | polymerization method etc. to employ | adopt. Such an alkali or catalyst is preferably one that is sufficiently dissolved in the solvent used in the reaction. Further, as a method of mixing the alkali or catalyst, the alkali or catalyst solution is slowly added while stirring the reaction liquid under an inert atmosphere such as argon or nitrogen, or the reaction liquid is added to the alkali or catalyst solution. The method of adding slowly is illustrated.
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーにおいては、末端基に重合活性基がそのまま残っていると得られる発光素子の発光特性や寿命特性が低下する可能性があるため、末端基が安定な基で保護されていてもよい。このように安定な基で末端基が保護されている場合、本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーが共役化合物であるときには、該イオン性ポリマーの主鎖の共役構造と連続した共役結合を有していることが好ましく、その構造としては、例えば、炭素-炭素結合を介してアリール基又は複素環基と結合している構造が挙げられる。このような末端基を保護する安定な基としては、特開平9-45478号公報において化10の構造式で示される1価の芳香族化合物基等の置換基が挙げられる。 In the ionic polymer used in the present invention, if the polymerization active group remains as it is in the terminal group, the light emitting characteristics and life characteristics of the resulting light emitting device may be deteriorated. Therefore, the terminal group is protected with a stable group. May be. When the terminal group is protected with such a stable group, when the ionic polymer used in the present invention is a conjugated compound, it has a conjugated bond continuous with the conjugated structure of the main chain of the ionic polymer. The structure is preferably, for example, a structure bonded to an aryl group or a heterocyclic group via a carbon-carbon bond. Examples of such a stable group for protecting the end group include substituents such as a monovalent aromatic compound group represented by the structural formula of Chemical Formula 10 in JP-A-9-45478.
 式(1)で表される構造単位を含むイオン性ポリマーを製造する他の好ましい方法としては、第1工程でカチオンを有さないイオン性ポリマーを重合し、第2工程で該イオン性ポリマーからカチオンを含有するイオン性ポリマーを製造する方法が挙げられる。第1工程のカチオンを有さないイオン性ポリマーを重合する方法としては、前述の縮合重合反応が挙げられる。第2工程の反応としては、金属水酸化物、アルキルアンモニウムヒドロキシド等による加水分解反応等が挙げられる。 As another preferable method for producing the ionic polymer containing the structural unit represented by the formula (1), an ionic polymer having no cation is polymerized in the first step, and then from the ionic polymer in the second step. The method of manufacturing the ionic polymer containing a cation is mentioned. As the method for polymerizing the ionic polymer having no cation in the first step, the above-mentioned condensation polymerization reaction may be mentioned. Examples of the reaction in the second step include a hydrolysis reaction with a metal hydroxide, an alkyl ammonium hydroxide, or the like.
 式(2)で表される基を含むイオン性ポリマーを製造する他の好ましい方法としては、第1工程でイオンを有さないイオン性ポリマーを重合し、第2工程で該イオン性ポリマーからイオンを含有するイオン性ポリマーを製造する方法が挙げられる。第1工程のイオンを有さないイオン性ポリマーを重合する方法としては、前述の縮合重合反応が挙げられる。第2工程の反応としては、ハロゲン化アルキルを用いたアミンの4級アンモニウム塩化反応、SbFによるハロゲン引き抜き反応等が挙げられる。 As another preferred method for producing an ionic polymer containing a group represented by the formula (2), an ionic polymer having no ions is polymerized in the first step, and ions are generated from the ionic polymer in the second step. The method of manufacturing the ionic polymer containing this is mentioned. As a method for polymerizing an ionic polymer having no ions in the first step, the above-mentioned condensation polymerization reaction may be mentioned. Examples of the reaction in the second step include quaternary ammonium chlorination reaction of amine using alkyl halide, halogen abstraction reaction with SbF 5 and the like.
 本発明に用いられるイオン性ポリマーは電荷の注入性や輸送性に優れるため、高輝度で発光する素子が得られる。 Since the ionic polymer used in the present invention is excellent in charge injection and transportability, an element that emits light with high brightness can be obtained.
 イオン性ポリマーを含む層を形成する方法としては、例えば、イオン性ポリマーを含有する溶液を用いて成膜する方法が挙げられる。 Examples of a method for forming a layer containing an ionic polymer include a method of forming a film using a solution containing an ionic polymer.
 このような溶液からの成膜に用いる溶媒としては、水を除くアルコール類、エーテル類、エステル類、二トリル化合物類、ニトロ化合物類、ハロゲン化アルキル類、ハロゲン化アリール類、チオール類、スルフィド類、スルホキシド類、チオケトン類、アミド類、カルボン酸類等の溶媒のうち、溶解度パラメーターが9.3以上の溶媒が好ましい。該溶媒の例(各括弧内の値は、各溶媒の溶解度パラメーターの値を表す)としては、メタノール(12.9)、エタノール(11.2)、2-プロパノール(11.5)、1-ブタノール(9.9)、t-ブチルアルコール(10.5)、アセトニトリル(11.8)、1,2-エタンジオール(14.7)、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド(11.5)、ジメチルスルホキシド(12.8)、酢酸(12.4)、ニトロベンゼン(11.1)、ニトロメタン(11.0)、1,2-ジクロロエタン(9.7)、ジクロロメタン(9.6)、クロロベンゼン(9.6)、ブロモベンゼン(9.9)、ジオキサン(9.8)、炭酸プロピレン(13.3)、ピリジン(10.4)、二硫化炭素(10.0)、及びこれらの溶媒の混合溶媒が挙げられる。ここで、2種の溶媒(溶媒1、溶媒2とする)を混合してなる混合溶媒について説明すると、該混合溶媒の溶解度パラメーター(δ)は、δ=δ×φ+δ×φにより求めることとする(δは溶媒1の溶解度パラメーター、φは溶媒1の体積分率、δは溶媒2の溶解度パラメーター、φは溶媒2の体積分率である。) Solvents used for film formation from such solutions include alcohols other than water, ethers, esters, nitrile compounds, nitro compounds, alkyl halides, aryl halides, thiols, sulfides Of the solvents such as sulfoxides, thioketones, amides and carboxylic acids, those having a solubility parameter of 9.3 or more are preferable. Examples of the solvent (values in parentheses represent solubility parameter values of each solvent) include methanol (12.9), ethanol (11.2), 2-propanol (11.5), 1- Butanol (9.9), t-butyl alcohol (10.5), acetonitrile (11.8), 1,2-ethanediol (14.7), N, N-dimethylformamide (11.5), dimethyl sulfoxide (12.8), acetic acid (12.4), nitrobenzene (11.1), nitromethane (11.0), 1,2-dichloroethane (9.7), dichloromethane (9.6), chlorobenzene (9.6) ), Bromobenzene (9.9), dioxane (9.8), propylene carbonate (13.3), pyridine (10.4), carbon disulfide (10.0), and a mixed solvent thereof. It is. Here, a mixed solvent formed by mixing two kinds of solvents (referred to as solvent 1 and solvent 2) will be described. The solubility parameter (δ m ) of the mixed solvent is δ m = δ 1 × φ 1 + δ 2 × it that obtained by phi 2 ([delta] 1 is the solubility parameter of the solvent 1, phi 1 is the volume fraction of solvent 1, [delta] 2 is the solubility parameter, phi 2 is the volume fraction of solvent 2 in the solvent 2.)
 電子注入層の膜厚としては、用いるイオン性ポリマーによって最適値が異なるため、駆動電圧と発光効率が適度な値となるように選択すればよく、ピンホールが発生しない厚さが必要である。素子の駆動電圧を低くする観点からは、該膜厚は、1nm~1μmであることが好ましく、2nm~500nmであることがより好ましく、2nm~200nmであることがさらに好ましい。発光層を保護する観点からは、該膜厚は、5nm~1μmであることが好ましい。 As the film thickness of the electron injection layer, the optimum value varies depending on the ionic polymer to be used, so that the drive voltage and the light emission efficiency may be selected to be appropriate values, and a thickness that does not cause pinholes is required. From the viewpoint of lowering the driving voltage of the element, the film thickness is preferably 1 nm to 1 μm, more preferably 2 nm to 500 nm, and even more preferably 2 nm to 200 nm. From the viewpoint of protecting the light emitting layer, the film thickness is preferably 5 nm to 1 μm.
 <陰極>
 陰極の材料としては、電気伝導度の高い材料が好ましい。また陽極側から光を取出す構成の有機EL素子では、発光層からの光を陰極で陽極側に反射するために、陰極の材料としては可視光反射率の高い材料が好ましい。陰極には、金、銀、白金、銅、アルミニウム、マンガン、チタン、コバルト、ニッケル、タングステン、錫の単体もしくは1種以上を含む合金、またはグラファイト若しくはグラファイト層間化合物などが用いられる。また、陰極としては導電性金属酸化物、導電性樹脂、および樹脂と導電性フィラーの混合物などを用いることができる。具体的には、導電性金属酸化物として酸化インジウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化スズ、ITO、およびIZOを挙げることができ、導電性樹脂として3,4-ポリエチレンジオキシチオフェン/ポリスチレンスルフォン酸などを挙げることができる。
樹脂と導電性フィラーとからなる薄膜の場合、樹脂には導電性樹脂を使用することができる。また導電性フィラーとしては、金属微粒子や導電性ワイヤーなどを使用することができる。導電性フィラーとしてはAuやAg、Alなどを使用することができる。なお陰極は、2層以上を積層した積層体で構成されていてもよい。
<Cathode>
As a material for the cathode, a material having high electrical conductivity is preferable. Moreover, in the organic EL element of the structure which takes out light from an anode side, in order to reflect the light from a light emitting layer to an anode side with a cathode, the material with a high visible light reflectance is preferable as a material of a cathode. For the cathode, gold, silver, platinum, copper, aluminum, manganese, titanium, cobalt, nickel, tungsten, tin alone or an alloy containing one or more, graphite, or a graphite intercalation compound is used. As the cathode, a conductive metal oxide, a conductive resin, a mixture of a resin and a conductive filler, or the like can be used. Specifically, examples of the conductive metal oxide include indium oxide, zinc oxide, tin oxide, ITO, and IZO, and examples of the conductive resin include 3,4-polyethylenedioxythiophene / polystyrene sulfonic acid. Can do.
In the case of a thin film composed of a resin and a conductive filler, a conductive resin can be used as the resin. Further, as the conductive filler, metal fine particles, conductive wires, and the like can be used. As the conductive filler, Au, Ag, Al, or the like can be used. The cathode may be composed of a laminate in which two or more layers are laminated.
 陰極の膜厚は、求められる特性および工程の簡易さなどを考慮して適宜設計され、たとえば10nm~10μmであり、好ましくは20nm~1μmであり、さらに好ましくは50nm~500nmである。 The film thickness of the cathode is appropriately designed in consideration of required characteristics and process simplicity, and is, for example, 10 nm to 10 μm, preferably 20 nm to 1 μm, and more preferably 50 nm to 500 nm.
 陰極の作製方法としては、真空蒸着法、スパッタリング法、また金属薄膜を熱圧着するラミネート法などを挙げることができる。また陰極の作製方法として、導電性フィラーおよび樹脂を分散媒に分散させたインキを用いる場合、塗布法を用いることができる。 Examples of the method for producing the cathode include a vacuum deposition method, a sputtering method, and a laminating method in which a metal thin film is thermocompression bonded. As a method for manufacturing the cathode, a coating method can be used in the case of using ink in which a conductive filler and a resin are dispersed in a dispersion medium.
 以下の方法で、イオン性ポリマーを作製するとともに、このイオン性ポリマーを電子注入層に使用して有機EL素子を作製した。 An ionic polymer was produced by the following method, and an organic EL device was produced using this ionic polymer for an electron injection layer.
 [参考例1]
 2,7-ジブロモ-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(化合物A)の合成
 2,7-ジブロモ-9-フルオレノン(52.5g)、サリチル酸エチル(154.8g)、及びメルカプト酢酸(1.4g)を300mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。そこに、メタンスルホン酸(630mL)を添加し、混合物を75℃で終夜撹拌した。混合物を放冷し、氷水に添加して1時間撹拌した。生じた固体をろ別し、加熱したアセトニトリルで洗浄した。洗浄済みの該固体をアセトンに溶解させ、得られたアセトン溶液から固体を再結晶させ、ろ別した。得られた固体(62.7g)、2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]-p-トルエンスルホネート(86.3g)、炭酸カリウム(62.6g)、及び18-クラウン-6(7.2g)をN、N-ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)(670 mL)に溶解させ、溶液をフラスコへ移して105℃で終夜撹拌した。得られた混合物を室温まで放冷し、氷水へ加え、1時間撹拌した。反応液にクロロホルム(300mL)を加えて分液抽出を行い、溶液を濃縮することで、2,7-ジブロモ-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(化合物A)(51.2g)を得た。
[Reference Example 1]
Synthesis of 2,7-dibromo-9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (compound A) 2,7-dibromo -9-fluorenone (52.5 g), ethyl salicylate (154.8 g), and mercaptoacetic acid (1.4 g) were placed in a 300 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Thereto was added methanesulfonic acid (630 mL) and the mixture was stirred at 75 ° C. overnight. The mixture was allowed to cool, added to ice water and stirred for 1 hour. The resulting solid was filtered off and washed with heated acetonitrile. The washed solid was dissolved in acetone, and the solid was recrystallized from the obtained acetone solution and filtered. The resulting solid (62.7 g), 2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] -p-toluenesulfonate (86.3 g), potassium carbonate (62.6 g), and 18-crown-6 (7 2 g) was dissolved in N, N-dimethylformamide (DMF) (670 mL) and the solution was transferred to a flask and stirred at 105 ° C. overnight. The obtained mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, added to ice water, and stirred for 1 hour. Chloroform (300 mL) was added to the reaction solution, liquid separation extraction was performed, and the solution was concentrated to give 2,7-dibromo-9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- [2- (2 -Methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (Compound A) (51.2 g) was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
    化合物A
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Compound A
[参考例2]
 2,7-ビス(4,4,5,5-テトラメチル-1,3,2-ジオキサボロラン-2-イル)-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(化合物B)の合成
 窒素雰囲気下、化合物A(15g)、ビス(ピナコラート)ジボロン(8.9g)、[1,1’-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)フェロセン]ジクロロパラジウム(II)ジクロロメタン錯体(0.8g)、1,1’-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)フェロセン(0.5g)、酢酸カリウム(9.4g)、ジオキサン(400mL)を混合し、110℃に加熱し、10時間加熱還流させた。放冷後、反応液をろ過し、ろ液を減圧濃縮した。反応混合物をメタノールで3回洗浄した。沈殿物をトルエンに溶解させ、溶液に活性炭を加えて攪拌した。その後、ろ過を行い、ろ液を減圧濃縮することで、2,7-ビス(4,4,5,5-テトラメチル-1,3,2-ジオキサボロラン-2-イル)-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(化合物B)(11.7g)を得た。
[Reference Example 2]
2,7-bis (4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl) -9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- [2- ( Synthesis of 2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (Compound B) Compound A (15 g), bis (pinacolato) diboron (8.9 g), [1,1′-bis (diphenylphos) under nitrogen atmosphere Fino) ferrocene] dichloropalladium (II) dichloromethane complex (0.8 g), 1,1′-bis (diphenylphosphino) ferrocene (0.5 g), potassium acetate (9.4 g), dioxane (400 mL) were mixed. , Heated to 110 ° C. and heated to reflux for 10 hours. The reaction liquid was filtered after standing_to_cool and the filtrate was concentrate | evaporated under reduced pressure. The reaction mixture was washed 3 times with methanol. The precipitate was dissolved in toluene, and activated carbon was added to the solution and stirred. Thereafter, filtration is performed, and the filtrate is concentrated under reduced pressure to give 2,7-bis (4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl) -9,9-bis. [3-Ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (Compound B) (11.7 g) was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
     化合物B
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
Compound B
[参考例3]
 ポリ[9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン](重合体A)の合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物A(0.55g)、化合物B(0.61g)、トリフェニルホスフィンパラジウム(0.01g)、メチルトリオクチルアンモニウムクロライド(アルドリッチ製、商品名Aliquat336(登録商標))(0.20g)、及びトルエン(10mL)を混合し、105℃に加熱した。この反応液に2M 炭酸ナトリウム水溶液(6mL)を滴下し、8時間還流させた。反応液に4-t-ブチルフェニルボロン酸(0.01g)を加え、6時間還流させた。次いで、ジエチルジチアカルバミン酸ナトリウム水溶液(10mL、濃度:0.05g/mL)を加え、2時間撹拌した。混合溶液をメタノール300mL中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して2時間減圧乾燥させ、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。得られた溶液をメタノール120ml、3重量%酢酸水溶液50mLの混合溶媒中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過し、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。こうして得られた溶液をメタノール200mlに滴下して30分攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して固体を得た。得られた固体をテトラヒドロフランに溶解させ、アルミナカラム、シリカゲルカラムを通すことにより精製した。カラムから回収したテトラヒドロフラン溶液を濃縮した後、メタノール(200mL)に滴下し、析出した固体をろ過し、乾燥させた。得られたポリ[9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-ビス[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン](重合体A(BSAFEGP))の収量は520mgであった。
[Reference Example 3]
Synthesis of poly [9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene] (Polymer A) Compound A under an inert atmosphere (0.55 g), Compound B (0.61 g), triphenylphosphine palladium (0.01 g), methyl trioctyl ammonium chloride (manufactured by Aldrich, trade name Aliquat 336 (registered trademark)) (0.20 g), and toluene ( 10 mL) and heated to 105 ° C. To this reaction solution, 2M aqueous sodium carbonate solution (6 mL) was added dropwise and refluxed for 8 hours. 4-t-butylphenylboronic acid (0.01 g) was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was refluxed for 6 hours. Then, a sodium diethyldithiacarbamate aqueous solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The mixed solution was dropped into 300 mL of methanol and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered, dried under reduced pressure for 2 hours, and dissolved in 20 mL of tetrahydrofuran. The obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran. The solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid. The obtained solid was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried. Yield of the obtained poly [9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4-bis [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene] (polymer A (BSAFEGGP)) Was 520 mg.
 重合体Aのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は5.2×10であった。重合体Aは、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位からなる。 The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer A was 5.2 × 10 4 . The polymer A consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
[実験例1]
 重合体Aセシウム塩の合成
 重合体A(200mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(20mL)、及びエタノール(20mL)を添加し、混合物を55℃に昇温した。そこに、水酸化セシウム(200mg)を水(2mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、55℃で6時間撹拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(150mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体A内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Aのセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物1と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物1は式(B)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、100モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物1のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.5eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.7eVであった。
[Experimental Example 1]
Synthesis of Polymer A Cesium Salt Polymer A (200 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) and ethanol (20 mL) were added and the mixture was warmed to 55 ° C. An aqueous solution in which cesium hydroxide (200 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL) was added thereto, and the mixture was stirred at 55 ° C. for 6 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (150 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer A completely disappeared. The obtained cesium salt of polymer A is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 1. Conjugated polymer compound 1 is composed of a repeating unit represented by formula (B) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) ”is 100 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 1 had an orbital energy of HOMO of −5.5 eV and an orbital energy of LUMO of −2.7 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
[実験例2]
 重合体Aカリウム塩の合成
 重合体A(200mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(20mL)、及びメタノール(10mL)を混合し、混合溶液に、水酸化カリウム(400mg)を水(2mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で1時間撹拌した。反応溶液にメタノール50mLを加え、さらに65℃で4時間攪拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(131mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体A内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Aのカリウム塩を共役高分子化合物2と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物2は式(C)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、100モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物2のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.5eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.7eVであった。
[Experiment 2]
Synthesis of Polymer A Potassium Salt Polymer A (200 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) and methanol (10 mL) were mixed, an aqueous solution in which potassium hydroxide (400 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 1 hour. 50 mL of methanol was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further stirred at 65 ° C. for 4 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (131 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer A completely disappeared. The obtained potassium salt of polymer A is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 2. Conjugated polymer compound 2 is composed of a repeating unit represented by formula (C) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 100 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 2 had an orbital energy of HOMO of −5.5 eV and an orbital energy of LUMO of −2.7 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
[実験例3]
 重合体Aナトリウム塩の合成
 重合体A(200mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(20mL)、及びメタノール(10mL)を混合し、混合溶液に、水酸化ナトリウム(260mg)を水(2mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で1時間撹拌した。反応溶液にメタノール30mLを加え、さらに65℃で4時間攪拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(123mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体A内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Aのナトリウム塩を共役高分子化合物3と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物3は式(D)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、100モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物3のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.6eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.8eVであった。
[Experiment 3]
Synthesis of Polymer A Sodium Salt Polymer A (200 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) and methanol (10 mL) were mixed, an aqueous solution in which sodium hydroxide (260 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 1 hr. 30 mL of methanol was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further stirred at 65 ° C. for 4 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (123 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer A completely disappeared. The resulting sodium salt of polymer A is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 3. Conjugated polymer compound 3 is composed of a repeating unit represented by formula (D) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 100 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 3 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.8 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
[実験例4]
 重合体Aアンモニウム塩の合成
 重合体A(200mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(20mL)、及びメタノール(15mL)を混合し、混合溶液にテトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(50mg)を水(1mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で6時間撹拌した。反応溶液にテトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(50mg)を水(1mL)に溶解させた水溶液を加え、さらに65℃で4時間攪拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(150mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体A内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが90%消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Aのアンモニウム塩を共役高分子化合物4と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物4は式(E)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、90モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物4のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.6eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.8eVであった。
[Experimental Example 4]
Synthesis of Polymer A Ammonium Salt Polymer A (200 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) and methanol (15 mL) were mixed, an aqueous solution in which tetramethylammonium hydroxide (50 mg) was dissolved in water (1 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 6 hours. An aqueous solution in which tetramethylammonium hydroxide (50 mg) was dissolved in water (1 mL) was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further stirred at 65 ° C. for 4 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (150 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that 90% of the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer A disappeared. The resulting ammonium salt of polymer A is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 4. The conjugated polymer compound 4 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (E) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 90 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 4 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.8 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
[参考例4]
 2,7-ビス[7-(4-メチルフェニル)-9,9-ジオクチルフルオレン-2-イル]-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(重合体B)の合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物A(0.52g)、2,7-ビス(1,3,2-ジオキサボロラン-2-イル)-9,9-ジオクチルフルオレン(1.29g)、トリフェニルホスフィンパラジウム(0.0087g)、メチルトリオクチルアンモニウムクロライド(アルドリッチ製、商品名Aliquat336(登録商標))(0.20g)、トルエン(10mL)、及び2M炭酸ナトリウム水溶液(10mL)を混合し、80℃に加熱した。反応液を3.5時間反応させた。その後、そこに、パラブロモトルエン(0.68g)を加えて、更に2.5時間反応させた。反応後、反応液を室温まで冷却し、酢酸エチル50ml/蒸留水50mlを加えて水層を除去した。再び蒸留水50mlを加えて水層を除去した後、乾燥剤として硫酸マグネシウムを加えて、不溶物をろ過して、有機溶媒を除去した。その後、得られた残渣を再びTHF10mLに溶かして、飽和ジエチルジチオカルバミン酸ナトリウム水2mLを添加して、30分間撹拌した後、有機溶媒を除去した。アルミナカラム(展開溶媒 ヘキサン:酢酸エチル=1:1、v/v)を通して精製を行い、析出した沈殿をろ過して12時間減圧乾燥させたところ、2,7-ビス[7-(4-メチルフェニル)-9,9-ジオクチルフルオレン-2-イル]-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(重合体B)が524mg得られた。
[Reference Example 4]
2,7-bis [7- (4-methylphenyl) -9,9-dioctylfluoren-2-yl] -9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- [2- (2-methoxy) Synthesis of ethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (Polymer B) Compound A (0.52 g), 2,7-bis (1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl) -9 under inert atmosphere , 9-dioctylfluorene (1.29 g), triphenylphosphine palladium (0.0087 g), methyl trioctyl ammonium chloride (manufactured by Aldrich, trade name Aliquat 336 (registered trademark)) (0.20 g), toluene (10 mL), and 2M aqueous sodium carbonate solution (10 mL) was mixed and heated to 80 ° C. The reaction was allowed to react for 3.5 hours. Thereafter, parabromotoluene (0.68 g) was added thereto, and the mixture was further reacted for 2.5 hours. After the reaction, the reaction solution was cooled to room temperature, 50 ml of ethyl acetate / 50 ml of distilled water were added, and the aqueous layer was removed. After adding 50 ml of distilled water again to remove the aqueous layer, magnesium sulfate was added as a desiccant, and the insoluble matter was filtered to remove the organic solvent. Thereafter, the obtained residue was dissolved again in 10 mL of THF, 2 mL of saturated aqueous sodium diethyldithiocarbamate was added and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the organic solvent was removed. Purification was performed through an alumina column (developing solvent hexane: ethyl acetate = 1: 1, v / v), and the deposited precipitate was filtered and dried under reduced pressure for 12 hours. As a result, 2,7-bis [7- (4-methyl Phenyl) -9,9-dioctylfluoren-2-yl] -9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (heavy 524 mg of union B) was obtained.
 重合体Bのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は、2.0×10であった。なお、重合体Bは、式(F)で表される。 The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer B was 2.0 × 10 3 . The polymer B is represented by the formula (F).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
[実験例5]
重合体Bセシウム塩の合成
 重合体B(262mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、アルゴン置換した。そこに、テトラヒドロフラン(10mL)、及びメタノール(15mL)を添加し、混合物を55℃に昇温した。そこに、水酸化セシウム(341mg)を水(1mL)に溶かした水溶液を添加し、55℃で5時間撹拌した。得られた混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(250mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、エチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Bセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物5と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物5は、式(G)で表される(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、小数第二位で四捨五入して、33.3モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物5のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.6eVであり、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.6eVであった。
[Experimental Example 5]
Synthesis of Polymer B Cesium Salt Polymer B (262 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with argon. Tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) and methanol (15 mL) were added thereto, and the mixture was heated to 55 ° C. The aqueous solution which melt | dissolved cesium hydroxide (341 mg) in water (1 mL) was added there, and it stirred at 55 degreeC for 5 hours. After the resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (250 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site had completely disappeared. The obtained polymer B cesium salt is referred to as a conjugated polymer compound 5. The conjugated polymer compound 5 is represented by the formula (G) (“one type selected from the group consisting of the group represented by the formula (1) and the group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units). "Ratio of repeating units containing the above groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3)" and "in formulas (13), (15), (17), (20) in all repeating units" “The ratio of the repeating unit represented” is 33.3 mol% rounded off to the second decimal place.) The conjugated polymer compound 5 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.6 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
[参考例5]
重合体Cの合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物A(0.40g)、化合物B(0.49g)、N,N’-ビス(4-ブロモフェニル)-N,N’-ビス(4-t-ブチル-2,6-ジメチルフェニル)1,4-フェニレンジアミン(35mg)、トリフェニルホスフィンパラジウム(8mg)、メチルトリオクチルアンモニウムクロライド(アルドリッチ製、商品名Aliquat336(登録商標))(0.20g)、及びトルエン(10mL)を混合し、105℃に加熱した。この反応液に2M 炭酸ナトリウム水溶液(6mL)を滴下し、8時間還流させた。反応液にフェニルボロン酸(0.01g)を加え、6時間還流させた。次いで、ジエチルジチアカルバミン酸ナトリウム水溶液(10mL、濃度:0.05g/mL)を加え、2時間撹拌した。混合溶液をメタノール300mL中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して2時間減圧乾燥させ、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。得られた溶液をメタノール120ml、3重量%酢酸水溶液50mLの混合溶媒中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過し、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。こうして得られた溶液をメタノール200mlに滴下して30分攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して固体を得た。得られた固体をテトラヒドロフランに溶解させ、アルミナカラム、シリカゲルカラムを通すことにより精製した。カラムから回収したテトラヒドロフラン溶液を濃縮した後、メタノール(200mL)に滴下し、析出した固体をろ過し、乾燥させた。得られた重合体Cの収量は526mgであった。
[Reference Example 5]
Synthesis of Polymer C Compound A (0.40 g), Compound B (0.49 g), N, N′-bis (4-bromophenyl) -N, N′-bis (4-t-) under an inert atmosphere Butyl-2,6-dimethylphenyl) 1,4-phenylenediamine (35 mg), triphenylphosphine palladium (8 mg), methyltrioctylammonium chloride (manufactured by Aldrich, trade name Aliquat 336 (registered trademark)) (0.20 g), And toluene (10 mL) were mixed and heated to 105 ° C. To this reaction solution, 2M aqueous sodium carbonate solution (6 mL) was added dropwise and refluxed for 8 hours. Phenylboronic acid (0.01 g) was added to the reaction solution and refluxed for 6 hours. Then, a sodium diethyldithiacarbamate aqueous solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The mixed solution was dropped into 300 mL of methanol and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered, dried under reduced pressure for 2 hours, and dissolved in 20 mL of tetrahydrofuran. The obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran. The solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid. The obtained solid was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried. The yield of the obtained polymer C was 526 mg.
 重合体Cのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は3.6×10であった。重合体Cは、式(H)で表される繰り返し単位からなる。 The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer C was 3.6 × 10 4 . The polymer C consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (H).
 なお、N,N’-ビス(4-ブロモフェニル)-N,N’-ビス(4-t-ブチル-2,6-ジメチルフェニル)1,4-フェニレンジアミンは、例えば特開2008-74017号公報に記載されている方法で合成することができる。 N, N′-bis (4-bromophenyl) -N, N′-bis (4-t-butyl-2,6-dimethylphenyl) 1,4-phenylenediamine is disclosed in, for example, JP-A-2008-74017. It can be synthesized by the method described in the publication.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
[実験例6]
 重合体Cセシウム塩の合成
 重合体C(200mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(20mL)、及びメタノール(20mL)を添加し混合した。混合溶液に、水酸化セシウム(200mg)を水(2mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で1時間撹拌した。反応溶液にメタノール30mLを加え、さらに65℃で4時間攪拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(150mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体C内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Cのセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物6と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物6は式(I)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、95モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物6のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.3eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.6eVであった。
[Experimental Example 6]
Synthesis of Polymer C Cesium Salt Polymer C (200 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) and methanol (20 mL) were added and mixed. An aqueous solution in which cesium hydroxide (200 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 1 hour. 30 mL of methanol was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further stirred at 65 ° C. for 4 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (150 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer C had completely disappeared. The obtained cesium salt of polymer C is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 6. The conjugated polymer compound 6 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (I) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 95 mol%.). The conjugated polymer compound 6 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.3 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.6 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
[参考例6]
重合体Dの合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物A(0.55g)、化合物B(0.67g)、N,N’-ビス(4-ブロモフェニル)-N,N’-ビス(4-t-ブチル-2,6-ジメチルフェニル)1,4-フェニレンジアミン(0.038g)、3,7-ジブロモ-N-(4-n-ブチルフェニル)フェノキサジン 0.009g、トリフェニルホスフィンパラジウム(0.01g)、メチルトリオクチルアンモニウムクロライド(アルドリッチ製、商品名Aliquat336(登録商標))(0.20g)、及びトルエン(10mL)を混合し、105℃に加熱した。この反応液に2M 炭酸ナトリウム水溶液(6mL)を滴下し、2時間還流させた。反応液にフェニルボロン酸(0.004g)を加え、6時間還流させた。次いで、ジエチルジチアカルバミン酸ナトリウム水溶液(10mL、濃度:0.05g/mL)を加え、2時間撹拌した。混合溶液をメタノール300mL中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して2時間減圧乾燥させ、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。得られた溶液をメタノール120ml、3重量%酢酸水溶液50mLの混合溶媒中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過し、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。こうして得られた溶液をメタノール200mlに滴下して30分攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して固体を得た。得られた固体をテトラヒドロフランに溶解させ、アルミナカラム、シリカゲルカラムを通すことにより精製した。カラムから回収したテトラヒドロフラン溶液を濃縮した後、メタノール(200mL)に滴下し、析出した固体をろ過し、乾燥させた。得られた重合体Dの収量は590mgであった。
[Reference Example 6]
Synthesis of Polymer D Compound A (0.55 g), Compound B (0.67 g), N, N′-bis (4-bromophenyl) -N, N′-bis (4-t-) under an inert atmosphere Butyl-2,6-dimethylphenyl) 1,4-phenylenediamine (0.038 g), 3,7-dibromo-N- (4-n-butylphenyl) phenoxazine 0.009 g, triphenylphosphine palladium (0. 01 g), methyltrioctylammonium chloride (manufactured by Aldrich, trade name Aliquat 336 (registered trademark)) (0.20 g), and toluene (10 mL) were mixed and heated to 105 ° C. To this reaction solution, 2M aqueous sodium carbonate solution (6 mL) was added dropwise and refluxed for 2 hours. Phenylboronic acid (0.004 g) was added to the reaction solution and refluxed for 6 hours. Then, a sodium diethyldithiacarbamate aqueous solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The mixed solution was dropped into 300 mL of methanol and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered, dried under reduced pressure for 2 hours, and dissolved in 20 mL of tetrahydrofuran. The obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran. The solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid. The obtained solid was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried. The yield of the obtained polymer D was 590 mg.
 重合体Dのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は2.7×10であった。重合体Dは、式(J)で表される繰り返し単位からなる。
 なお、3,7-ジブロモ-N-(4-n-ブチルフェニル)フェノキサジンは、JP2004137456に記載の方法で合成した。
The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer D was 2.7 × 10 4 . The polymer D consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (J).
3,7-Dibromo-N- (4-n-butylphenyl) phenoxazine was synthesized by the method described in JP2004137456.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
[実験例7]
 重合体Dセシウム塩の合成
 重合体D(200mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(15mL)、及びメタノール(10mL)を混合した。混合溶液に、水酸化セシウム(360mg)を水(2mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で3時間撹拌した。反応溶液にメタノール10mLを加え、さらに65℃で4時間攪拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(210mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体D内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Dのセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物7と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物7は式(K)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、90モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物7のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.3eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.4eVであった。
[Experimental Example 7]
Synthesis of Polymer D Cesium Salt Polymer D (200 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (15 mL) and methanol (10 mL) were mixed. An aqueous solution in which cesium hydroxide (360 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 3 hours. 10 mL of methanol was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further stirred at 65 ° C. for 4 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (210 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer D had completely disappeared. The resulting cesium salt of polymer D is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 7. The conjugated polymer compound 7 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (K) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by the formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 90 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 7 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.3 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.4 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
[参考例7]
重合体Eの合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物A(0.37g)、化合物B(0.82g)、1,3-ジブロモベンゼン(0.09g)、トリフェニルホスフィンパラジウム(0.01g)、メチルトリオクチルアンモニウムクロライド(アルドリッチ製、商品名Aliquat336(登録商標))(0.20g)、及びトルエン(10mL)を混合し、105℃に加熱した。この反応液に2M 炭酸ナトリウム水溶液(6mL)を滴下し、7時間還流させた。反応液にフェニルボロン酸(0.002g)を加え、10時間還流させた。次いで、ジエチルジチアカルバミン酸ナトリウム水溶液(10mL、濃度:0.05g/mL)を加え、1時間撹拌した。混合溶液をメタノール300mL中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して2時間減圧乾燥させ、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。得られた溶液をメタノール120ml、3重量%酢酸水溶液50mLの混合溶媒中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過し、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。こうして得られた溶液をメタノール200mlに滴下して30分攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して固体を得た。得られた固体をテトラヒドロフランに溶解させ、アルミナカラム、シリカゲルカラムを通すことにより精製した。カラムから回収したテトラヒドロフラン溶液を濃縮した後、メタノール(200mL)に滴下し、析出した固体をろ過し、乾燥させた。得られた重合体Eの収量は293mgであった。
[Reference Example 7]
Synthesis of Polymer E In an inert atmosphere, Compound A (0.37 g), Compound B (0.82 g), 1,3-dibromobenzene (0.09 g), triphenylphosphine palladium (0.01 g), methyltri Octyl ammonium chloride (manufactured by Aldrich, trade name Aliquat 336 (registered trademark)) (0.20 g) and toluene (10 mL) were mixed and heated to 105 ° C. To this reaction solution, a 2M aqueous sodium carbonate solution (6 mL) was added dropwise and refluxed for 7 hours. Phenylboronic acid (0.002 g) was added to the reaction solution and refluxed for 10 hours. Next, an aqueous sodium diethyldithiacarbamate solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added and stirred for 1 hour. The mixed solution was dropped into 300 mL of methanol and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered, dried under reduced pressure for 2 hours, and dissolved in 20 mL of tetrahydrofuran. The obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran. The solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid. The obtained solid was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried. The yield of the obtained polymer E was 293 mg.
 重合体Eのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は1.8×10であった。重合体Eは、式(L)で表される繰り返し単位からなる。 The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer E was 1.8 × 10 4 . The polymer E consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (L).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
[実験例8]
 重合体Eセシウム塩の合成
 重合体E(200mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(10mL)、及びメタノール(5mL)を混合した。混合溶液に、水酸化セシウム(200mg)を水(2mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で2時間撹拌した。反応溶液にメタノール10mLを加え、さらに65℃で5時間攪拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(170mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体E内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Eのセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物8と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物8は式(M)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、75モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物8のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.6eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.6eVであった。
[Experimental Example 8]
Synthesis of Polymer E Cesium Salt Polymer E (200 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) and methanol (5 mL) were mixed. An aqueous solution in which cesium hydroxide (200 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 2 hours. 10 mL of methanol was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further stirred at 65 ° C. for 5 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (170 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer E completely disappeared. The resulting cesium salt of polymer E is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 8. Conjugated polymer compound 8 is composed of a repeating unit represented by formula (M) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by formula (1) and a group represented by formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 75 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 8 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.6 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
[参考例8]
重合体Fの合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物B(1.01g)、1,4-ジブロモ-2,3,5,6-テトラフルオロベンゼン(0.30g)、トリフェニルホスフィンパラジウム(0.02g)、メチルトリオクチルアンモニウムクロライド(アルドリッチ製、商品名Aliquat336(登録商標))(0.20g)、及びトルエン(10mL)を混合し、105℃に加熱した。この反応液に2M 炭酸ナトリウム水溶液(6mL)を滴下し、4時間還流させた。反応液にフェニルボロン酸(0.002g)を加え、4時間還流させた。次いで、ジエチルジチアカルバミン酸ナトリウム水溶液(10mL、濃度:0.05g/mL)を加え、1時間撹拌した。混合溶液をメタノール300mL中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して2時間減圧乾燥させ、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。得られた溶液をメタノール120ml、3重量%酢酸水溶液50mLの混合溶媒中に滴下して1時間攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過し、テトラヒドロフラン20mlに溶解させた。こうして得られた溶液をメタノール200mlに滴下して30分攪拌した後、析出した沈殿をろ過して固体を得た。得られた固体をテトラヒドロフラン/酢酸エチル(1/1(体積比))の混合溶媒に溶解させ、アルミナカラム、シリカゲルカラムを通すことにより精製した。カラムから回収したテトラヒドロフラン溶液を濃縮した後、メタノール(200mL)に滴下し、析出した固体をろ過し、乾燥させた。得られた重合体Eの収量は343mgであった。
[Reference Example 8]
Synthesis of Polymer F Under an inert atmosphere, Compound B (1.01 g), 1,4-dibromo-2,3,5,6-tetrafluorobenzene (0.30 g), triphenylphosphine palladium (0.02 g) , Methyltrioctylammonium chloride (manufactured by Aldrich, trade name Aliquat 336 (registered trademark)) (0.20 g), and toluene (10 mL) were mixed and heated to 105 ° C. To this reaction solution, 2M aqueous sodium carbonate solution (6 mL) was added dropwise and refluxed for 4 hours. Phenylboronic acid (0.002 g) was added to the reaction solution and refluxed for 4 hours. Next, an aqueous sodium diethyldithiacarbamate solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added and stirred for 1 hour. The mixed solution was dropped into 300 mL of methanol and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered, dried under reduced pressure for 2 hours, and dissolved in 20 mL of tetrahydrofuran. The obtained solution was dropped into a mixed solvent of 120 ml of methanol and 50 mL of 3% by weight acetic acid aqueous solution and stirred for 1 hour, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered and dissolved in 20 ml of tetrahydrofuran. The solution thus obtained was dropped into 200 ml of methanol and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the deposited precipitate was filtered to obtain a solid. The obtained solid was dissolved in a mixed solvent of tetrahydrofuran / ethyl acetate (1/1 (volume ratio)) and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The tetrahydrofuran solution collected from the column was concentrated and then added dropwise to methanol (200 mL), and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried. The yield of the obtained polymer E was 343 mg.
 重合体Fのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は6.0×10であった。重合体Fは、式(N)で表される繰り返し単位からなる。 The polystyrene equivalent number average molecular weight of the polymer F was 6.0 × 10 4 . The polymer F consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (N).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
[実験例9]
 重合体Fセシウム塩の合成
 重合体F(150mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(10mL)、及びメタノール(5mL)を混合した。混合溶液に、水酸化セシウム(260mg)を水(2mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で2時間撹拌した。反応溶液にメタノール10mLを加え、さらに65℃で5時間攪拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(130mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体E内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Fのセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物9と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物9は式(O)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、75モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物9のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.9eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.8eVであった。
[Experimental Example 9]
Synthesis of Polymer F Cesium Salt Polymer F (150 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) and methanol (5 mL) were mixed. An aqueous solution in which cesium hydroxide (260 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 2 hours. 10 mL of methanol was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further stirred at 65 ° C. for 5 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (130 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer E completely disappeared. The resulting cesium salt of polymer F is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 9. The conjugated polymer compound 9 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (O) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by the formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 75 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 9 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.9 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.8 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
[参考例9]
 不活性雰囲気下、2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]-p-トルエンスルホネート(11.0g)、トリエチレングリコール(30.0g)、水酸化カリウム(3.3g)を混合し、100℃で18時間過熱攪拌した。放冷後、反応溶液を水(100mL)に加え、クロロホルムで分液抽出を行い、溶液を濃縮した。濃縮した溶液を、クーゲルロワー蒸留(10mmTorr、180℃)することで、2-(2-(2-(2-(2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)エタノール(6.1g)を得た。
[Reference Example 9]
Under an inert atmosphere, 2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] -p-toluenesulfonate (11.0 g), triethylene glycol (30.0 g), and potassium hydroxide (3.3 g) were mixed. The mixture was stirred with heating at 100 ° C. for 18 hours. After allowing to cool, the reaction solution was added to water (100 mL), liquid separation extraction was performed with chloroform, and the solution was concentrated. The concentrated solution was subjected to Kugelrohr distillation (10 mm Torr, 180 ° C.) to give 2- (2- (2- (2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy). Ethanol (6.1 g) was obtained.
[参考例10]
 不活性雰囲気下、2-(2-(2-(2-(2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)エタノール(8.0g)、水酸化ナトリウム(1.4g)、蒸留水(2mL)、テトラヒドロフラン(2mL)を混合し、氷冷した。混合溶液に、p-トシルクロリド(5.5g)のテトラヒドロフラン(6.4mL)溶液を30分かけて滴下し、滴下後反応溶液を室温に上げて15時間攪拌した。反応溶液に蒸留水(50mL)を加え、6M硫酸で反応溶液を中和した後、クロロホルムで分液抽出を行った。溶液を濃縮することで、2-(2-(2-(2-(2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)p-トルエンスルホネート(11.8g)を得た。
[Reference Example 10]
Under an inert atmosphere, 2- (2- (2- (2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) ethanol (8.0 g), sodium hydroxide (1. 4 g), distilled water (2 mL) and tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) were mixed and ice-cooled. To the mixed solution, a solution of p-tosyl chloride (5.5 g) in tetrahydrofuran (6.4 mL) was added dropwise over 30 minutes. After the addition, the reaction solution was raised to room temperature and stirred for 15 hours. Distilled water (50 mL) was added to the reaction solution, and the reaction solution was neutralized with 6M sulfuric acid, followed by liquid separation extraction with chloroform. The solution was concentrated to give 2- (2- (2- (2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) p-toluenesulfonate (11.8 g). It was.
[参考例11]
 2,7-ジブロモ-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-(2-(2-(2-(2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(化合物C)の合成
 2,7-ジブロモ-9-フルオレノン(127.2g)、サリチル酸エチル(375.2g)、及びメルカプト酢酸(3.5g)を300mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。そこに、メタンスルホン酸(1420mL)を添加し、混合物を75℃で終夜撹拌した。混合物を放冷し、氷水に添加して1時間撹拌した。生じた固体をろ別し、加熱したアセトニトリルで洗浄した。洗浄済みの該固体をアセトンに溶解させ、得られたアセトン溶液から固体を再結晶させ、ろ別し固体(167.8g)を得た。得られた固体(5g)、2-(2-(2-(2-(2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)p-トルエンスルホネート(10.4g)、炭酸カリウム(5.3g)、及び18-クラウン-6(0.6g)をN、N-ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)(100 mL)に溶解させ、溶液をフラスコへ移して105℃で4時間撹拌した。得られた混
合物を室温まで放冷し、氷水へ加え、1時間撹拌した。反応液にクロロホルム(300mL)を加えて分液抽出を行い、溶液を濃縮した。濃縮物を酢酸エチルに溶解させ、アルミナのカラムに通液し、溶液を濃縮することで、2,7-ジブロモ-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-(2-(2-(2-(2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)-エトキシ)エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(化合物C)(4.5g)を得た。
[Reference Example 11]
2,7-dibromo-9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- (2- (2- (2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy)- Synthesis of Ethoxy) Ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (Compound C) 2,7-dibromo-9-fluorenone (127.2 g), ethyl salicylate (375.2 g), and mercaptoacetic acid (3.5 g) were placed in a 300 mL flask. And replaced with nitrogen. Thereto was added methanesulfonic acid (1420 mL) and the mixture was stirred at 75 ° C. overnight. The mixture was allowed to cool, added to ice water and stirred for 1 hour. The resulting solid was filtered off and washed with heated acetonitrile. The washed solid was dissolved in acetone, and the solid was recrystallized from the obtained acetone solution and filtered to obtain a solid (167.8 g). The resulting solid (5 g), 2- (2- (2- (2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) p-toluenesulfonate (10.4 g), Potassium carbonate (5.3 g) and 18-crown-6 (0.6 g) were dissolved in N, N-dimethylformamide (DMF) (100 mL), and the solution was transferred to a flask and stirred at 105 ° C. for 4 hours. . The obtained mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, added to ice water, and stirred for 1 hour. Chloroform (300 mL) was added to the reaction solution, liquid separation extraction was performed, and the solution was concentrated. The concentrate was dissolved in ethyl acetate, passed through an alumina column, and the solution was concentrated to give 2,7-dibromo-9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- (2- (2- ( 2- (2- (2- (2- (2-methoxyethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) -ethoxy) ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (compound C) (4.5 g) was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
   化合物C
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
Compound C
[参考例12]
 重合体Gの合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物C(1.0g)、4-t-ブチルフェニルブロミド(0.9mg)、2,2‘-ビピリジン(0.3g)、脱水テトラヒドロフラン(50mL)を200mLフラスコに入れ混合した。混合物を55℃に昇温した後、ビス(1,5-シクロオクタジエン)ニッケル(0.6g)を添加し、55℃で5時間撹拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶液をメタノール(200mL)、1N希塩酸(200mL)の混合液に滴下した。生じた沈殿物をろ過により収集した後、テトラヒドロフランに再溶解させた。メタノール(200mL)、15%アンモニア水(100mL)の混合液に滴下し、生じた沈殿物をろ過により収集した。沈殿物をテトラヒドロフランに再溶解させ、メタノール(200mL)、水(100mL)の混合液に滴下し、生じた沈殿物をろ過により収集した。収集した沈殿物を減圧乾燥することで重合体G(360mg)を得た。重合体Gのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は6.0×10であった。重合体Gは、式(P)で表される繰り返し単位からなる。
[Reference Example 12]
Synthesis of Polymer G In an inert atmosphere, 200 mL of Compound C (1.0 g), 4-t-butylphenyl bromide (0.9 mg), 2,2′-bipyridine (0.3 g), dehydrated tetrahydrofuran (50 mL) Mix in flask. The temperature of the mixture was raised to 55 ° C., bis (1,5-cyclooctadiene) nickel (0.6 g) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 55 ° C. for 5 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solution was added dropwise to a mixture of methanol (200 mL) and 1N dilute hydrochloric acid (200 mL). The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and redissolved in tetrahydrofuran. The solution was added dropwise to a mixture of methanol (200 mL) and 15% aqueous ammonia (100 mL), and the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration. The precipitate was redissolved in tetrahydrofuran, added dropwise to a mixture of methanol (200 mL) and water (100 mL), and the resulting precipitate was collected by filtration. The collected precipitate was dried under reduced pressure to obtain a polymer G (360 mg). The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer G was 6.0 × 10 4 . The polymer G consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (P).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
[実験例10]
 重合体Gセシウム塩の合成
 重合体G(150mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(15mL)、及びメタノール(5mL)を混合した。混合溶液に、水酸化セシウム(170mg)を水(2mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で6時間撹拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(95)mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体G内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Gのセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物10と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物10は式(Q)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、100モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物10のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.7eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.9eVであった。
[Experimental Example 10]
Synthesis of Polymer G Cesium Salt Polymer G (150 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (15 mL) and methanol (5 mL) were mixed. An aqueous solution in which cesium hydroxide (170 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 6 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (95 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer G had completely disappeared. The obtained cesium salt of polymer G is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 10. The conjugated polymer compound 10 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (Q) (“selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by the formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 100 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 10 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.7 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.9 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
[参考例13]
 1,3-ジブロモ-5-エトキシカルボニル-6-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]ベンゼンの合成
 不活性雰囲気下、3,5-ジブロモサリチル酸(20g)、エタノール(17mL)、濃硫酸(1.5mL)、トルエン(7mL)を混合し、130℃で20時間過熱攪拌した。放冷後、反応溶液を氷水(100mL)に加え、クロロホルムで分液抽出を行い、溶液を濃縮した。得られた固体を、イソプロパノールに溶解し、溶液を蒸留水に滴下した。得られた析出物をろ別することにより、固体(18g)を得た。不活性雰囲気下、得られた固体(1g)、2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]-p-トルエンスルホネート(1.5g)、炭酸カリウム(0.7g)、DMF(15mL)を混合し、100℃で4時間過熱攪拌した。放冷後、クロロホルムを加えて分液抽出し、溶液を濃縮した。濃縮物をクロロホルムに溶解させ、シリカゲルカラムに通液することにより精製した。溶液を濃縮することにより、1,3-ジブロモ-5-エトキシカルボニル-6-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]ベンゼン(1.0g)を得た。
[Reference Example 13]
Synthesis of 1,3-dibromo-5-ethoxycarbonyl-6- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] benzene 3,5-dibromosalicylic acid (20 g), ethanol (17 mL) under inert atmosphere ), Concentrated sulfuric acid (1.5 mL) and toluene (7 mL) were mixed, and the mixture was stirred with heating at 130 ° C. for 20 hours. After allowing to cool, the reaction solution was added to ice water (100 mL), liquid separation extraction was performed with chloroform, and the solution was concentrated. The obtained solid was dissolved in isopropanol, and the solution was added dropwise to distilled water. The obtained precipitate was filtered off to obtain a solid (18 g). Under an inert atmosphere, the obtained solid (1 g), 2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] -p-toluenesulfonate (1.5 g), potassium carbonate (0.7 g), DMF (15 mL) were added. Mix and stir at 100 ° C. for 4 hours. After allowing to cool, chloroform was added to perform liquid separation and extraction, and the solution was concentrated. The concentrate was dissolved in chloroform and purified by passing through a silica gel column. The solution was concentrated to give 1,3-dibromo-5-ethoxycarbonyl-6- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] benzene (1.0 g).
[参考例14]
重合体Hの合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物A(0.2g)、化合物B(0.5g)、1,3-ジブロモ-5-エトキシカルボニル-6-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]ベンゼン(0.1g)、トリフェニルホスフィンパラジウム(30mg)、テトラブチルアンモニウムブロミド(4mg)、及びトルエン(19mL)を混合し、105℃に加熱した。この反応液に2M 炭酸ナトリウム水溶液(5mL)を滴下し、5時間還流させた。反応液にフェニルボロン酸(6mg)を加え、14時間還流させた。次いで、ジエチルジチアカルバミン酸ナトリウム水溶液(10mL、濃度:0.05g/mL)を加え、2時間撹拌した。水層を除去して有機層を蒸留水で洗浄し、濃縮して得られた固体をクロロホルムに溶解させ、アルミナカラム、シリカゲルカラムを通すことにより精製した。カラムからの溶出液を濃縮して乾燥させた。得られた重合体Hの収量は0.44gであった。
[Reference Example 14]
Synthesis of Polymer H Compound A (0.2 g), Compound B (0.5 g), 1,3-dibromo-5-ethoxycarbonyl-6- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) under an inert atmosphere ) Ethoxy] ethoxy] benzene (0.1 g), triphenylphosphine palladium (30 mg), tetrabutylammonium bromide (4 mg), and toluene (19 mL) were mixed and heated to 105 ° C. To this reaction solution, 2M aqueous sodium carbonate solution (5 mL) was added dropwise and refluxed for 5 hours. Phenylboronic acid (6 mg) was added to the reaction solution and refluxed for 14 hours. Then, a sodium diethyldithiacarbamate aqueous solution (10 mL, concentration: 0.05 g / mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The aqueous layer was removed, the organic layer was washed with distilled water, and the solid obtained by concentration was dissolved in chloroform and purified by passing through an alumina column and a silica gel column. The eluate from the column was concentrated and dried. The yield of the obtained polymer H was 0.44 g.
 重合体Hのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は3.6×10であった。重合体Hは、式(R)で表される繰り返し単位からなる。 The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer H was 3.6 × 10 4 . The polymer H consists of a repeating unit represented by the formula (R).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
[実験例11]
 重合体Hセシウム塩の合成
 重合体H(200mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。テトラヒドロフラン(14mL)、及びメタノール(7mL)を添加し混合した。混合溶液に、水酸化セシウム(90mg)を水(1mL)に溶解させた水溶液を添加し、65℃で1時間撹拌した。反応溶液にメタノール5mLを加え、さらに65℃で4時間攪拌した。混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(190mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、重合体H内のエチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Hのセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物11と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物11は式(S)で表される繰り返し単位からなる(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、100モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物11のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.6eV、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.8eVであった。
[Experimental Example 11]
Synthesis of Polymer H Cesium Salt Polymer H (200 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Tetrahydrofuran (14 mL) and methanol (7 mL) were added and mixed. An aqueous solution in which cesium hydroxide (90 mg) was dissolved in water (1 mL) was added to the mixed solution, and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 1 hour. 5 mL of methanol was added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was further stirred at 65 ° C. for 4 hours. After the mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (190 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site in the polymer H had completely disappeared. The resulting cesium salt of polymer H is referred to as conjugated polymer compound 11. The conjugated polymer compound 11 is composed of a repeating unit represented by the formula (S) ("selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units). The ratio of the repeating unit containing one or more groups and one or more groups represented by the formula (3) "and" the formulas (13), (15), (17), ( The ratio of the repeating unit represented by 20) is 100 mol%.) The conjugated polymer compound 11 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.8 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
[参考例15]
 2,7-ジブロモ-9,9-ビス[3,4-ビス[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]-5-メトキシカルボニルフェニル]フルオレン (化合物D)の合成 2,7-ジブロモ-9-フルオレノン(34.1g)、2,3-ジヒドロキシ安息香酸メチル(101.3g)、及びメルカプト酢酸(1.4g)を500mLフラスコに入れ、窒素置換した。そこに、メタンスルホン酸(350mL)を添加し、混合物を90℃で19時間撹拌した。混合物を放冷し、氷水に添加して1時間撹拌した。生じた固体をろ別し、加熱したアセトニトリルで洗浄した。洗浄済みの該固体をアセトンに溶解させ、得られたアセトン溶液から固体を再結晶させ、ろ別した。得られた固体(16.3g)、2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]-p-トルエンスルホネート(60.3g)、炭酸カリウム(48.6g)、及び18-クラウン-6(2.4g)をN、N-ジメチルホルムアミド(DMF)(500 mL)に溶解させ、溶液をフラスコへ移して110℃で15時間撹拌した。得られた混合物を室温まで放冷し、氷水へ加え、1時間撹拌した。反応液に酢酸エチル(300mL)を加えて分液抽出を行い、溶液を濃縮し、クロロホルム/メタノール(50/1(体積比))の混合溶媒に溶解させ、シリカゲルカラムを通すことにより精製した。カラムに通液した溶液を濃縮することで、2,7-ジブロモ-9,9-ビス[3,4-ビス[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]-5-メトキシカルボニルフェニル]フルオレン (化合物D)(20.5g)を得た。
[Reference Example 15]
Synthesis of 2,7-dibromo-9,9-bis [3,4-bis [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] -5-methoxycarbonylphenyl] fluorene (Compound D) -Dibromo-9-fluorenone (34.1 g), methyl 2,3-dihydroxybenzoate (101.3 g), and mercaptoacetic acid (1.4 g) were placed in a 500 mL flask and purged with nitrogen. Thereto was added methanesulfonic acid (350 mL), and the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 19 hours. The mixture was allowed to cool, added to ice water and stirred for 1 hour. The resulting solid was filtered off and washed with heated acetonitrile. The washed solid was dissolved in acetone, and the solid was recrystallized from the obtained acetone solution and filtered. The resulting solid (16.3 g), 2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] -p-toluenesulfonate (60.3 g), potassium carbonate (48.6 g), and 18-crown-6 (2 4 g) was dissolved in N, N-dimethylformamide (DMF) (500 mL) and the solution was transferred to a flask and stirred at 110 ° C. for 15 hours. The obtained mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, added to ice water, and stirred for 1 hour. Separation extraction was performed by adding ethyl acetate (300 mL) to the reaction solution, the solution was concentrated, dissolved in a mixed solvent of chloroform / methanol (50/1 (volume ratio)), and purified by passing through a silica gel column. By concentrating the solution passed through the column, 2,7-dibromo-9,9-bis [3,4-bis [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] -5-methoxycarbonyl Phenyl] fluorene (Compound D) (20.5 g) was obtained.
[参考例16]
 2,7-ビス[7-(4-メチルフェニル)-9,9-ジオクチルフルオレン-2-イル]-9,9-ビス[5-メトキシカルボニル-3,4-ビス[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(重合体I)の合成
 不活性雰囲気下、化合物D(0.70g)、2-(4,4,5,5-テトラメチル-1,2,3-ジオキサボラン-2-イル)-9,9-ジオクチルフルオレン (0.62g) 、トリフェニルホスフィンパラジウム(0.019g)、ジオキサン(40mL)、水(6mL)及び炭酸カリウム水溶液(1.38g)を混合し、80℃に加熱した。反応液を1時間反応させた。反応後、飽和ジエチルジチオカルバミン酸ナトリウム水5mLを添加して、30分間撹拌した後、有機溶媒を除去した。得られた固体をアルミナカラム(展開溶媒 ヘキサン:酢酸エチル=1:1(体積比))を通して精製を行い、溶液を濃縮することで、2,7-ビス[7-(4-メチルフェニル)-9,9-ジオクチルフルオレン-2-イル]-9,9-ビス[3-エトキシカルボニル-4-[2-[2-(2-メトキシエトキシ)エトキシ]エトキシ]フェニル]-フルオレン(重合体I)を660mg得た。
[Reference Example 16]
2,7-bis [7- (4-methylphenyl) -9,9-dioctylfluoren-2-yl] -9,9-bis [5-methoxycarbonyl-3,4-bis [2- [2- ( Synthesis of 2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (Polymer I) Compound D (0.70 g), 2- (4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,2 under inert atmosphere , 3-Dioxaboran-2-yl) -9,9-dioctylfluorene (0.62 g), triphenylphosphine palladium (0.019 g), dioxane (40 mL), water (6 mL) and aqueous potassium carbonate (1.38 g) Were mixed and heated to 80 ° C. The reaction was allowed to react for 1 hour. After the reaction, 5 mL of saturated aqueous sodium diethyldithiocarbamate was added and stirred for 30 minutes, and then the organic solvent was removed. The obtained solid is purified through an alumina column (developing solvent hexane: ethyl acetate = 1: 1 (volume ratio)), and the solution is concentrated to give 2,7-bis [7- (4-methylphenyl)- 9,9-Dioctylfluoren-2-yl] -9,9-bis [3-ethoxycarbonyl-4- [2- [2- (2-methoxyethoxy) ethoxy] ethoxy] phenyl] -fluorene (Polymer I) 660 mg of was obtained.
 重合体Iのポリスチレン換算の数平均分子量は、2.0×10であった。重合体Iは、式(T)で表される。なお、2-(4,4,5,5-テトラメチル-1,2,3-ジオキサボラン-2-イル)-9,9-ジオクチルフルオレンは、例えば特開2008-74017号公報に記載されている方法で合成することができる。 The number average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene of the polymer I was 2.0 × 10 3 . The polymer I is represented by the formula (T). 2- (4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,2,3-dioxaboran-2-yl) -9,9-dioctylfluorene is described in, for example, JP-A-2008-74017. It can be synthesized by the method.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
[実験例12]
重合体Iセシウム塩の合成
 重合体I(236mg)を100mLフラスコに入れ、アルゴン置換した。そこに、テトラヒドロフラン(20mL)、及びメタノール(10mL)を添加し、混合物を65℃に昇温した。そこに、水酸化セシウム(240mg)を水(2mL)に溶かした水溶液を添加し、65℃で7時間撹拌した。得られた混合物を室温まで冷却した後、反応溶媒を減圧留去した。生じた固体を水で洗浄し、減圧乾燥させることで薄黄色の固体(190mg)を得た。NMRスペクトルにより、エチルエステル部位のエチル基由来のシグナルが完全に消失していることを確認した。得られた重合体Iセシウム塩を共役高分子化合物12と呼ぶ。共役高分子化合物12は、式(U)で表される(「全繰り返し単位中の、式(1)で表される基及び式(2)で表される基からなる群から選ばれる1種以上の基と式(3)で表される1種以上の基とを含む繰り返し単位の割合」及び「全繰り返し単位中の、式(13)、(15)、(17)、(20)で表される繰り返し単位の割合」は、小数第二位で四捨五入して、33.3モル%である。)。共役高分子化合物12のHOMOの軌道エネルギーは-5.6eVであり、LUMOの軌道エネルギーは-2.8eVであった。
[Experimental example 12]
Synthesis of Polymer I Cesium Salt Polymer I (236 mg) was placed in a 100 mL flask and purged with argon. Tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) and methanol (10 mL) were added thereto, and the mixture was heated to 65 ° C. Thereto was added an aqueous solution in which cesium hydroxide (240 mg) was dissolved in water (2 mL), and the mixture was stirred at 65 ° C. for 7 hours. After the resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature, the reaction solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. The resulting solid was washed with water and dried under reduced pressure to obtain a pale yellow solid (190 mg). From the NMR spectrum, it was confirmed that the signal derived from the ethyl group at the ethyl ester site had completely disappeared. The obtained polymer I cesium salt is referred to as a conjugated polymer compound 12. The conjugated polymer compound 12 is represented by the formula (U) (“one type selected from the group consisting of a group represented by the formula (1) and a group represented by the formula (2) in all repeating units). "Ratio of repeating units containing the above groups and one or more groups represented by formula (3)" and "in formulas (13), (15), (17), (20) in all repeating units" The “ratio of repeating units represented” is 33.3 mol% rounded off to the second decimal place.) The conjugated polymer compound 12 had a HOMO orbital energy of −5.6 eV and a LUMO orbital energy of −2.8 eV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
 [実験例13]
 <有機EL素子の作製>
 ガラス基板表面に成膜パターニングされたITO陽極(膜厚:45nm)上に、正孔注入材料溶液を塗布し、スピンコート法によって膜厚が60nmになるように正孔注入層を成膜した。正孔注入層が成膜されたガラス基板を不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)、200℃で10分加熱して正孔注入層を不溶化させ、基板を室温まで自然冷却させ、正孔注入層が形成された基板を得た。
[Experimental Example 13]
<Production of organic EL element>
A hole injection material solution was applied onto an ITO anode (film thickness: 45 nm) patterned on the surface of a glass substrate, and a hole injection layer was formed to a film thickness of 60 nm by spin coating. The glass substrate on which the hole injection layer is formed is heated in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) at 200 ° C. for 10 minutes to insolubilize the hole injection layer, and the substrate is naturally cooled to room temperature. A substrate on which was formed was obtained.
 ここで正孔注入材料溶液には、スタルクヴイテック(株)製PEDOT:PSS溶液(ポリ(3,4‐エチレンジオキシチオフェン)・ポリスチレンスルホン酸、製品名:「Baytron」)を用いた。 Here, PEDOT: PSS solution (poly (3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) / polystyrene sulfonic acid, product name: “Baytron”) manufactured by Starck Vitec Co., Ltd. was used as the hole injection material solution.
 次に、正孔輸送性高分子材料とキシレンとを混合し、0.7重量%の正孔輸送性高分子材料を含む正孔輸送層形成用組成物を得た。 Next, a hole transporting polymer material and xylene were mixed to obtain a composition for forming a hole transporting layer containing 0.7 wt% of the hole transporting polymer material.
 ここで、正孔輸送高分子材料は、以下の方法で合成した。
 還流冷却器及びオーバーヘッドスターラを装備した1リットルの三つ口丸底フラスコに、2,7-ビス(1,3,2-ジオキシボロール)-9,9-ジ(1-オクチル)フルオレン(3.863g、7.283mmol)、N,N-ジ(p-ブロモフェニル)-N-(4-(ブタン-2-イル)フェニル)アミン(3.177g、6.919mmol)及びジ(4-ブロモフェニル)ベンゾシクロブタンアミン(156.3mg、0.364mmol)を添加した。次いで、メチルトリオクチルアンモニウムクロライド(アルドリッチ製、商品名Aliquat336(登録商標))(2.29g)、続いてトルエン50mLを添加した。PdCl(PPh(4.9mg)を添加した後、混合物を、105℃の油浴中で15分間撹拌した。炭酸ナトリウム水溶液(2.0M、14mL)を添加し、得られた混合物を105℃の油浴中、16.5時間撹拌した。次いで、フェニルボロン酸(0.5g)を添加し、得られた混合物を7時間撹拌した。水層を除去し、有機層を水50mLで洗浄した。有機層を反応フラスコに戻し、ジエチルジチオカルバミン酸ナトリウム0.75g及び水50mLを添加した。得られた混合物を85℃の油浴中、16時間撹拌した。水層を除去し、有機層を100mLの水で3回洗浄し、次いでシリカゲル及び塩基性アルミナのカラムに通した。溶離剤としてトルエンを用い、溶出してきたポリマーを含むトルエン溶液を回収した。次いで、回収した前記トルエン溶液をメタノールに注いでポリマーを沈殿させた。沈殿したポリマーを再度トルエンに溶解させ、得られたトルエン溶液をメタノールに注いでポリマーを再び沈殿させた。沈殿したポリマーを60℃で真空乾燥し、正孔輸送性高分子材料4.2gを得た。ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーによれば、得られた正孔輸送性高分子材料のポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量は1.24×10であり、分子量分布指数(Mw/Mn)は2.8であった。
Here, the hole transporting polymer material was synthesized by the following method.
To a 1 liter three-necked round bottom flask equipped with a reflux condenser and an overhead stirrer was added 2,7-bis (1,3,2-dioxyborol) -9,9-di (1-octyl) fluorene (3.863 g). 7.283 mmol), N, N-di (p-bromophenyl) -N- (4- (butan-2-yl) phenyl) amine (3.177 g, 6.919 mmol) and di (4-bromophenyl) Benzocyclobutanamine (156.3 mg, 0.364 mmol) was added. Subsequently, methyl trioctyl ammonium chloride (manufactured by Aldrich, trade name Aliquat 336 (registered trademark)) (2.29 g) was added, followed by 50 mL of toluene. After adding PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 2 (4.9 mg), the mixture was stirred in an oil bath at 105 ° C. for 15 minutes. Aqueous sodium carbonate (2.0 M, 14 mL) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred in an oil bath at 105 ° C. for 16.5 hours. Phenylboronic acid (0.5 g) was then added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 7 hours. The aqueous layer was removed and the organic layer was washed with 50 mL of water. The organic layer was returned to the reaction flask and 0.75 g of sodium diethyldithiocarbamate and 50 mL of water were added. The resulting mixture was stirred in an 85 ° C. oil bath for 16 hours. The aqueous layer was removed and the organic layer was washed 3 times with 100 mL of water and then passed through a column of silica gel and basic alumina. Using toluene as an eluent, a toluene solution containing the eluted polymer was recovered. Next, the recovered toluene solution was poured into methanol to precipitate a polymer. The precipitated polymer was dissolved again in toluene, and the obtained toluene solution was poured into methanol to precipitate the polymer again. The precipitated polymer was vacuum-dried at 60 ° C. to obtain 4.2 g of a hole transporting polymer material. According to gel permeation chromatography, the obtained hole transporting polymer material had a polystyrene equivalent weight average molecular weight of 1.24 × 10 5 and a molecular weight distribution index (Mw / Mn) of 2.8. It was.
 上記で得た正孔注入層が形成された基板の正孔注入層の上に、正孔輸送層形成用組成物をスピンコート法により塗布し、膜厚20nmの塗膜を得た。この塗膜を設けた基板を不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)、190℃で20分間加熱し、塗膜を不溶化させた後、室温まで自然冷却させ、正孔輸送層が形成された基板を得た。 On the hole injection layer of the substrate on which the hole injection layer obtained above was formed, the composition for forming a hole transport layer was applied by a spin coating method to obtain a coating film having a thickness of 20 nm. The substrate provided with this coating film was heated at 190 ° C. for 20 minutes in an inert atmosphere (in a nitrogen atmosphere) to insolubilize the coating film, and then naturally cooled to room temperature to form a substrate on which the hole transport layer was formed. Obtained.
 次に、発光高分子材料(サメイション(株)製「Lumation BP361」)とキシレンとを混合し、1.4重量%の発光高分子材料を含む発光層形成用組成物を得た。上記で得た正孔輸送層が形成された基板の正孔輸送層の上に、発光層形成用組成物をスピンコート法により塗布し、膜厚80nmの塗膜を得た。この塗膜を設けた基板を不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)、130℃で15分間加熱し、溶媒を蒸発させた後、室温まで自然冷却させ、発光層が形成された基板を得た。 Next, a light emitting polymer material (“Lumation BP361” manufactured by Summation Co., Ltd.) and xylene were mixed to obtain a composition for forming a light emitting layer containing 1.4% by weight of the light emitting polymer material. On the hole transport layer of the board | substrate with which the hole transport layer obtained above was formed, the composition for light emitting layer formation was apply | coated by the spin coat method, and the coating film with a film thickness of 80 nm was obtained. The substrate provided with this coating film was heated at 130 ° C. for 15 minutes in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) to evaporate the solvent and then naturally cooled to room temperature to obtain a substrate on which a light emitting layer was formed.
 メタノールと共役高分子化合物1とを混合し、0.2重量%の共役高分子化合物1を含む組成物を得た。上記で得た発光層が形成された基板の発光層の上に、前記組成物をスピンコート法により塗布し、膜厚10nmの塗膜を得た。この塗膜を設けた基板を常圧の不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)、130℃で10分間加熱し、溶媒を蒸発させた後、室温まで自然冷却させ、共役高分子化合物1を含む電子注入層が形成された基板を得た。 Methanol and conjugated polymer compound 1 were mixed to obtain a composition containing 0.2% by weight of conjugated polymer compound 1. On the light emitting layer of the board | substrate with which the light emitting layer obtained above was formed, the said composition was apply | coated by the spin coat method, and the coating film with a film thickness of 10 nm was obtained. The substrate provided with this coating film is heated at 130 ° C. for 10 minutes under an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) under normal pressure to evaporate the solvent, and then naturally cooled to room temperature, and the electrons containing the conjugated polymer compound 1 A substrate on which an injection layer was formed was obtained.
 上記で得た共役高分子化合物1を含む層が形成された基板を真空装置内に挿入し、真空蒸着法によって該層の上にAlを80nm成膜し、陰極を形成させて、積層構造体1を製造した。 The substrate on which the layer containing the conjugated polymer compound 1 obtained above was formed was inserted into a vacuum apparatus, and an Al film was formed on the layer by vacuum vapor deposition to form a cathode, thereby forming a laminated structure. 1 was produced.
 上記で得た積層構造体1を真空装置より取り出し、不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)で、封止ガラスと2液混合型エポキシ樹脂にて封止し、有機EL素子1を得た。 The laminated structure 1 obtained above was taken out from the vacuum apparatus and sealed with sealing glass and a two-component mixed epoxy resin in an inert atmosphere (in a nitrogen atmosphere) to obtain an organic EL element 1.
[実験例14]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物2を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子2を得た。
[Experimental Example 14]
An organic EL device 2 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 2 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1 in Experimental Example 13.
[実験例15]
 実験例13において、メタノールと共役高分子化合物1とを混合し、0.2重量%の共役高分子化合物1を含む組成物を得る代わりにメタノール、水および共役高分子化合物3を混合し(メタノール/水の体積比=20/1)、0.2重量%の共役高分子化合物3を含む組成物を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子3を得た。
[Experimental Example 15]
In Experimental Example 13, methanol and conjugated polymer compound 1 were mixed, and instead of obtaining a composition containing 0.2% by weight of conjugated polymer compound 1, methanol, water and conjugated polymer compound 3 were mixed (methanol). / Water volume ratio = 20/1), and the organic EL device 3 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the composition containing 0.2% by weight of the conjugated polymer compound 3 was used.
[実験例16]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物4を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子4を得た。
[Experimental Example 16]
An organic EL device 4 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 4 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1 in Experimental Example 13.
[実験例17]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物5を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子5を得た。
[Experimental Example 17]
An organic EL device 5 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 5 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1 in Experimental Example 13.
[実験例18]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物6を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子6を得た。
[Experiment 18]
An organic EL device 6 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 6 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1 in Experimental Example 13.
[実験例19]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物7を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子7を得た。
[Experimental Example 19]
An organic EL device 7 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 7 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1 in Experimental Example 13.
[実験例20]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物8を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子8を得た。
[Experiment 20]
An organic EL device 8 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 8 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1 in Experimental Example 13.
[実験例21]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物9を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子9を得た。
[Experiment 21]
An organic EL device 9 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 9 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1 in Experimental Example 13.
[実験例22]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物10を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子10を得た。
[Experimental example 22]
In the experimental example 13, an organic EL device 10 was obtained in the same manner as in the experimental example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 10 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1.
[実験例23]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物11を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子11を得た。
[Experimental example 23]
In Experiment Example 13, an organic EL element 11 was obtained in the same manner as in Experiment Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 11 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1.
[実験例24]
 実験例13において、共役高分子化合物1の代わりに共役高分子化合物12を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子12を得た。
[Experimental example 24]
In Experiment Example 13, an organic EL device 12 was obtained in the same manner as in Experiment Example 13 except that the conjugated polymer compound 12 was used instead of the conjugated polymer compound 1.
[実験例25]
 実験例13において、メタノールと共役高分子化合物1とを混合し、0.2重量%の共役高分子化合物1を含む組成物を得る代わりにメタノール、共役高分子化合物1、AlドープZnOナノ粒子(アルドリッチ製)を混合した組成物を用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子13を得た。
[Experiment 25]
In Experimental Example 13, instead of mixing methanol and conjugated polymer compound 1 to obtain a composition containing 0.2% by weight of conjugated polymer compound 1, methanol, conjugated polymer compound 1, Al-doped ZnO nanoparticles ( An organic EL device 13 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that a composition mixed with Aldrich was used.
[実験例26]
 実験例13において、メタノールと共役高分子化合物1とを混合し、0.2重量%の共役高分子化合物1を含む組成物を得る代わりにメタノール、共役高分子化合物1、低分子化合物(アルドリッチ製、3,5-ビス(4-t-ブチルフェニル)-4-フェニル-4H-1,2,4-トリアゾール)を混合し、0.2重量%の共役高分子化合物1および0.2重量%の該低分子化合物を含む組成物を得た以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子14を得た。
[Experiment 26]
In Experimental Example 13, instead of mixing methanol and conjugated polymer compound 1 to obtain a composition containing 0.2% by weight of conjugated polymer compound 1, methanol, conjugated polymer compound 1, low molecular compound (manufactured by Aldrich) , 3,5-bis (4-tert-butylphenyl) -4-phenyl-4H-1,2,4-triazole), 0.2% by weight of conjugated polymer compound 1 and 0.2% by weight The organic EL device 14 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that the composition containing the low molecular compound was obtained.
[実験例27]
 実験例13において、Alの代わりにAgを用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、有機EL素子15を得た。
[Experiment 27]
In Experimental Example 13, an organic EL element 15 was obtained in the same manner as in Experimental Example 13 except that Ag was used instead of Al.
[実験例28]
 実験例13において、Alの代わりにAuを用いた以外は、実験例13と同様に操作し、電界発光素子16を得た。
[Experiment 28]
In Example 13, except that Au was used instead of Al, the same operation as in Example 13 was performed to obtain an electroluminescent element 16.
[測定]
 上記で得られた有機EL素子1~16に10Vの順方向電圧を印加し、発光輝度と発光効率を測定した。結果を表1に示す。
[Measurement]
A forward voltage of 10 V was applied to the organic EL elements 1 to 16 obtained above, and the light emission luminance and the light emission efficiency were measured. The results are shown in Table 1.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000088
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000088
[実験例29]
 メタノールと共役高分子化合物1とを混合し、0.2重量%の共役高分子化合物1を含む組成物を得た。ガラス基板表面に成膜パターニングされたITO陰極(膜厚:45nm)上に、前記組成物を大気中でスピンコート法により塗布し、膜厚10nmの塗膜を得た。この塗膜を設けた基板を不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)、130℃で10分間加熱し、溶媒を蒸発させた後、室温まで自然冷却させ、共役高分子化合物1を含む電子注入層が形成された基板を得た。
[Experimental example 29]
Methanol and conjugated polymer compound 1 were mixed to obtain a composition containing 0.2% by weight of conjugated polymer compound 1. The composition was applied by spin coating in the air on an ITO cathode (film thickness: 45 nm) patterned on the surface of a glass substrate to obtain a coating film having a film thickness of 10 nm. The substrate provided with this coating film was heated in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) at 130 ° C. for 10 minutes to evaporate the solvent, and then naturally cooled to room temperature. A formed substrate was obtained.
 次に、発光高分子材料(サメイション(株)製「Lumation BP361」)とキシレンとを混合し、1.4重量%の発光高分子材料を含む発光層形成用組成物を得た。上記で得た共役高分子化合物1を含む層が形成された基板の共役高分子化合物1を含む層の上に、発光層形成用組成物を大気中でスピンコート法により塗布し、膜厚80nmの塗膜を得た。この塗膜を設けた基板を不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)、130℃で15分間加熱し、溶媒を蒸発させた後、室温まで自然冷却させ、発光層が形成された基板を得た。 Next, a light emitting polymer material (“Lumation BP361” manufactured by Summation Co., Ltd.) and xylene were mixed to obtain a composition for forming a light emitting layer containing 1.4% by weight of the light emitting polymer material. A composition for forming a light-emitting layer is applied in the air by a spin coating method on the layer containing the conjugated polymer compound 1 of the substrate on which the layer containing the conjugated polymer compound 1 obtained above is formed. Coating film was obtained. The substrate provided with this coating film was heated at 130 ° C. for 15 minutes in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) to evaporate the solvent and then naturally cooled to room temperature to obtain a substrate on which a light emitting layer was formed.
 次に、上記で得た発光層が形成された基板の発光層の上に、正孔注入材料溶液を大気中でスピンコート法により塗布し、膜厚60nmの塗膜を得た。この塗膜を設けた基板を不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)、130℃で15分間加熱し、溶媒を蒸発させた後、室温まで自然冷却させ、正孔注入層が形成された基板を得た。ここで正孔注入材料溶液には、スタルクヴイテック(株)製PEDOT:PSS溶液(ポリ(3,4‐エチレンジオキシチオフェン)・ポリスチレンスルホン酸、製品名:「Baytron」)を用いた。 Next, the hole injection material solution was applied in the air by a spin coating method on the light emitting layer of the substrate on which the light emitting layer obtained above was formed, to obtain a coating film having a film thickness of 60 nm. The substrate provided with this coating film was heated in an inert atmosphere (nitrogen atmosphere) at 130 ° C. for 15 minutes to evaporate the solvent and then naturally cooled to room temperature to obtain a substrate on which a hole injection layer was formed. It was. Here, PEDOT: PSS solution (poly (3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) / polystyrenesulfonic acid, product name: “Baytron”) manufactured by Starck Vitec Co., Ltd. was used as the hole injection material solution.
 上記で得た正孔注入層が形成された基板を真空装置内に挿入し、真空蒸着法によって該層の上にAuを80nm成膜し、陽極を形成させて、積層構造体1を製造した。 The substrate on which the hole injection layer formed above was formed was inserted into a vacuum apparatus, Au was deposited on the layer by 80 nm by a vacuum deposition method, and an anode was formed, whereby the laminated structure 1 was manufactured. .
 上記で得た積層構造体2を真空装置より取り出し、不活性雰囲気下(窒素雰囲気下)で、封止ガラスと2液混合型エポキシ樹脂にて封止し、有機EL素子17を得た。 The laminated structure 2 obtained above was taken out from the vacuum apparatus and sealed with sealing glass and a two-component mixed epoxy resin in an inert atmosphere (in a nitrogen atmosphere) to obtain an organic EL element 17.
 上記で得られた有機EL素子17に10Vの順方向電圧を印加し、発光輝度と発光効率を測定した。結果を表2に示す。 A forward voltage of 10 V was applied to the organic EL element 17 obtained above, and the light emission luminance and the light emission efficiency were measured. The results are shown in Table 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000089
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000089
[実験例30]
 <両面発光型の有機EL素子の作製>
 実験例29において、Auの膜厚を20nmとした以外は、実験例29と同様に操作し、両面発光型の有機EL素子18を得た。
[Experiment 30]
<Production of Double-sided Light Emitting Organic EL Device>
In Experimental Example 29, except that the film thickness of Au was set to 20 nm, the same operation as in Experimental Example 29 was performed to obtain a double-sided light emitting organic EL element 18.
 上記で得られた両面発光型の有機EL素子18に15Vの順方向電圧を印加し、発光輝度と発光効率を測定した。結果を表3に示す。 A forward voltage of 15 V was applied to the double-sided light emitting organic EL element 18 obtained above, and the light emission luminance and the light emission efficiency were measured. The results are shown in Table 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000090
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000090
 表2および3で示すように、大気中において塗布プロセスでイオン性ポリマーを成膜し、電子注入層を形成した逆積層の有機EL素子が、発光することを確認した。 As shown in Tables 2 and 3, it was confirmed that the reverse stacked organic EL device in which an ionic polymer was formed in the atmosphere by an application process and an electron injection layer was formed emitted light.
 本発明に係る発光装置及びその製造方法は、ディスプレイや照明装置等の技術分野で利用できる。 The light emitting device and the manufacturing method thereof according to the present invention can be used in technical fields such as a display and a lighting device.
 1  有機EL素子
 2  発光装置
 3  支持基板
 4  第1電極
 5  第2電極
 6  発光層
 7  電子注入層
 11  発光装置
 12  支持基板
 13  有機EL素子
 14  第1電極
 15  第2電極
 16  発光層
 20  電子注入層
 17,18  延在部
 19  接続部
 31  発光装置
 32  接続部
 41  発光装置
 42  接続部
 51  発光装置
 52  補助電極
 61  発光装置
 
 
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Organic EL element 2 Light-emitting device 3 Support substrate 4 1st electrode 5 Second electrode 6 Light-emitting layer 7 Electron injection layer 11 Light-emitting device 12 Support substrate 13 Organic EL element 14 1st electrode 15 2nd electrode 16 Light-emitting layer 20 Electron injection layer 17, 18 Extension part 19 Connection part 31 Light-emitting device 32 Connection part 41 Light-emitting device 42 Connection part 51 Light-emitting device 52 Auxiliary electrode 61 Light-emitting device

Claims (8)

  1.  支持基板と、
     所定の配列方向に沿って前記支持基板上に設けられ、直列接続される複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子と、を備える発光装置であって、
     各有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子はそれぞれ、一対の電極と、該電極間に設けられる発光層および電子注入層とを備え、
     前記発光層は、前記複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子に跨って、前記所定の配列方向に沿って延在しており、
     前記一対の電極はそれぞれ、前記支持基板の厚み方向一方から見て、前記支持基板の厚み方向および前記配列方向のいずれにも垂直な幅方向に、発光層から突出するように延在する延在部を有し、
     前記一対の電極のうちの一方の電極は、前記配列方向に隣り合う有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子の他方の電極にまで前記延在部から前記配列方向に延在し、該他方の電極に接続される接続部をさらに有し、
     前記電子注入層は、イオン性ポリマーを含む発光装置。
    A support substrate;
    A plurality of organic electroluminescence elements provided on the support substrate along a predetermined arrangement direction and connected in series;
    Each organic electroluminescence element includes a pair of electrodes, a light emitting layer and an electron injection layer provided between the electrodes,
    The light emitting layer extends along the predetermined arrangement direction across the plurality of organic electroluminescence elements,
    Each of the pair of electrodes extends so as to protrude from the light emitting layer in a width direction perpendicular to both the thickness direction of the support substrate and the arrangement direction when viewed from one thickness direction of the support substrate. Part
    One electrode of the pair of electrodes extends from the extension portion to the other electrode of the organic electroluminescence element adjacent in the arrangement direction, and is connected to the other electrode. Further comprising
    The electron injection layer is a light emitting device including an ionic polymer.
  2.  前記電極に接して設けられる補助電極をさらに有し、
     該補助電極は、当該補助電極に接する電極よりもシート抵抗が低い請求項1に記載の発光装置。
    An auxiliary electrode provided in contact with the electrode;
    The light emitting device according to claim 1, wherein the auxiliary electrode has a lower sheet resistance than an electrode in contact with the auxiliary electrode.
  3.  前記補助電極は、前記一対の電極のうちでシート抵抗が高い方の電極に接して設けられる請求項2に記載の発光装置。 The light emitting device according to claim 2, wherein the auxiliary electrode is provided in contact with an electrode having a higher sheet resistance among the pair of electrodes.
  4.  前記一対の電極のうちでシート抵抗が低い方の電極のみが、前記接続部を有する請求項1~3のうちのいずれか1つに記載の発光装置。 The light-emitting device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein only the electrode having the lower sheet resistance of the pair of electrodes has the connection portion.
  5.  前記延在部は、前記厚み方向一方から見て、前記幅方向の一方に発光層から突出するように延在する第1延在部と、前記幅方向の他方に発光層から突出するように延在する第2延在部とを含む請求項1~4のいずれか1つに記載の発光装置。 The extension portion, as viewed from one side in the thickness direction, has a first extension portion that extends from the light emitting layer to one side in the width direction, and projects from the light emitting layer to the other side in the width direction. The light emitting device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising a second extending portion that extends.
  6.  支持基板と、所定の配列方向に沿って前記支持基板上に設けられ、直列接続される複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子とを備える発光装置であり、
     各有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子はそれぞれ、一対の電極と、該電極間に設けられる発光層および電子注入層とを備え、
     前記発光層は、前記複数の有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子に跨って、前記所定の配列方向に沿って延在しており、
     前記一対の電極はそれぞれ、前記支持基板の厚み方向一方から見て、前記支持基板の厚み方向および前記配列方向に垂直な幅方向に、発光層から突出するように延在する延在部を有し、
     前記一対の電極のうちの一方の電極は、前記配列方向に隣り合う有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子の他方の電極にまで前記延在部から前記配列方向に延在し、該他方の電極に接続される接続部をさらに有する発光装置の製造方法であって、
     前記発光層となる材料を含むインキを、前記所定の配列方向に沿って前記支持基板上に配置された複数の前記電極に跨って連続的に塗布し、塗布した塗膜を固化することにより発光層を形成する工程と、
     イオン性ポリマーを含むインキを塗布成膜することによって前記電子注入層を形成する工程と、を含む発光装置の製造方法。
    A light-emitting device comprising a support substrate and a plurality of organic electroluminescence elements provided in series along a predetermined arrangement direction and connected in series;
    Each organic electroluminescence element includes a pair of electrodes, a light emitting layer and an electron injection layer provided between the electrodes,
    The light emitting layer extends along the predetermined arrangement direction across the plurality of organic electroluminescence elements,
    Each of the pair of electrodes has an extending portion that extends from the light emitting layer in the width direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the support substrate and the arrangement direction when viewed from one thickness direction of the support substrate. And
    One electrode of the pair of electrodes extends from the extending portion to the other electrode of the organic electroluminescence element adjacent in the arrangement direction and is connected to the other electrode. A method for manufacturing a light emitting device further comprising:
    The ink containing the material to be the light emitting layer is continuously applied across the plurality of electrodes arranged on the support substrate along the predetermined arrangement direction, and light is emitted by solidifying the applied coating film. Forming a layer;
    And a step of forming the electron injection layer by coating and forming an ink containing an ionic polymer.
  7.  前記発光層となる材料を含むインキを塗布する方法が、キャップコート法、スリットコート法、スプレーコート法または印刷法である請求項6に記載の発光装置の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a light emitting device according to claim 6, wherein the method of applying the ink containing the material for the light emitting layer is a cap coating method, a slit coating method, a spray coating method or a printing method.
  8.  前記電子注入層を形成する工程では、大気雰囲気下でインキを塗布する請求項6または7に記載の発光装置の製造方法。
     
     
    The method for manufacturing a light emitting device according to claim 6 or 7, wherein in the step of forming the electron injection layer, ink is applied in an air atmosphere.

PCT/JP2011/076913 2010-11-24 2011-11-22 Light emitting device and method for producing light emitting device WO2012070575A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010260925A JP2012114188A (en) 2010-11-24 2010-11-24 Light-emitting device
JP2010-260925 2010-11-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012070575A1 true WO2012070575A1 (en) 2012-05-31

Family

ID=46145916

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/076913 WO2012070575A1 (en) 2010-11-24 2011-11-22 Light emitting device and method for producing light emitting device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2012114188A (en)
TW (1) TW201232865A (en)
WO (1) WO2012070575A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180219174A1 (en) * 2015-09-29 2018-08-02 Konica Minolta, Inc. Organic electroluminescence panel
WO2017056684A1 (en) * 2015-09-29 2017-04-06 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Organic electroluminescence panel and production method therefor

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001085158A (en) * 1999-09-10 2001-03-30 Toyota Central Res & Dev Lab Inc Organic electroluminescent element
JP2003045674A (en) * 2001-08-02 2003-02-14 Seiko Instruments Inc Organic electroluminescent element
JP2007227073A (en) * 2006-02-22 2007-09-06 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Organic electroluminescent panel
JP2009001784A (en) * 2007-05-18 2009-01-08 Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd Material for organic device, and light-emitting element, light-emitting device, electronic device, field effect transistor and semiconductor device each using material for organic device
JP2010510626A (en) * 2006-11-17 2010-04-02 ゼネラル・エレクトリック・カンパニイ Large area lighting system and manufacturing method thereof
JP2010222383A (en) * 2009-03-19 2010-10-07 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Aromatic compound, and electronic element using the same
WO2010137633A1 (en) * 2009-05-27 2010-12-02 住友化学株式会社 Light emitting device

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8951646B2 (en) * 2008-03-07 2015-02-10 Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited Layered structure comprising a layer containing a conjugated polymer compound

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001085158A (en) * 1999-09-10 2001-03-30 Toyota Central Res & Dev Lab Inc Organic electroluminescent element
JP2003045674A (en) * 2001-08-02 2003-02-14 Seiko Instruments Inc Organic electroluminescent element
JP2007227073A (en) * 2006-02-22 2007-09-06 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Organic electroluminescent panel
JP2010510626A (en) * 2006-11-17 2010-04-02 ゼネラル・エレクトリック・カンパニイ Large area lighting system and manufacturing method thereof
JP2009001784A (en) * 2007-05-18 2009-01-08 Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd Material for organic device, and light-emitting element, light-emitting device, electronic device, field effect transistor and semiconductor device each using material for organic device
JP2010222383A (en) * 2009-03-19 2010-10-07 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Aromatic compound, and electronic element using the same
WO2010137633A1 (en) * 2009-05-27 2010-12-02 住友化学株式会社 Light emitting device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2012114188A (en) 2012-06-14
TW201232865A (en) 2012-08-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5653122B2 (en) Organic electroluminescence device and method for producing the same
JP5752381B2 (en) Laminated structure, polymer, electroluminescent device and photoelectric conversion device
JP5862086B2 (en) Manufacturing method of organic EL element
WO2012133465A1 (en) Electronic device, polymer compound, organic compound, and method of producing polymer compound
WO2012133381A1 (en) Electronic device, polymer compound
JP2012216811A (en) Electronic device and polymer compound
WO2012133462A1 (en) Electronic device, polymer compound
WO2012046736A1 (en) Organic el device, and method for producing same
JP5863307B2 (en) Method for manufacturing organic electroluminescence element
JP5982747B2 (en) Organic EL device
JP5899635B2 (en) Organic EL device
WO2012114936A1 (en) Method for producing organic electroluminescent element
WO2012011456A1 (en) Organic electroluminescence display device manufacturing method and organic electroluminescence display device
WO2012070575A1 (en) Light emitting device and method for producing light emitting device
JP5750247B2 (en) Organic thin film transistor and manufacturing method thereof
WO2012011471A1 (en) Organic electroluminescence display device manufacturing method and organic electroluminescence display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11843365

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11843365

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1